Home

DR4500A Truline Circular Chart Recorder With or Without Control

1. 39 Table 2 16 Position Proportional Control Output Wiring essere enne 41 1 2 17 Wiring ertet e RIEN E 43 Table 2 18 Alarm Output or Digital Input Wiring ennemis 45 Table 2 19 Alarm 3 and Alarm 4 Output 47 Table 2 20 Alarm 5 and Alarm 6 Output ener enne nenne nnns 48 Table 2 21 RS485 Modbus Communications Wiring eessessssseeeeeneeeenee ener ener enne enne 50 Table 2 22 4 20 mA Auxiliary Output Wiring enint enne nennen rne 52 Table 3 1 Configuration Tips EE UV ERE cease E ie REN SURE 61 Table 3 2 Configuration Procedure sess eere innen ener ennt nennen 62 Table 3 3 Input Group Function Prompts seseseeseeeeeeer eene eene nennen 64 Table 3 4 Pen 1 2 3 4 Group Function Prompts sesssessseeeeeeeeennene nennen nenne ener enne enne nnne nenne 66 Table 3 5 Chart Group Function Prompts cccccccesccesecesecssecseecseeeneeeeceseceseeseeeeeeescenseeaeceaeceaecaecaeecaeeeaeeeseeeneenteas 67 Table 3 6 Time Group Function Prompts cccccccccesssssscesscessceseceseceeecseeeneeeaeeeeseeeseenseesecsecsaecaecaeecaeeeseseeeenneenseeas 69 Table 3 7 Totalizer Group Function Prompts
2. 80 pr IEEE 80 I unction n o Ee ies cc oes aes i acs AN E 80 3 18 Modbus Communications Set Up 81 Introduction et o egre e i M rette ioi Ra e Ec rte RED ee enr n 81 FUNCTION PrOMPTS RE 81 3 19 Options Set Up Group interit eb Re eget ee ut ee ee 82 ehh ae sei Aaa eae a ie eM ee Meet 82 FUNCTION PROMPTS CE 82 3 20 Event Message Contiguration eae eet ee t ee ee eee ee 83 oper 83 Function prombpls eiie eroi ite euo ape tip nba ME 83 3 221 L cko t Set Up Group eim HE e eR de E Ie deese E oo pe doe EO reo LR eee 86 e I M 86 DER ite retener e Dedi a eia t DIE eee Beda ee 86 3 22 siii mtb ed eni bc Ps deat vibe iniu 87 P M H 87 E uriction prompt 2 35 oui B eerte tee taut te cates 87 MC Epe cm 88 Vii DR4500A Truline Circular Chart Recorder With or Without Control Product Manual Release M May 2013 4 Configuration Parameter Definitions sssssssss HH 93 4 1 93 eM XP 93 Pa
3. 149 Procedure for Selecting the Setpoint Source sse enne 150 Procedure for Changing the Local Setpoint sese 150 Procedure for Switching Between Setpoints eene 151 Setpoint Selection Indication ise eee dett ere P eee ire rede eode Ea 151 Procedure for Configuring a Single Setpoint Ramp sss 152 Procedure for Running a Setpoint Ramp sese enne ener nnne 153 Procedure for Selecting Two Sets of Tuning Constants sse 155 Procedure for Setting Switchover Values sse ener eene 156 Procedure for Setting Tuning Constant Values essere eene 156 Procedure for Switching PID Sets from the Keyboard esssssssseeeeeens 157 Procedure for Starting Accutune 158 Procedure for Using Accutune for Duplex Control 159 Procedure for Displaying or Changing the Alarm Setpoint essere 161 Procedure for Displaying the 3PSTEP Motor Position ene 162 Digital Input Option Action on Contact 1 nnne 163 Procedure tor Resetting the Tot lizet reete eee P 164 Procedure for Displaying the Totalizer 165 Maximizing rn esee ee eee tee e t 167 Cleaning the Pen Mp nee eee tette rete ege eet 168 Replacing a Chart Lamp eee
4. 236 altere Ue EET UTE ME 236 Equipment needed nere p eee an homie seamen e Erg eee peut eee BR EI ay 236 LC CHA MH DE 242 10 1 OVervIOW coe et eer hd e Ee o edat e oet a deett aired ade 242 mr IDEE EDEN ats 242 What s in this sectlon cecinisse diede recede cere dec i edge e eade ce EP Ponce e dae eee Fdo ee Ede deg de de ee 242 10 2 Exploded Vie WS mainipin Me ee ed ete ee e eeu boat tet ete ae de teda etn 243 Door ass mbl yian EMEN 243 ear ueri EE 244 Basic recorder components without options sssesseseseeeneneenen eene nnne enne ennemis 245 Additional recorder components associated with 247 10 3 Miscellaneous Hardware Kit Contents sssssssssssssssesee eene eene 249 Kit coritelits cune ec tee Era REEL ERE UEM eR Ett tee E SEM PER 249 10 4 Internal Gabling Data eoo Hed Dade 250 Miew of internal cabling xii o er eR eU E EAE DOES TREES IAE Re RR dl gene Ebene 250 10 5 Internal Wiring Diagram Options Only nemen 251 View of internal option tern nnns ss sn nnne 251 Model DRASAR qi pes Pe ES ER PES PESE QU EXE rads EVE
5. do diee Ea 176 6 3 Drawing a Ramp Soak Profile sss eem enen AAAA aari DERA 177 Ramp soak profile exarmiple 2 5 2 3 1 ce e pud e fe eue pf aede debeo do teste idus 177 Profile graphs 25 Ce Ret RE REPE EIER ERRAT EROR 179 Profile ec IE ee en ee 179 Profile 2 ei M 179 luis M M 180 Profile nete eene meae 180 Profile 5 eoe n ONU ERU 181 Profile 6 ieri eie ere t vice ir re yop dee e ee ce nee exe i 181 6 4 Entering the Setpoint Program Data 182 o 182 65 SPRAMP 1 and SP RAMP2 Set Up 184 Introduction p EM 184 SP RAMP prompts iE ne en er i eere oed eee T 184 SP RAMP 1 and SP RAMP 2 worksheet nene enne nennen 184 6 6 Setpoint Program Profiles Set Up Group sss eene 186 EE 186 Setpoint program profiles group 186 Setpoint program profiles worksheet ecciesie reinen renean aE ee bara fet ele
6. Topic See Page 5 1 Overview 136 5 2 Start up 137 5 3 Monitoring Your Recorder 141 5 4 Operator Functions 147 5 5 Operating Modes 148 5 6 Setpoints 150 5 7 Single Setpoint Ramp 152 5 8 Using Two Sets of Tuning Constants PID Values 155 5 9 Using Accutune II 158 5 10 Alarm Setpoints 161 5 11 Three Position Step Control Algorithm 162 5 12 Digital Input Option Remote Switching 163 5 13 Resetting and Displaying Totalizer Value 164 5 14 Monitoring the External Event Operation 166 5 15 Maximizing Pen Life 167 5 16 Routine Maintenance 168 5 17 Installing Replacing Chart 169 5 18 Chart Operation 170 Release M DR4500A Truline Circular Chart Recorder With or Without Control Product Manual 136 May 2013 Operation Start up 5 2 Start up Preparation Before start up there are two tasks to perform e Install or replace the circular chart as described in 5 16 Routine Maintenance sure that the configured settings for the current time and wake time time at which recording begins are correct Note that the recorder is awake during start up to verify interaction with the process During start up you should verify the interaction between your process and the DR4500A recorder to be sure that your process can tolerate some upsets during this procedure Diagnostic tests When power is applied the recorder will run four diagnostic tests Table 5 1 lists the four diagnostic tests Table 5 1 Pow
7. 50 4 20 mA auxiliary output wifing 1 2 52 2 9 Lockout Switch Configuration nene eene ennemi enn 54 INTRODUCTION pt 54 Restrictions based on lockout switch position ennt 54 3 Configuration tts 55 3 1 OVEIVIOW E I E E 55 gig Poi ceee 55 Whats in this SOCOM 55 Prompts ia pe toD ede tiles deste etie Gaia ee Ge eee ead oe 56 3 2 Configuration Prompts imitetur b tetti 57 Diagram prompt hierarchy uocis pecie erepti een TERRE npe BO Ee ER Pe 57 3 5 HowTo Get Started iot ttd od t bee d edet eet de teg ee eae 60 Read the Neo elio rz oan Home 60 Read configuration procedure sssssssssseeeeeee eene nnnm nennen nenne nnns enter 60 Set Up groups eui de ee ae nin ee t qe uet aee een esee a eee e v epis eue e epu 60 Parameter explanations or definitions nennen errem 60 Configuration record sheet ecco SENE I NEE eet ain EXT HERE sore SERV Eos ERR E Du sue Eo 60 3 4 ti toit dl et doux od te edn 61 Introductlor rne tet te e e e d d D HC epit du eter en p terat
8. Insert the wires for the digital inputs into the appropriate screw clamps as shown refer to Figure 2 19 Note that you can wire the contacts in an and or fashion so that both contacts or either contact initiates the configured action Tighten the screws to secure the wires 9 Install the wired plug into J3 10 Remove the unwired plug from J4 11 Run the alarm output wires through the desired knockout 12 For CE Mark conformity e install the ferrite filter as shown in Figure 2 11 e install the shield capacitors as shown in Figure 2 19 13 Strip insulation from the end of each wire 14 Loosen the screws in plug J4 terminals and position the plug as you would to plug it into J4 15 Insert the wires for the alarm devices into the appropriate screw clamps as shown refer to Figure 2 19 Tighten the screws to secure the wires 16 Locate the jumper positions W1 W2 and W3 WA on the printed circuit board Reposition the jumpers as shown in Figure 2 19 for the desired relay control action The recorder is shipped with the W1 and W3 in N C positions 17 Install the wired plug into J4 Release M DR4500A Truline Circular Chart Recorder With or Without Control Product Manual 45 May 2013 Installation Option Wiring Procedures External Load Alarm outputs WA Power Supply _ Cable Shield Alarm No 1 o aS ES D L W3 contac y w3 W4 contac
9. 29 Ferrite filter locations CE MarK 3 1e Reiten ettet eile 29 Shield Wirlng e ete rrr PERSE RR EE RUPEE FERE ONE rrr Eres 29 certe ter ee eee eee bee pt de Roe E ote YE de a Ar RO da epe eee 30 Thermocouple RTD Radiamatic mV or 0 5 inputs enne 33 4 20 mA inputs and transmitter power ssssssseeeeeeneeen mener enn enne nennen ener en eren nennen 35 0 10 Volt dc Inputs dert eter tb tes e rt a te e ones 37 AT Output Wiring Procedures bite p te e belt ne eas 39 4 20 MA control output wiring enm 39 Position proportional or 3 position step control output wiring 41 Relay control output wirlng ene sanded adipe ea ete doe re d nde r eg dde cede 43 2 8 Option Wiring Procedure ii v 12 cece ede e tae e n anu e eov epic 45 Alarm output and digital input wiring essem nennen a nne nennen nennen 45 Additional alarm wiring information sis nn nnne nenas 47 Wiring for alarm outputs 3 4 5 and eane dapat aiea arasa 49 RS485 Modbus communications wiring eese
10. sese nennen 70 Table 3 8 Input Algorithm Group Function Prompts sess nnne nenne 72 Table 3 9 Control 1 or Control 2 Group Function ener 73 Table 3 10 Tuning 1 or Tuning 2 Group Function Prompts sss nennen enne nnns 75 Table 3 11 SP Ramp 1 or 2 Group Function Prompts sess 76 Table 3 12 Timer Group Function Prompts eene enne enne enne 77 Table 3 13 Priority of functions that operate relays 78 Table 3 14 Alarms Group Function nnne nennen innen nnns 79 Table 3 15 Auxiliary Output Group Function Prompts esses 80 Table 3 16 Modbus Communications Group Function ene 81 Table 3 17 Options Group Function Prompts esses ennemis 82 Table 3 18 Event Message Group Function ener 83 Table 3 19 Lockout Group Function 1 entren 86 Table 3 20 Adjust Group Function Prompts eene enne 87 Table 4 1 Input Group Definitions enne nennen nnne ae asike 94 Table 4 2 Pen 1 2 3 4 ae nnne nnne 98 Table 4
11. sss 241 Table 9 18 Procedure 13 Troubleshooting Modbus communications eese 241 Table 10 1 Door assembly parts ies etie rer TR REL HEP E ee Re rede dE daa 243 Table 10 2 Chart plate assembly parts eene nennen nennen nr 245 Table 10 3 Basic recorder parts without options 246 Table 10 4 Recorder parts associated with options 248 Table 10 5 Miscellaneous hardware Kit enne enne nennen trennen 249 Table A 1 Fo RESET group function ener nnne rennen rennen enne 255 Table A 2 Options group function prompts continued from Section 3 Table 3 17 sess 256 Table A 3 Option group definitions continued from Section 4 Table 4 15 sene 257 Table B 1 Input Group Function Prompts iesene e e E OE E EE OE N E O 263 Table B 2 Input Group Function Prompts Continued esses enne 264 Table B 3 Input Group Function Prompts Continued sss eene 265 Table B 4 Input Group Function Prompts Continued esses nennen enne enne enne 266 Table B 5 Additional Totalizer Group Function Prompts sss nemen ener nnns 267 Release M DR4500A Truline Circular Chart Recorder With or Without Control Product Manual xix May 2013 Figure 1 1 Figure 1 2 Figure 2 1 Figure 2 2 Figure 2 3 Figur
12. 60 Restore the factory calibration c Disconnect the wiring from the terminals on plug J2 on the input board see Figure 2 13 Place a jumper across these terminals The controller should read room temperature if it is configured for a thermocouple input d If it does not read room temperature see Section 3 Configuration and change the IN1TYP prompt in the INPUT 1 group to another type of thermocouple e After the change press FUNC key then the LOWR DISP key The controller should read the correct room temperature If it does not the unit has an input failure f Repeat step b This time switch the INTTYP back to the originally selected thermocouple g Repeat step c The controller is restored with factory calibration h Remove the jumper and reconnect the thermocouple to plug J2 61 Field calibrate See Section 7 Input Calibration 62 Replace the input card 63 Call Customer Support 1 800 423 9883 USA and Canada NOTE 1 Will appear in STATUS Set Up Group See procedure for displaying the test results on page 230 234 DR4500A Truline Circular Chart Recorder With or Without Control Product Manual Release M May 2013 Troubleshooting Service Visual Failure Symptoms 9 4 Visual Failure Symptoms Introduction In addition to the error message prompts there are visual failure symptoms that can be identified by noting the erratic recorder functions Symptoms Compare
13. Release M DR4500A Truline Circular Chart Recorder With or Without Control Product Manual 53 May 2013 Installation Lockout Switch Configuration 2 9 Lockout Switch Configuration Introduction The configuration can be locked using S1 switch located next to the microprocessor U17 on the main printed circuit board Restrictions based on lockout switch position Figure 2 23 shows the location of the S1 lockout switch on the main printed circuit board When the lockout switch is OFF Down Configure e You can view and change all applicable operating parameters as described in Section 4 Configuration Parameter Definitions When the lockout switch is ON Up Locked e Most parameters for the recorder are locked and the parameters may not be changed except for Tuning 1 and Tuning 2 parameters and adjustments to time date day year M HIT Main Printed Wiring Board Right Side 51 Lockout Switch UP ON Locked DOWN OFF Configure 22709 Figure 2 23 S1 Lockout Switch Location n ATTENTION Lockout can also be configured under set up group LOCKOUT See Subsection 3 21 This feature also includes the special screw and plate that provide the lead seal capability for sealing the chart plate This feature is normally used with DR45AH model recorders 54 DR4500A Truline Circular Chart Recorder With or Without Control Product Manual Release M May 2013 3 Configuration 3
14. 72 IMO GU E S 72 Furiction promplS 4 52 ex et deret oe nica Redde are iT anaes 72 3 12 Control Set Up seni nn sn herren tlle sinn nne 73 INTRODUCTION gerer PEE 73 1 Me 73 3 13 Tuning Parameters Set Up 75 IntrOGUCTION E Em 75 F nctior prompts ete ret DD e od kegs Qe OM cap TER 75 3 14 SP Ramp Set UP Groups 1 tc erem ete Mi nde beet E eee aet aee acide 76 Ier EP EE 76 76 SetpoMt Progra PEE 76 I riction prompls EEEE A SE AA E O EE 76 3 15 Timer Set Up Group ITO GU CHO Ne 2e iiiter their On tr sr memo Ne rr die ede ente in ros 77 Function prompts Ec 77 3 16 Alarms Set Up ee el ei 78 Introduction ERR 78 Priority of functions that operate relays 78 Function PROM PIS nini petet RER REN 79 3 17 Auxiliary Output Set Up
15. Universal upport brackets Mounting brackets supplied Support brackets with recorder included in kit 30755134 xxx Figure 2 6 Mounting in a Panel Using Universal Filler Kit 20 DR4500A Truline Circular Chart Recorder With or Without Control Product Manual Release M May 2013 Installation Mounting Methods Mounting flush in panel using cutout made for Kent Model 105M Refer to Figure 2 7 and follow the procedure in Table 2 6 to mount your recorder in an existing cutout using the cutout made for Kent Model 105M Table 2 6 Mounting Flush in a Panel Using Kent Model 105M Cutout Step Action Drill two 1 4 inch holes in the back of the panel as shown in Figure 2 7 These holes are for 10 32 screws to be inserted from back of panel into threaded inserts in the back of the recorder case ATTENTION the panel is more than 1 4 inch thick substitute 10 32 x 1 2 inch long screws for the 3 8 inch long screws supplied with the recorder While supporting the recorder insert it through the panel cutout and orient the case so that the threaded inserts at the bottom of the case align with the holes drilled in the panel From the rear of the panel insert two 10 32 pan head screws of appropriate length into threaded inserts in the recorder case From the back of the panel attach a mounting bracket to each side of the recorder case using a 1 4 20 x 1 2 inch hex screw and a lockwasher for each bracket moun
16. emere nene enne nns 158 Using Accutune with Duplex Heat Cool Control emen ener nnne 159 Procedure MD G n H m 159 5 10 gt Alarm Setpolhts eR enda ee cate etes eed meae dic e vee deum dd E Meu edge a 161 Introductions scm rrr ERR REDEANT ORE RI SEE sauteed ci seus duets CERRO Ap ne EE REED ERE RAE 161 Procedure for displaying the alarm setpoints essssseneeneenm eene eene nnne 161 5 11 Three Position Step Control AIQOrithim emen nnns 162 IntroduGtiO c 162 Estimated motor position 2 eiui reden e in Ne ELSE XS HE tne ex endo ele Hd peu 162 Displaying the motor positioM PEN 162 Power up OUtput EE N TTET 162 5 12 Digital Input Option Remote Switching esssee enn emm emnes 163 Introduction 163 Action on Contact ClOSUIC Em 163 163 5 13 Resetting and Displaying Totalizer 22 164 IMMOCGUCTION CCP H 164 Resetting the totaliZer locally eerie entr irren sna 164 Resetting the totalizer using the Wake Time feature emm ener 164 External totalizer reset 1 o eee e RR ee be YR erp RE hant 165 Displaying the totaliZer value eere iret eene de p
17. PV Kx Error x A B C NOTE 1 MULTIPLIER DIVIDER The following formula applies PV Kx Error x PVgj PV 0 A B C NOTE 1 MULTIPLIER The following formula applies PV K x Input IxRatio A Bias A x Input 2xRatio B Bias B x Input 3xRatio C4 Bias C x PVgj PVj 106 DR4500A Truline Circular Chart Recorder With or Without Control Product Manual Release M May 2013 Configuration Parameter Definitions Input Algorithm Set Up Group Lower Display Upper Display Parameter Definition Prompt Range of Setting or Selection A B C NOTE 1 SUBTRACTOR MULTIPLIER For BTU calculations The following formula applies PV Kx Input IxRatio A4 Bias A Input 2xRatio B Bias B x Input 3xRatio C Bias C LO SEL LOW SELECT PV is the lower of INPUT 1 or INPUT 2 HI SEL HI SELECT PY is the higher of INPUT 1 or INPUT 2 COEFF 0 00 to 99 00 K CONSTANT Appears only if a selection is made at INP ALG prompt PV HIGH 999 to 9999 CALCULATED PV HIGH LIMIT Only applicable for algorithms VA B C VA B C A B C A B C PV LOW 999 to 9999 CALCULATED PV LOW LIMIT Only applicable for algorithms VA B C VA B C A B C A B C RATIO A 20 to 20 RATIO FOR INPUT 1 Used with the A term in the match equation selected at prompt INP ALG BIAS A 999 to 9999 BIAS FOR INPUT 1 Used with the
18. There are no guaranteed soaks if SOAKDEV 0 PROFILE 1to6 PROFILE used by Setpoint Program This can also be set or changed when viewed in the lower display and the current profile is in the HOLD state STATE DISABLE Determines the state of the program after it completes HOLD the final program segment cycles If you select DISABL you must enable the program through the function prompt before you can run the program again If you select HOLD you can run the program again by pressing the RUN HOLD key RECOVERY ENABLE This mode when enabled will allow the SP Program to DISABL continue from the point at which the power was removed when there is a power interruption PROG END ENABLE Determines the status of the control output after the DISABL program is run If you select LASTSP the recorder controls to the last setpoint value which becomes the LSP For FSAFE selection the recorder is switched to manual mode and to the selected failsafe output value SP RAMP 1 and SP RAMP 2 worksheet 184 DR4500A Truline Circular Chart Recorder With or Without Control Product Manual Release M May 2013 Setpoint Ramp Soak Programming and Operation SP RAMP1 and SP RAMP2 Set Up Group Use this worksheet to make a record of your SP RAMPI and SP RAMP2 settings Prompt Description Range Your selection SP RAMP1 Accesses prompts for Control Loop 1 s N
19. 2 537 H 01456 10 inches 12 inches 15 inches 18 inches 21 inches 24 inches 27 inches 30 inches 36 inches 42 inches 48 inches 60 inches 72 inches 2 843 H4 Q 3 142 H4 Q 3 574 Q 3 988 4 Q 4223 Q 4 574 H Q 4 97 H Q 5 022 H4 Q 5 462 Q 6 12 Q 6 626 H 4 Q 7 183 H4 005421 1 9025 1 9724 L 01616 1 9530 L 017 1 9362 L 0168 1 9062 01875 1 8977 039 1 9619 0408 1 9497 038 1 9269 L 0625 1 9663 L 08 1 991 078 1 9628 L 085 9586 126 9833 Q 7 839 H4 155 1 9871 Equations provided by Plasti Fab Inc Where W Width in feet Flow in cubic feet per second Height in feet DR4500A Truline Circular Chart Recorder With or Without Control Product Manual 273 Model DR45AW References 274 DR4500A Truline Circular Chart Recorder With or Without Control Product Manual Release M May 2013 C Security Lockout C 1 Overview Introduction Your recorder has a security bypass code which allows you to enter secured areas if you have forgotten or lost the operator security code To use the universal password go to the Lockout Set Up group At PASSWORD enter 1502 This overrides the existing password Be sure to re enter a new password to lockout any unauthorized changes to the recorder s configuration and calibration prompts n ATTENTION Remove this page for security Note this applies
20. 252 WM NEEO JM MEILLEUR LEE 252 EIE 252 Whats inthls Sectior idee me Cette Te 252 2 Hardware Identification ene eene nennen rrt 253 PEREAT 253 Be S Tenant 253 DRA45AR withitwo to four inputs trei come cc ee Aedes esas teal enses eaten 254 xiv DR4500A Truline Circular Chart Recorder With or Without Control Product Manual Release M May 2013 A RoReset Configuration iue date n RR deb Le di ste TED EE 255 Ib iroduclioni stare Lo 255 Accessing Fo reset prompts dpi QE e dab Reina dal rade teo bte Resim e auc inda rade eo 255 Furictiori prompls eret re c ER een peer e D EE RR ERAT So rate RU bru tested 255 A4 Options Configuration rere nude nM RE 256 ay A A 256 Ab Operations Additions cotta lt imn d m 258 PEE ONERE REESE TROUPE MED EP 258 Viewing FO sterilization display rrr nee e neo p ei pe Ei ee 258 Digital input REM SW prompt selection eene 258 A 6 Configuration Worksheet Additions essen nnne 259 Configuratiom AddItiONS 259 B Model DISd5 V ocu cp tacto DEDI noe eae aed 261 B
21. 9 999 to 9 999 Polynomial coefficient C4 C5x10 7 9 999 to 9 999 Polynomial coefficient C5 NOTE 1 Input 1 x Ratio A Bias A 108 B Input 2 x Ratio B Bias B C Input 3 x Ratio C Bias C The order of the inputs are fixed in the equations DR4500A Truline Circular Chart Recorder With or Without Control Product Manual Release M May 2013 Configuration Parameter Definitions Control Parameters Set Up Group 4 8 Control Parameters Set Up Group Introduction The functions listed in this group deal with how the DR4500A will control the process including number of tuning parameter sets setpoint source ratio bias tracking power up recall setpoint limits output direction and limits deadband and hysteresis control algorithm output algorithm and the current duplex range There are two control groups Control group prompts Table 4 7 lists all the function prompts in the Control 1 or Control 2 set up groups and their definitions Table 4 7 Control 1 or 2 Group Definitions Lower Display Prompt Upper Display Range of Setting or Selection Parameter Definition CONTROL 1 ENABLE DISABL CONTROL 1 allows you to enable or disable control loop 1 PID SETS NUMBER OF TUNING PARAMETER SETS this selection lets you choose one or two sets of tuning constants gain rate and reset 1 ONLY ONE SET ONLY only one set of tuning parameters is available Configu
22. A term in the math equation selected at prompt INP ALG RATIO B 20 to 20 RATIO FOR INPUT 2 Used with the B term in the math equation selected at prompt INP ALG BIAS B 999 to 9999 BIAS FOR INPUT 2 Used with the B term in the math equation selected at prompt INP ALG RATIO C 20 to 20 RATIO FOR INPUT 3 Used with the C term in the math equation selected at prompt INP ALG BIAS C 999 to 9999 BIAS FOR INPUT 3 Used with the C term in the math equation selected at prompt INP ALG POLYNOM NONE INPUT 1 INPUT 2 POLYNOMIAL EQUATION A fifth order Polynomial INPUT 3 INPUT 4 Equation can be used on any one of the four Analog Inputs The equation is in the form Y C5 107 X9 C4 1075 103 C2 1071 X2 C4 X CQ Where X is the analog input selected in 96 of span XEU_ 100 Span EU Co is a value between 99 99 to 99 99 C4 C5 are values between 9 999 to 9 999 C0 VALUE 99 99 to 99 99 Polynomial coefficient CO C1 VALUE 9 999 to 9 999 Polynomial coefficient C1 C2x10 1 9 999 to 9 999 Polynomial coefficient C2 C3x10 3 9 999 to 9 999 Polynomial coefficient C3 Release M DR4500A Truline Circular Chart Recorder With or Without Control Product Manual 107 May 2013 Configuration Parameter Definitions Input Algorithm Set Up Group Lower Display Upper Display Parameter Definition Prompt Range of Setting or Selection C4x10 5
23. Parameter Definition AUX OUT AUX OUT continued DISABL AUXILIARY OUTPUT SELECTION provides an mA output representing any of twelve control parameters The display for Auxiliary Output viewing will be in engineering units for all but output Output will be designated in percent 96 e Other prompts affected by these selections 4 mA VAL and 20mA VAL NO AUXILIARY OUTPUT IN 1 INPUT 1 This represents the configured range of input 1 FOR EXAMPLE Type J Thermocouple 0 to 1600 F 0 F display 0 output 1600 F display 100 output IN 2 INPUT 2 represents the value of the configured range of input 2 PV 1 PROCESS VARIABLE 1 Represents the value of the Process Variable for Loop 1 PV Input 1 Bias DEV 1 DEVIATION 1 PROCESS VARIABLE MINUS SETPOINT Represents 100 to 100 of the selected PV span in engineering units for Loop 1 FOR EXAMPLE Type Thermocouple PV range PV span Deviation range 1000 F to 1000 F If PV 500 F and SP 650 F then Deviation Display 150 F Auxiliary Output 42 5 300 F to 700 F 1000 F NOTE A deviation of 0 F yields an auxiliary output of 50 OUT 1 SP 1 OUTPUT 1 Represents the displayed controller output in percent for Loop 1 SETPOINT 1 Represents the value of the setpoint in units of PV for Loop 1 Release M May 2013 DR4500A Truline Ci
24. Replacing a main PCB does not normally require recalibration since a new main PCB is already factory calibrated whereas an input PCB is not e You have changed the input type through configuration which results in the loss of the previous field calibration but restores factory calibration See Subsection 7 2 Restoring Factory Calibration paragraph that follows What s in this section This section contains the following topics Topic See Page 7 1 Overview 197 7 2 Restoring Factory Calibration 198 7 3 Minimum and Maximum Range Values 200 7 4 Preliminary Information 201 7 5 Calibration Set Up and Wiring for PV Inputs 203 7 6 Calibration Procedure 212 7 7 Printing Characteristics Adjustments 215 Release M DR4500A Truline Circular Chart Recorder With or Without Control Product Manual 197 May 2013 Input Calibration Restoring Factory Calibration 7 2 Restoring Factory Calibration How to restore it The factory calibration constants for all the input actuation types that can be used with the DR4500A recorder are stored in its nonvolatile memory Thus you can quickly restore the Factory Calibration for a given input actuation type by simply configuring the actuation type through the INI TYPE or IN2 TYPE IN3 TYPE IN4 TYPE prompt to another type and then changing it back to the original type See Table 7 1 for the procedure ATTENTION be field calibrated This procedure ap
25. n 1 2 3 or 4 No filter 0 provided for the input to smooth the input signal You can configure the first order lag time constant from 1 to 120 seconds If you do not want filtering enter O BURNOUT NONE UP DOWN BURNOUT PROTECTION SENSOR BREAK provides most input types with upscale or downscale protection if the input fails e Not available for inputs 0 5 V 0 10 V or 4 20 mA NO BURNOUT Failsafe output applied for failed input UPSCALE BURNOUT will make the indicated PV signal increase when a sensor fails and flash the upper display DOWNSCALE BURNOUT will make the indicated PV signal decrease when a sensor fails and flash the upper display NOTE For no Burnout that is None to function properly on a linear input there must be a dropping resistor directly across the input terminals that is not remote then the unit can detect the zero voltage that occurs when the 4 20 mA line is opened EMISSIV 01 to 1 00 EMISSIVITY is a correction factor applied to the Radiamatic input signal that is the ratio of the actual energy emitted from the target to the energy which would be emitted if the target were a perfect radiator Available only for Radiamatic inputs Repeat the procedure for INPUT 2 INPUT 3 and INPUT 4 configuration Release M May 2013 DR4500A Truline Circular Chart Recorder With or Without Control Product Manual 97 Configuration Parameter D
26. n ATTENTION For recorders with two controllers both enabled remember that any controller related values displayed correspond with the lighted CHN indicator 1 means that the values apply for Controller 1 and 2 means that the values apply for Controller 2 Select two sets The procedure in Table 5 17 tells you how to select two sets of tuning constants Table 5 17 Procedure for Selecting Two Sets of Tuning Constants Step Operation Press Action Result 1 Select Control Set Up SET Until you see group UP Upper Display SET UP Lower Display CONTROL 2 Select FUNC You will see PID SETS function Upper Display Available selections are 1 ONLY 1 set of constants 2 KEYBD 2 sets keyboard selectable 2 PVSW 2 sets auto switch at PV value 2 SPSW 2 sets auto switch at SP value Lower Display PIDSETS A or V Select the type of PID set Set switchover value If you select 2 PVSW or 2 SPSW you must set a value at which the sets will switch over The procedure in Table 5 18 shows you how to set this value Release M DR4500A Truline Circular Chart Recorder With or Without Control Product Manual 155 May 2013 Operation Using Two Sets of Tuning Constants PID Values Table 5 18 Procedure for Setting Switchover Values Step Operation Press Action Result 1 Select switchover value FUNC Until you see function assuming you Upper Display The switchover value are
27. selection Parameter groups and prompts The control information is found in three configuration groups which are accessed by the SET UP key Each of these groups contains prompts viewed in the lower display which deal with functions that are pertinent to that particular group These are accessed by pressing the FUNC key The selections or values are listed in the upper display Refer to Section 3 Configuration for step by step instructions What s in this section The table below lists the topics that are covered in this section They are listed in the order of their appearance in the recorder Topic See Page 4 1 Overview 93 4 2 Input Parameters Set Up Group 94 4 3 Pen Parameters Set Up Group 98 4 4 Chart Parameters Set Up Group 100 4 5 Time Parameters Set Up Group 103 4 6 Total Parameters Set Up Group 104 4 7 Input Algorithm Set Up Group 106 4 8 Control Parameters Set Up Group 109 4 9 Tuning Parameters Set Up Group 118 4 10 Setpoint Ramp Set Up Group 121 4 11 Timer Set Up Group 123 4 12 Alarms Set Up Group 124 4 13 A Auxiliary Output Set Up Group 127 4 14 Modbus Communications Set Up Group 129 4 15 Options Set Up Group 130 4 16 Event Message Set Up Group 132 4 17 Lockout Parameters Set Up Group 133 4 18 Printing Characteristics Adjustments 134 Release M May 2013 DR4500A Truline Circular Chart Recorder With or Without Control Product Manual 93 Co
28. transmitter with 214128 power Cable Shield 4 20 mA y 30756141 003 Input PWA DR4500A 12201 pF 4 20 mA source 0047 uF T3 Plug J2 ES ik Capacitor p s 8 z 2 4 Br Cow Fr ATTENTION The DR4500A Recorder inputs are protected from overvoltage by a protection diode The wake up pulse on Transmitter the ST3000 may not be recognized by the transmitter due to power 24 Vdc this clamping action It may be necessary to add 100 ohm s of Plug J11 additional loop resistance so the transmitter and SFC can communicate Cable Shield VIEW B From Ao transmitter receiving 24Vdc power from recorder 1 x bd 0047 uF ds Plug J i 1 dis S Capacitor Ferrite filter Figure 2 14 4 20 mA Input Wiring 36 DR4500A Truline Circular Chart Recorder With or Without Control Product Manual Release M May 2013 Installation Input Wiring Procedures 0 10 Volt dc inputs You can wire input 1 2 3 or 4 for 0 10 Volt dc actuations The polarity for inputs 1 2 3 and 4 is identical The prerequisites are e Model Number Table 1 3XXX X3XX XXX3 n ATTENTION Calibrate the recorder to achieve the stated accuracy Refer to Section 7 Input Calibration Refer to Figure 2 15 and follow the procedure in Table 2 14 to wire 0 10 Vdc inputs Table 2 14 0 10 Volt dc Input Wiring Step Action 1 Op
29. Figure 7 9 4 20 mA inputs Route leads for example copper leads or thermocouple extension wires through a conduit hole in the recorder case so that you will be able to close the chart plate Close the chart plate after you have completed the applicable calibration set up 204 DR4500A Truline Circular Chart Recorder With or Without Control Product Manual Release M May 2013 Input Calibration Calibration Set Up and Wiring for PV Inputs Thermocouple inputs using an ice bath Refer to Figure 7 3 and wire the recorder according to the procedure given in Table 7 6 Table 7 6 Set Up Wiring Procedure for Thermocouple Inputs Using an Ice Bath Step Action 1 Connect the copper leads to the calibration source see Figure 7 3 2 Connect a length of thermocouple extension wire to the end of each copper lead and insert the junction points into the ice bath 3 Connect the other end of the thermocouple extension wires to the clamp type terminals in the plug for the applicable input connector J2 4 Reinstall the plug into the input connector J2 on the applicable circuit board for Input 1 Input 2 Input 3 or Input 4 Calibration source Copper wires C NI Gz Containers of crushed ice vegan dl eoo Thermocouple 21444 extension wires T C e RTD Be sure W1 MA Connector plug J2 for jumper is in position Be sure W3 jumper inputs 1 2 3 a
30. Plug J1 pe 0047 yF case See Figure 2 11 Spector Capacitor Kit 51197755 001 Install capacitors as shown in figure Figure 2 16 4 20 mA Control Output Wiring or Aux Out 2 and 3 Wiring 40 DR4500A Truline Circular Chart Recorder With or Without Control Product Manual Release M May 2013 Installation Output Wiring Procedures Position proportional or 3 position step control output wiring You can wire control output 1 or 2 for position proportional or 3 position step output The prerequisites are Model Number Key DRASAT Model Number Table 2 10 40 or 44 Refer to Figure 2 17 and follow the procedure in Table 2 16 to wire position proportional or 3 position step control outputs ATTENTION Be sure to calibrate the position proportional control output so that the increase and decrease relays operate properly with respect to the position of the external feedback slidewire Refer to Section 8 Output Calibration in this manual Slidewire input is not required for 3 position step control but can be used for motor position indication Table 2 16 Position Proportional Control Output Wiring Step Action 1 Open the recorder door Loosen the captive screw in the chart plate and swing the plate out 2 Locate connector J2 and J5 on the control output 1 printed circuit board refer to Figure 2 17 for location 3 Locate jumper positions W2 W3 and W4 W5 below c
31. Refer to Figure 2 6 and follow the procedure in Table 2 5 to mount your recorder in an existing cutout using the Universal Filler Kit Table 2 5 Mounting Flush in a Panel Using Universal Filler Kit Step Action 1 Lay the recorder face down on a clean work surface and position the universal filler plate as shown in Figure 2 6 2 Measure the height of the existing panel cutout 3 Refer to Figure 2 6 Position the support brackets supplied with the kit so that the distance from the top of the window in the filler plate to the right angle of the support brackets is just less than the height of the existing panel cutout 4 Secure brackets with two 10 32 x 1 4 inch screws provided in the kit by inserting them through the holes in the filler plate into the tapped screw holes in the recorder case 5 Insert the recorder into the cutout from the front of the panel as shown in Figure 2 6 6 Refer to Figure 2 6 From the back of the panel attach a mounting bracket to each side of the recorder case using a 1 4 20 x 1 2 inch hex screw and a lockwasher for each bracket mounting hardware supplied with recorder Leave the screws slightly loose so you can adjust the brackets 7 While holding the recorder firmly against the panel slide each bracket against the back of the panel and tighten the screws NOTE Universal filler plate and attaching Universal hardware are included in kt 30755134 xxx filler plate
32. 129 to 593 6 471 mV 44 547 mV J 0 to 1600 18 to 871 0 885 mV 1 019 mV 50 059 mV J low 20 to 770 7 to 410 0 334 mV 22 397 mV K 320 to 2500 196 to 1371 5 822 mV 0 798 mV 54 845 mV K low 20 to 1000 29 to 538 1 114 mV 22 251 mV NiNiMoly 32 to 2500 0 to 1371 0 001 mV 1 458 mV 71 330 mV NIC Nicrosil Nisil 0 to 2372 17 8 to 1300 0 461 mV 0 525 mV 47 502 mV R 0 to 3100 18 to 1704 0 089 mV 0 111 mV 20 275 mV S 0 to 3100 18 to 1704 0 092 mV 0 113 mV 17 993 mV T 300 to 700 184 to 371 5 341 mV 0 789 mV 19 095 mV T low 200 to 600 129 to 316 4 149 mV 15 769 mV W5W26 0 to 4200 18 to 2315 0 234 mV 0 062 mV 37 066 mV W5W26 low 0 to 2240 18 to 1227 0 234 mV 22 277 mV RTD 100 O 300 to 900 184 to 482 25 180 274 96 Q 100 O RH 130 to 392 90 to 200 64 30 O 175 84 O 200 0 32 to 752 0 to 400 200 Q 498 10 Q 200 0 32 to 392 0 to 200 200 Q 353 74 500 Q 300 to 900 184 to 482 125 90 O 1374 80 O Milliamps 4 to 20 mA 4 mA 20 mA Millivol 0 to 10 mV 0 mV 10 mV iib 10 to 50 mV 10 mV 50 mV Volts 0 to 5 Volts 0 Volts 5 Volts 0 to 10 Volts 0 Vols 10 Volts Radiamatic RH 1400 to 3400 760 to 1871 0 99 mV 57 12 mV Range values for thermocouples are based on a cold junction temperature of 32 F 0 C These values must be adjusted for the actual cold junction temperature when using the ambient temperature method for calibrating thermocouple in
33. 234 0 5 Vde 33 CONFTEST 233 Radiamatic mV 33 EE FAIL 235 RTD 33 FACT CRC 234 Thermocouple 33 FAILSAFE 233 Installation INxFAIL 255 Operating limits 8 PV LIMIT 235 Preinstallation information 7 RAM TEST 233 Installing chart 770 RV LIMIT 235 Internal cabling 253 SW FAIL 235 Error message prompts 255 J Error messages 146 Event message configuration 83 Jumper positions 205 Event pen function 167 Event pen operation 167 K F Key test 739 Knockout locations 7 Factory calibration 200 Failsafe 237 Failsafe output value 74 L Failure Symp toms 229 Local setpoint 151 Ferrite filter locations CE Mark 29 Local setpoint 1 0 Field wiring 203 Lockout 86 87 134 Filter 65 97 Lockout password 86 87 Fo reset 2 58 Low flow cutoff selection 65 Fo sterilization calculation 258 Low output limit 74 112 Fo sterilization time 259 Low range value 65 97 Low setpoint limit 73 G Gain 120 M Gain 2 1 21 Maintenance 69 Gain units 74 Manual calibration mode 223 Grid line contrast 136 140 Manual mode 49 Adjusting output 150 151 183 184 H Selecting 150 Manual reset 720 Hardware kit contents 252 Minutes per repeat 114 Header for chart 67 101 Monitoring your recorder 42 High output limit 74 112 Motor traverse time 223 High range value 65 96 Mounting High setpoint limit 73 Overall dimensions 6 Hours per revolution 700 Mounting methods 17 Hysteresis 74 113 127 2 inch pipe 24 Flush
34. 5 163 5 4 18 Double bit latch tdg Left side view 2 Bottom view 9 ale gr Surface mounting 322 355 A 12 7 14 Front view Back view NEMA4X DR4500 322 12 7 17 5 Reference ENS ne 321 9 69 F TA 203 0 8 PIU oOo 23 x Panel cutout all models 438 e Bottom view i 17 25 Surface mounting 321 126 9 1 JIi plk 387 gt 406 110 15 25 42 La m 43 Front view Back view 142 NEMA4X 5 6 14 Figure 2 3 Overall Dimensions 16 DR4500A Truline Circular Chart Recorder With or Without Control Product Manual Release M May 2013 Installation Mounting Methods 2 4 Mounting Methods Introduction There are several methods available for mounting your recorder Flush in Panel new panel cutout Flush in Panel using an existing panel cutout using universal filler plate kit using cutout made for Kent Model 105M Flush in Panel for recorders with NEMA4 Door e Ona2 inch Pipe e Surface of panel or wall Procedures for each method follow Choose the one that meets your mounting requirements Use the associated dimension drawings for reference How to remove knockouts for conduits Before you mount the recorder remove the appropriate knockouts in the bottom and or sides of the recorder case for wire entry via 1 2 12 7 mm conduits Refer to Figure 2 4 for k
35. DEVSETPT Deviation Setpoint Value 999 0 to 9999 0 SCROLL Lower Display Scroll NONE NONE 1 SEC 2 SEC 3 SEC GRANDTOT Grand Totalizer ENABLE DISABL DISABL 82 DR4500A Truline Circular Chart Recorder With or Without Control Product Manual Release M May 2013 Configuration Event Message Configuration 3 20 Event Message Configuration Introduction This Set Up group allows you to specify an event message to be printed on a designated area of the chart when triggered by a specific selectable actuation Function prompts Table 3 18 lists all the function prompts in the Event Message Set Up group Table 3 18 Event Message Group Function Prompts Function Prompt Lower Display Function Name Selections or Range of Setting Upper Display Factory Setting EVENT1 Event 1 Trigger NONE EXTSW1 EXTSW2 ALARM1 ALARM2 ALARM3 ALARM4 ALARMS ALARM6 NONE MESSAGE1 Message for Event 1 up to six characters 0 to 9 AtoZ T blank EVENT1 POSITON1 Chart Position for Message 1 Printing 0 to 100 87 3 EVENT 2 Event 2 Trigger NONE EXTSW1 EXTSW2 ALARM1 ALARM2 ALARM3 ALARM4 ALARMS ALARMG NONE MESSAGE2 Message for Event 2 up to six characters 0 to 9 AtoZ T blank EVENT2 POSITON2 Chart Position for Message 2 Printing 0 to 100 85 5 Release M May 2013 DR4500A Truline Circular Chart Recorder With or With
36. Fide ee Ede done eos e ete PE eee 197 7 2 Restoring Factory Calibration nennen nemen ia nnns 198 How to restore it m 198 Inieie oM ce I 198 7 3 Minimum and Maximum Range Values ssssssseeenee enne eene 200 Select the range values 2 eiie eee eed tee i eaa 200 TA Preliminary Infortmatiorni 3 eerie reote etaed ee ER SE ER LESER EA 201 Disconnect the field wirlng 2 Irene ed depre iere N He A Ede ev ded Coco Ec Ee Ledger 201 Equipment needed 1 obe Eee en ure eR Rare e RR LE RR NE RAS RON RE 202 7 5 Calibration Set Up and Wiring for PV 203 Neg 203 Thermocouple input calibration 204 General setup procedure riter RS 204 Thermocouple inputs using ice nennen nnne errem nere enne 205 Thermocouple inputs using a compensated calibrator eme 206 Thermocouple inputs using the ambient temperature method sssssseee eee enn 207 RTD Resistance Thermometer Device inputs ssessseeeenn eene nne ennemis 208 Radiamatic mill
37. GAIN 2 0 1 to 1000 or 0 1 to 1000 PROPORTIONAL BAND 2 or GAIN 2 RATE 2 and RESET 2 parameters are the same as previously described for Heat except that they refer to the cool Release M May 2013 DR4500A Truline Circular Chart Recorder With or Without Control Product Manual 119 Configuration Parameter Definitions Tuning Parameters Set Up Group Lower Display Upper Display Parameter Definition Prompt Range of Setting or Selection RATE2MIN 0 08 to 10 00 minutes zone tuning constants on duplex models or the second 0 08 or less OFF set of PID constants whichever is pertinent RSET2MIN 0 02 to 50 00 RSET2RPM CYC SEC 1 to 120 seconds CYCLE TIME HEAT determines the length of one time proportional output relay cycle Defined as HEAT cycle time for Heat Cool applications e Electromechanical relays CYC2 SEC 1 to 120 seconds CYCLE TIME 2 COOL is the same as above except it applies to Duplex models as the cycle time in the COOL zone of Heat Cool applications or for 2nd set of PID constants e Electromechanical relays 120 DR4500A Truline Circular Chart Recorder With or Without Control Product Manual Release M May 2013 Configuration Parameter Definitions Setpoint Ramp Set Up Group 4 10 Setpoint Ramp Set Up Group Introduction The Setpoint Ramp 1 and 2 Set Up groups contain the Function parameters that enable you to configure 2 setpoints Each setpo
38. Minutes remaining in SP Prog Soak RECYC Number of recycles left in SP Program 00 Time remaining in Timer function LI LIE Time elapsed in Timer function TUNEXxXXX Accutune ll indicator x 1 or 2 ATTENTION The lower display can be configured to scroll through the operating parameters MAN e Alternately selects AUTO AUTO Lower display automatically displays setpoint value in engineering units MAN Lower display automatically indicates output in 96 CHART e Used to stop printing operation and move pen to outer limit for chart change Display will revert to date and time RUN e Alternate action switch initiates or holds the Setpoint Ramp or Setpoint Program HOLD e n configuration mode restores the original value or selection if you do not want to enter a change you are making to a parameter A e Increases the setpoint output or configuration values displayed v Decreases the setpoint output or configuration values displayed 4 DR4500A Truline Circular Chart Recorder With or Without Control Product Manual Release M May 2013 Overview Set up Tasks 1 3 Set up Tasks Major set up tasks As shown in Figure 1 2 there are four major tasks that you must complete to Set Up the DR4500A recorder for operation For easy reference the section numbers for each task are shown 1 Determine your recorder s hardware components and See Section 2 software functions 2 Mount the
39. See SCALER and TOTAL EU function prompts in this group for selections RSETTOT YES RESET TOTALIZER TO ZERO this selection lets NO you reset the totalizer to zero e Selecting YES will reset the totalizer to zero Function prompt RSETABLE must be set to LOCAL TOTAL1 DISABL INPUT 1 INPUT 2 TOTALIZATION FOR INPUT 1 OR 2 this selection TOTAL2 INPUT 3 INPUT 4 PV1 allows you to select the input to Totalizer 1 or 2 E TIME e E TIME accumulates elapsed time since last reset in the units specified under RATE function e Not DISABL allows selection of the rest of the prompts associated with totalization TOTALEU 0 to 9 TOTAL ENGINEERING UNITS this selection allows AtoZ you to make up to 3 selections to create a unit identifier that the total represents e For alphanumeric entries the display will cycle from blank left to right with highlighting increased brightness of each digit The value of each digit can be changed only when it is highlighted 104 DR4500A Truline Circular Chart Recorder With or Without Control Product Manual Release M May 2013 Configuration Parameter Definitions Total Parameters Set Up Group Lower Display Upper Display Parameter Definition Prompt Range of Setting or Selection RATE RATE OF INTEGRATION This selection allows you to select the desired rate of integration It must match input units Example GPM must us
40. ctricos locais e deve ser realizada por pessoal experiente devidamente autorizado e terminal de terra deve ser ligado antes de ser feita qualquer outra cabelagem e desligado em ultimo lugar e Recomenda se um comutador na fonte de alimenta o principal pr ximo do equipamento ESPECIFICAGOES DO EQUIPAMENTO Voltagem 102 a 132 Vac 204 a 264 Vac Frequ ncia 50 60 Hz Pot ncia ou consumo de corrente 20 Watts max CONDICOES AMBIENTAIS operar o instrumento na presen a de l quidos ou vapores inflam veis A opera o de qualquer instrumento el ctrico em tal ambiente constitui um perigo para a seguranga Temperatura Ambiente 0a 55 Humidade 5 a 90 RH a 40 C Vibra o 0 a 200 Hz acelera o 0 2 g INSTALA O DO EQUIPAMENTO O Registrador deve ser montado num painel para limitar o acesso do operador aos terminais traseiros Release M DR4500A Truline Circular Chart Recorder With or Without Control Product Manual 285 May 2013 Foreign Language Safety Instructions SP21 6056 NORMAS DE SEGURIDAD D 10 SP21 6056 Para reducir el riesgo de choque el ctrico el cual podr a causar lesiones personales seguir todas las indicaciones de este documento Este s mbolo previene al usuario de un riesgo potencial de descarga cuando se puede acceder a corrientes de tensi n peligrosas Terminal de tierra de protecci n Proporcionado para la conexi n de la tierra de protecci n del conductor del sis
41. event pen and tracks the remote contact switch closure by way of the digital 1 or digital 2 input wired to the alarm output digital input printed circuit board Event pen operation When the switch opens the trace for the channel tracks at the configured OFF position 0 100 on the chart When the switch closes the trace tracks at the configured ON position 0 100 96 on the chart and tracks at this position until the switch is opened Thus the Event Pen record makes it easy to monitor the on off operation of an external event 166 DR4500A Truline Circular Chart Recorder With or Without Control Product Manual Release M May 2013 Operation Maximizing Pen Life 5 15 Maximizing Pen Life Steps for maximizing pen life Table 5 28 lists nine steps that will help to maximize the life of your chart pen Table 5 28 Maximizing Pen Life Step Action 1 Store the chart paper in a cool clean dry place where the temperature does not exceed 40 C 104 F and the humidity is below 65 RH 2 Do not expose the pen tip and chart paper to abrasive chemicals or dust that cause excessive pen wear 3 If the recorder is used in a dusty atmosphere provide a positive clean air purge to minimize dust particle accumulation on the chart paper 4 Periodically clean the pen arm using a cotton swab dipped in alcohol This is more important when the recorder is located in a dusty environment an
42. factor Function prompts Table 3 7 lists all the function prompts in the TOTAL 1 Set Up group Repeat the process for each input you want to set up e Press the SET UP key until TOTAL 2 appears in the display Table 3 7 Totalizer Group Function Prompts Function Prompt Function Name Selections or Range of Setting Factory Lower Display Upper Display Setting Actual Current View Current Totalized Current Scale Factor EO GAL Totalized Value Value Example E1 GPM RSET TOT Reset Totalizer to Zero NO NO RSETABLE must be set to YES LOCAL TOTAL 1 Totalizer 1 DISABL INPUT1 PV1 INPUT2 INPUT 3 DISABL TOTAL 2 Totalizer 2 INPUT 4 E TIME TOTAL EU Total Engineering Units 0 to 9 GAL AtoZ T blank RATE Rate of Integration SECOND SECOND MINUTE HOUR DAY M DAY Millions of Units per Day SCALER Totalizer Scale Factor 1 1 10 100 1000 10000 100000 1E6 1 000 000 RSETABLE Totalizer Reset NO NO LOCAL EXTSW1 EXTSW2 TIME Total will be set to 0 on closure of the assigned external switch INHIBIT Totalizer Inhibit NONE NONE 70 DR4500A Truline Circular Chart Recorder With or Without Control Product Manual Release M May 2013 Configuration Totalizer Set Up Group Function Prompt Function Name Selections or Range of Setting Factory Lower Display Upper Display Setting S1 OPEN S1 CLOSE S2 OPEN S2 CLOSE Repeat this procedure for INPUT 2 Release M
43. go to the SP Program configuration procedure and enable the program instead of disabling n ATTENTION For recorders with two controllers both enabled remember that any controller related values displayed correspond with the lighted CHN indicator 1 means that the values apply for Controller 1 and 2 means that the values apply for Controller 2 Run Monitor functions Table 6 8 lists all the functions required to run and monitor the program Table 6 8 Run Monitor Functions Function Press Result Run State RUN Initiates the setpoint program HOLD changes to in the upper display indicating that the program is running PV value and pen trace tracks the ramp soak profile Hold State RUN Holds the setpoint program HOLD e An appears in the upper display indicating that the program is in the HOLD state e The setpoint holds at the current setpoint Press again to continue to run External Hold If Remote Switching Digital Input Option is present on your recorder contact closure places the recorder in the HOLD state if the setpoint program is running e The in the upper display blinks ATTENTION The keyboard takes priority over external switch for the RUN HOLD function e Contact reopening runs program Release M DR4500A Truline Circular Chart Recorder With or Without Control Product Manual 195 May 2013 Setpoint Ramp Soak Programming and Opera
44. that is no integral reset action Instead use PD MR with rate set to 0 PID A is normally used for three mode control This means that the output can be adjusted somewhere between 100 and 0 It applies all three control actions Proportional P Integral I and Derivative D to the error signal Proportional Gain regulates the controller s output in proportion to the error signal the difference between Process Variable and Setpoint Integral Reset regulates the controller s output to the size of the error and the time the error has existed The amount of corrective action depends on the value of proportional Gain Derivative Rate regulates the controller s output in proportion to the rate of change of the error The amount of corrective action depends on the value of proportional Gain PID B PID B unlike the PID A equation the controller gives only an integral response to a setpoint change with no effect on the output due to the gain or rate action and it gives full response to PV changes Otherwise controller action is as described for the PID A equation See note on PID A PD MR PD WITH MANUAL RESET is used whenever integral action is not wanted for automatic control The equation is computed with no integral contribution The MANUAL RESET which is operator adjustable is then added to the present output to form the controller output Switching between manual and au
45. 1 2 3 or 4 RSP Remote Setpoint when available or 2nd setpoint is active OUT 12 Control relay 1 or 2 is ON A or MAN Indicates the mode of operation A Automatic MAN Manual F or C or blank Indicates the temperature units of PV F Fahrenheit C Celsius R or H or G or blank Indicates the state of the setpoint ramp or program if enabled in lower display in upper display R Run Hold Guar Soak blank Disabled T Totalizer KEY ERR Indicates parameter not available not in set up mode or key malfunction DR4500A Truline Circular Chart Recorder With or Without Control Product Manual ALI indicator can also mean the Interval Timer has timed out Alarms 3 6 are indicated by a message on the lower display See Table 5 7 Release M May 2013 Operation Monitoring Your Recorder Reading the deviation bargraph In addition to the indicators a bargraph containing 21 bars displays Process Variable PV deviation from Setpoint SP n ATTENTION When CHN 1 indicator is lit the bargraph display applies for Controller 1 It applies for Controller 2 when CHN 2 indicator is lit Sequentially press the LOWR DISP key to light the appropriate CHN indicator 1 or 2 and view the corresponding controller displays e The green on control bar lights when the PV is within 1 96 of setpoint The 10 small green bars above the on control bar light fo
46. 1 OVOIVIOW 1 edo pee aetati et veinte ed 261 Introduction 261 Ig MUI RETE CECI 261 B 2 Jnstallation n cede deii at eda EE A e UR de eda 262 Field WiN gies n 262 Pulse output WIFIDg s cet eae ee dn LO eo ieee aa c doces co Poss tutes edt 262 Configuration e ot e ep etae i b edet ett dn 263 BA Operations oett ata opi edet ees 271 Bids Referenicesscu based deter s P d re 272 Lock t nee ee ee eee coe Ce Doce 275 nO muU oes 275 Introduction EMEN 275 D Foreign Language Safety 277 D 1 DA2I 60506 resect itor di hh ue Lor eu do he fetched Meee Sanh 277 UDSTYRS SPEGIFIKATIONER 2 tetto tto eee ic tbt eee cen ce eee et 277 OMGIVELSES 277 UDSTYRSINSTALEIATIODN a e orte Panda 277 D2 DU2l 6056 2 tnde e dante es 278 APPARATUUR VOORWAARDEN eet et ee eet ree E e e Eb tpe E ete 278 OMGEVINGSCONDITIES toti dee cree Dee eee eso suse piso qno E vo ce
47. 10 mV R TC 10 50m S TC 0 5 V T TC H 0 10 V TTCL RADIAM DR45AR only 64 DR4500A Truline Circular Chart Recorder With or Without Control Product Manual Release M May 2013 Configuration Input Set Up Group Function Prompt Function Name Selections or Range of Setting Factory Lower Display Upper Display Setting XMITTER Transmitter Characterization BTC T TC H Linear ETCH TTCL ETCL W TC H J TCH WTCL JTCL 100 PT K TCH 500 PT KTCL 100 RH NNM TCH LINEAR NIC TC SQROOT RTC S TC Set INTHI and IN1LO IN1 HI Input 1 High Range Value 999 0 to 9999 900 linear inputs only in engineering units LO Input 1 Low Range Value 999 0 to 9999 300 linear inputs only in engineering units CUTOFF 1 Low Flow Cutoff Selection 0 to 100 of input range 0 INPTCOMP Input Compensation 999 9 to 9999 0 FILTER 1 Input 1 Filter 0 to 120 seconds 0 BURNOUT Burnout Protection NONE UP UP DOWN EMISSIV Emissivity 01 to 1 00 01 Repeat this procedure for INPUT 2 INPUT 3 and INPUT 4 Release M DR4500A Truline Circular Chart Recorder With or Without Control Product Manual 65 May 2013 Configuration Pen Set Up Group 3 7 Pen Set Up Group Introduction The functions listed in this group deal with how to configure pen 1 pen 2 pen 3 or pen 4 The procedure for configuring each pen is the same The prompts shown in Table 3 4 show PEN 1 e Repeat the proc
48. 2 Mother board Ground 4 cond cable fo 0 2 wire gray pai 2 wire Main transformer orange pair 22767 Figure 10 6 Internal diagram for DR4500A Truline recorder options only Release M DR4500A Truline Circular Chart Recorder With or Without Control Product Manual 251 May 2013 A Model DR45AR A 1 Overview Introduction If the key number for your recorder is DRASAR it is a relay expansion model Truline recorder that can have up to six alarm relay outputs and include Fo calculation function While its basic functions are identical to the standard DR45AT Truline recorder it does have some unique hardware wiring and configuration features This section provides the data pertinent to these unique features as a supplement to the standard Truline in this product manual What s in this section The table below lists the topics that are covered in this section Topic See Page A 1 Overview 252 A 2 Hardware Identification 253 A 3 Fo Reset Configuration 255 A 4 Options Configuration 256 A 5 Operations Additions 258 A 6 Configuration Worksheet Additions 259 ReleaseM DR4500A Truline Circular Chart Recorder With or Without Control Product 252 May 2013 Model DR45AR Hardware Identification A 2 Hardware Identification Introduction Figure A 1 DR45AR with one input and Figure 2 DRASAR with two to four inputs identify the hardware components of the DRASAR model ve
49. 2 9 Lockout Switch Configuration This feature also includes the special screw and plate that provide for the lead seal capability for sealing the chart plate 86 DR4500A Truline Circular Chart Recorder With or Without Control Product Manual Release M May 2013 Configuration Adjust Printing 3 22 Adjust Printing Introduction This data deals with the Adjust Printing feature of the Truline recorder This feature is important to the operation of the hot stylus pen Configuration choices are provided for PEN TYPE and the selection must match the stylus design PEN TYPE NORMAL is for the high speed stylus design Model Selection Table III Selection 0 Standard Pen e PEN TYPE JEWEL is used only for abrasion resistant stylus design Model Selection Table III Selection 1 Abrasion Resistant Pen CAUTION If the JEWEL selection is accidentally used with the high speed design the life of that stylus will be shortened You can also make slight adjustments to the print contrast Function prompt Standard Pen Arm w Black Button Table 3 20 lists all the function prompts in the Adjust Set Up group Table 3 20 Adjust Group Function Prompts Function Prompt Function Name Selections or Range of Setting Factory Lower Display Upper Display Setting TRACE LN Trace Line Contrast DARK MEDIUM MEDIUM LIGHT GRID LN Grid Line Contrast DARK MEDIUM MEDIUM LIGHT
50. 3 Chart Parameters Group Definitions essere 100 Table 4 4 Time Parameters Group 103 Table4 5 Totalizet Gro p Definitions teeth ed ieii deed 104 Table 4 6 Input Algorithm Group eene 106 Table 4 7 Control 1 or 2 Group Definitions eesssssesssseseeeeer enne enne enne nennen nennen nnne nnne 109 Table 4 8 Tuning Group Prompt Definitions sesssssssessesseeee eene 118 Table 4 9 Setpoint Ramp 1 or 2 Group Definitions esses enne ener 121 Table 4 10 Timer Group Definitions sess eee rennen 123 Release M DR4500A Truline Circular Chart Recorder With or Without Control Product Manual xvii May 2013 Table 4 11 Table 4 12 Table 4 13 Table 4 14 Table 4 15 Table 4 16 Table 4 17 Table 4 18 Table 5 1 Table 5 2 Table 5 3 Table 5 4 Table 5 5 Table 5 6 Table 5 7 Table 5 8 Table 5 9 Table 5 10 Table 5 11 Table 5 12 Table 5 13 Table 5 14 Table 5 15 Table 5 16 Table 5 17 Table 5 18 Table 5 19 Table 5 20 Table 5 21 Table 5 22 Table 5 23 Table 5 24 Table 5 25 Table 5 26 Table 5 27 Table 5 28 Table 5 29 Table 5 30 Table 5 31 Table 5 32 Table 6 1 Table 6 2 Table 6 3 Table 6 4 Table 6 5 Table 6 6 Table 6 7 Table 6 8 Table 7 1 Table 7 2 Table 7 3 Table 7 4 Tab
51. 76 DR4500A Truline Circular Chart Recorder With or Without Control Product Manual Release M May 2013 Configuration Timer Set Up Group 3 15 Timer Set Up Group Introduction The Timer gives a countdown or elapsed time after which Relay 1 energizes If Timer is enabled it has exclusive control over Relay 1 Alarm 1 will not control the relay Function prompts Table 3 12 lists all the function prompts in the TIMER Set Up group Table 3 12 Timer Group Function Prompts Function Prompt Function Name Selections or Range of Setting Factory Lower Display Upper Display Setting TIMER Timer Enable Disable ENABLE DISABL DISABL PERIOD Timeout Period 0 00 to 99 59 0 START Start Initiation RHKEY RHKEY ALARM2 TIME LDISPLAY Timer Display TREM TREM ET RESET Timer Reset Control RHKEY RHKEY ALARM 1 REPEAT ON TIME Timer Repeat Mode 1 SEC On Time 2 SEC 3 SEC 4 SEC 5 SEC INCRMENT Timer Count Increment MINUTE MINUTE SECOND Release M DR4500A Truline Circular Chart Recorder With or Without Control Product Manual 77 May 2013 Configuration Alarms Set Up Group 3 16 Alarms Set Up Group Introduction This data deals with the Alarms function that is available with your recorder e There are six alarms available Each alarm has two setpoints e You can configure each of these two setpoints to alarm on various recorder parameters There are two alarm output selections high or
52. 9 4 Error message propis sidien eeestis eren orien ees 231 Table 9 5 Visual failure symptoms sess eere 235 Table 9 6 Procedure 1 Troubleshooting recorder failure symptoms 236 Table 9 7 Procedure 42 Troubleshooting pen trace failure symptoms 237 Table 9 8 Procedure 43 Troubleshooting chart rotation failure symptoms 237 Table 9 9 Procedure 4 Troubleshooting chart rotation failure symptoms 238 Table 9 10 Procedure Z5 Troubleshooting pen failure 238 Table 9 11 Procedure 26 Troubleshooting keyboard and or display failure symptoms 238 Table 9 12 Procedure 77 Troubleshooting current proportional output failure 239 Table 9 13 Procedure 28 Troubleshooting position proportional output failure symptoms 239 Table 9 14 Procedure 79 Troubleshooting relay output failure 240 Table 9 15 Procedure 10 Troubleshooting current time or time current failure 240 Table 9 16 Procedure 11 Troubleshooting the auxiliary output essen 241 Table 9 17 Procedure 12 Troubleshooting external alarm function failure symptoms
53. A N A profile SP PROG Enables SP Program prompts ENABLE ENABLE DISABLE RECYCLES Number of Recycles 0 99 SOAK DEV Deviation Value 0 0 99 PROFILE Number of profile to run 1 6 STATE Program State at end DISABL HOLD RECOVERY Program resumes after power ENABLE interruption DISABLE PROG END SP value after last segment LASTSP FSAFE SP RAMP2 Accesses prompts for Control Loop 2 s N A N A profile SP PROG Enables SP Program prompts ENABLE ENABLE DISABLE RECYCLES Number of Recycles 0 99 SOAK DEV Deviation Value 0 0 99 PROFILE Number of profile to run 1 6 STATE Program State at end DISABL HOLD RECOVERY Program resumes after power ENABLE interruption DISABLE PROG END SP value after last segment LASTSP FSAFE Release M DR4500A Truline Circular Chart Recorder With or Without Control Product Manual 185 May 2013 Setpoint Ramp Soak Programming and Operation Setpoint Program Profiles Set Up Group 6 6 Setpoint Program Profiles Set Up Group Introduction You can configure up to six profiles each profile contains a subset of the 36 segments Each profile starts with a ramp segment and ends with a soak segment Each control loop uses one of these profiles They can use the same profile too The profiles can be synchronized to RUN HOLD together Setpoint program profiles group prompts Table 6 4 lists all the function prompts in the Setpoint Program Profiles setup group and their definitions Table 6 4 Setpoint Program Profiles Group Defini
54. Aucun composant ou pi ce ne doit tre remplac s il n est pas explicitement sp cifi comme tel par le constructeur e Tous les c blages doivent tre conformes aux normes locales et doivent tre r alis s par un personnel autoris et exp riment e borne de masse doit tre raccord e avant tout autre c blage et d branch e en dernier e Jl est obligatoire de connecter cet appareil sur une ligne poss dant un moyen de coupure pr s de l appareil CARACTERISTIQUES DE L EQUIPEMENT Tension 102 132 Vac ou 204 264 Vca d alimentation Fr quence 50 60 Hz Puissance ou 20 watts max courant CONDITIONS AMBIANTES Ne jamais utiliser cet quipement en pr sence de liquides ou vapeurs inflammables L utilisation de tout instrument lectrique dans un tel environnement pourrait pr senter un risque pour la s curit Temp rature Ambiante 0 a 55 C Humidit 5 90 HR 40 C Vibration Fr quence 0 200 Hz Acc l ration 0 2 g INSTALLATION DE L EQUIPEMENT Cet appareil doit tre mont dans un panneau pour limiter l acc s aux bornes arri res par l op rateur 280 DR4500A Truline Circular Chart Recorder With or Without Control Product Manual Release M May 2013 Foreign Language Safety Instructions GE21 6056 SICHERHEITSHINWEISE D 5 GE21 6056 Befolgen Sie alle Sicherheitshinweise in diesen Unterlagen um das Risiko eines Stromschlags zu verringern der zu K rperverletzung f hren kan
55. DR4500A Truline Circular Chart Recorder With or Without Control Product Manual 169 Operation Chart Operation 5 18 Chart Operation Normal operation The recorder functions differently if NO CONTINUE or YES CONTINUE is selected in Configuration Setup Group CHART function prompt CONTINUE Refer to Subsection 3 8 for selection instructions NO CONTINUE Operation A header is printed only if HEADER YES is selected in Configuration Setup Group CHART function prompt HEADER Refer to Subsection 3 8 for selection instructions Graph starts with a major time line if not a standard chart If standard chart graph starts with a solid line indicating where the chart began An incomplete segment will be printed with no time or text information up to the next hour mark At that point a new time line will be printed on the hour The initial incomplete segment will be completed including any partially printed range values at the end of the rotation Additionally any time or text information being printed when the chart hits 7200 steps will continue to be completed Chart motor takes 7200 steps printing graph time lines and PV Counter decrements to 0 Chart stops rotation YES CONTINUE Operation 170 A header is printed only if HEADER YES is selected in Configuration Setup Group CHART function prompt HEADER Refer to Subsection 3 8 for selection instructions Graph st
56. DR4500A Truline Circular Chart Recorder With or Without Control Product Manual 71 May 2013 Configuration Input Algorithm Set Up Group 3 11 Input Algorithm Set Up Group Introduction Input Algorithm set up group lets you calculate a process variable PV1 using Inputs 1 2 and 3 Input 1 is represented by A Input 2 by B Input 3 by C Function prompts Table 3 8 lists all the function prompts in the Input Algorithm Set Up group Table 3 8 Input Algorithm Group Function Prompts Function Prompt Function Name Selections or Range of Setting Factory Lower Display Upper Display Setting INP ALG Input Algorithm NONE NONE A B C Summer VA B C Square Root Multiplier Divider NA B C Square Root Multiplier A B C Multiplier Divider A B C Multiplier A B C Difference Multiply HI SELECT LO SELECT COEFF Coefficient K 0 000 to 1000 0 1 0 PV HIGH Calculated PV High Limit 999 to 9999 0 0 PV LOW Calculated PV Low Limit 999 to 9999 0 0 RATIO A Ratio for Input 1 20 00 to 20 00 1 0 BIAS A Bias for Input 1 999 to 9999 0 0 RATIO B Ratio for Input 2 20 00 to 20 00 1 0 BIAS B Bias for Input 2 999 to 9999 0 0 RATIO C Ratio for Input 3 20 00 to 20 00 1 0 BIAS C Bias for Input 3 999 to 9999 0 0 POLYNOM Polynomial characterizer NONE INPUT 1 INPUT 2 INPUT 3 INPUT NONE 4 VALUE Polynomial coefficient CO 99 99 to 99 99
57. Definition Prompt Range of Setting or Selection EVENT n 60HZ EVENT TRIGGER Select the triggering source for n 1 2 3 4 5 or 50HZ each of the six event messages 6 NONE NONE No event message EXT SW1 EXT SW1 Event triggered by external switch 1 closure EXT SW2 EXT SW2 Event triggered by external switch 2 closure ALARM 1 ALARM 1 Event triggered by Alarm 1 ALARM 2 ALARM 2 Event triggered by Alarm 2 ALARM 3 ALARM 3 Event triggered by Alarm 3 ALARM 4 ALARM 4 Event triggered by Alarm 4 ALARM 5 ALARM 5 Event triggered by Alarm 5 ALARM 6 ALARM 6 Event triggered by Alarm 6 MESSAGEn 0 to 9 MESSAGE FOR EVENT Select a message to be n 1 2 3 4 5 or AtoZ printed when Event is triggered You can use up to six 6 characters For alphanumeric entries the display will cycle from blank left to right with highlighting increased brightness of each digit The value of each digit can be changed only when it is highlighted POSITIONn 0 to 100 CHART POSITION FOR MESSAGE Select where you n 1 2 3 4 5 or want the message to appear on the chart 6 Repeat for all messages required 132 DR4500A Truline Circular Chart Recorder With or Without Control Product Manual Release M May 2013 Configuration Parameter Definitions Lockout Parameters Set Up Group 4 17 Lockout Parameters Set Up Group Introduction These are the parameters that you will set to lockout any unauthorized changes to the recor
58. Event status Same SEG12 EV Event status Same SEG13 EV Event status Same SEG14 EV Event status Same SEG15 EV Event status Same SEG16 EV Event status Same SEG17 EV Event status Same SEG18 EV Event status Same SEG19 EV Event status Same SEG20 EV Event status Same SEG21 EV Event status Same SEG22 EV Event status Same SEG23 EV Event status Same SEG24 EV Event status Same SEG25 EV Event status Same SEG26 EV Event status Same Release M DR4500A Truline Circular Chart Recorder With or Without Control Product Manual 193 May 2013 Setpoint Ramp Soak Programming and Operation Setpoint Program Event Set Up Group Prompt Description Range Your selection SEG27 EV Event status Same SEG28 EV Event status Same SEG29 EV Event status Same SEG30 EV Event status Same SEG31 EV Event status Same SEG32 EV Event status Same SEG33 EV Event status Same SEG34 EV Event status Same SEG35 EV Event status Same SEG36 EV Event status Same 194 DR4500A Truline Circular Chart Recorder With or Without Control Product Manual Release M May 2013 Setpoint Ramp Soak Programming and Operation Run Monitor the Program 6 9 Run Monitor the Program Introduction Make sure all the SP PROG function prompts under the Set Up group SP RAMP have been configured with the required data e An appears in the upper display indicating that the program is in the HOLD state If an doesn t appear
59. FUNC Until you see Upper Display DISABL Lower Display SP PROG If you see Upper Display ENABLE Lower Display SP RAMP or Upper Display ENABLE Lower Display SP RATE you must disable them SP PROG and its subordinate prompts are not visible unless SP RAMP and SP RATE are disabled Once they are disabled press FUNC until you see SP PROG Enable SP PROG Aor V Until you see Upper Display ENABLE Lower Display SP PROG Select the functions FUNC Upper Display shows current value for each prompt Lower Display shows individual function prompts within the setpoint program group e Successive presses of the FUNCTION key sequentially displays all the functions and their values or selections e Using the FUNCTION key follow the prompts shown in Sections 6 5 through 6 8 182 DR4500A Truline Circular Chart Recorder With or Without Control Product Manual Release M May 2013 Setpoint Ramp Soak Programming and Operation Entering the Setpoint Program Data Step Operation Press Action Result 5 Change the value or Aor V This changes the value or selection in the upper selection of a function display If the display blinks you are trying to select an prompt unacceptable value 6 Enter value or selection FUNC This enters the value or selection and goes to another into memory prompt e Repeat steps 4 and 5 for each function you want to change 7 Exit con
60. Manual Input PCB s Table XXXX x 0 1 0r3 21465 Release M May 2013 Model DR45AR Fo Reset Configuration A 3 Fo Reset Configuration Introduction This SET UP group is specific to Model DRASAR It allows you to reset the Fo sterilization calculation Accessing Fo reset prompts Press the SET UP key until you see Upper Display SET UP Lower Display FO RESET Press the FUNC key to call up the Fo Reset function prompt that will allow you to reset the Fo sterilization calculation The function prompt for the Fo Reset group 15 listed in Table 1 Function prompts Table A 1 lists the function prompt in the Fo RESET Set Up group for model DRASAR Table A 1 Fo RESET group function prompts Function Prompt Function Name Selections or Range of Setting Factory Lower Display Upper Display Setting RESET Fo Reset Fo Sterilization NO Calculation YES REM SW or REM SW2 under OPTIONS group must be configured for FO RST Release M DR4500A Truline Circular Chart Recorder With or Without Control Product Manual 255 May 2013 Model DR45AR Options Configuration A 4 Options Configuration Introduction For Model DR45AR there are several additions to be added to Table 3 17 Options Group Function Prompts from Section 3 They cover additional options that are only available with this model number Table 3 on the next page shows the additions made for Model DR45AR in the options group defi
61. NNM TC 10 50m NIC TC 0 5 V RTC 0 10V STC RADIAM T TCH TTCL Table 1 is continued on the next page Release M DR4500A Truline Circular Chart Recorder With or Without Control Product Manual 263 Model DR45AW Configuration Configuration continued Configuration for Open Channel Flow Operation Continued Table B 2 Input Group Function Prompts Continued Function Function Selections or Remarks Prompt Name Range of Setting Lower Display Upper Display XMITTER Transmitter BTC T TCH Select the Linear or Square Root Characterization ETCH TTCL transmitter ETCL W TCH JTCH WTCL Factory setting is Linear JTCL 100 PT KTCH 500 PT KTCL 100 RH NNM TCH LINEAR NIC TC SQROOT RTC STC FLOXMIT1 Flow Transmitter NONE NONE f the input is not being used for Selection HEIGHT open channel flow measurement FLOW HEIGHT f the input is measuring level FLOW Selected for an input signal that represents flow ATTENTION select FLOW if the signal represents transmitter flow otherwise select HEIGHT FLORATE 1 Flow Rate Selection CFS cubic feet per second ATTENTION GPS gallons per second GPM gallons per minute When a Metric Flow Unit is selected GPH gallons per hour Height and Width parameters are read MGD million gallons per day as centimeters AFD acre feet per day Metric Selections CMS M per second CMM M minute CMH per hour LPS Liters per second MLD 10 Liters per day HMD Hectare meters pe
62. Output Setpoint or Deviation This current 1s supplied from a separate option card AUX OUT 2 and AUX OUT 3 use CONTROL CURRENT OUT 1 and CONTROL CURRENT OUT 2 if CONTROL OUT ALG is not set to CURRENT Function prompts Table 3 15 lists all the function prompts in the Auxiliary Output Set Up group Table 3 15 Auxiliary Output Group Function Prompts Function Prompt Function Name Selections or Range of Setting Factory Lower Display Upper Display Setting AUX OUT 1 Auxiliary Output DISABL PV2 DISABL Representation IN 1 DEV2 IN 2 OUT2 PV 1 SP2 DEV 1 IN 3 OUT 1 IN 4 SP 1 4 mA VAL Low Scaling Factor Low scale value to represent 4 mA 0 0 20mA VAL High Scaling Factor High scale value to represent 20 mA 100 0 Repeat this procedure for AUX OUT 2 and AUX OUT 3 80 DR4500A Truline Circular Chart Recorder With or Without Control Product Manual Release M May 2013 Configuration Modbus Communications Set Up Group 3 18 Modbus Communications Set Up Group Introduction This data deals with the Communications option that is available with your recorder This option allows the recorder to be connected to a host computer via the Modbus protocol If your recorder does not have this option the prompts will not appear n ATTENTION Refer to Documents 51 52 25 66 and 51 52 25 69 for a complete description of the RS485 Modbus Communications Option Function prompts Table 3 16 lists all the function prompts i
63. Product Manual 287 May 2013 Foreign Language Safety Instructions SW21 6056 288 DR4500A Truline Circular Chart Recorder With or Without Control Product Manual Release M May 2013 0 10 Volt dc inputs 37 0 10 Volt inputs 272 4 4 20 mA auxiliary output wiring 52 4 20 mA control output wiring 39 4 20 mA input wiring 35 4 20 mA inputs 2 3 AC line power 30 Accutune II 759 Alarm hysteresis 79 127 Alarm messages 47 Alarm outputs 45 Alarm setpoints 762 Alarms group definitions 126 Atmospheric pressure compensation 82 131 Automatic calibration mode 223 Automatic local mode 149 Automatic mode Return to 50 184 Selecting 149 Automatic remote mode 149 Automatic switchover 109 Automatic switchover value 73 110 Auxiliary Output 79 80 84 Auxiliary output 2 and 3 calibration 220 B Basic recorder components without options 248 Battery test failure 235 Baud rate 87 Bias 711 Bias for remote setpoint 73 Burnout 65 Burnout protection 97 Calibration procedure 274 Calibration set up 206 0 10 Volt inputs 272 4 20 mA inputs 2 3 Millivolts and Volts inputs except 0 10 Volts 217 RTD inputs 270 Thermocouple inputs using a compensated calibrator method 208 Thermocouple inputs using an ice bath 207 Thermocouple inputs using the ambient temperature method 209 Index CE Conformity Europe CE Conformity special conditions 7 CE conformity special conditions Eu
64. Remove the unwired plug from J1 4 Run the output wires through the desired knockout 5 For CE Mark conformity install the ferrite filter as shown in Figure 2 11 and the 0047 uF capacitor as shown in Figure 2 16 6 Strip insulation from the end of each wire 7 Loosen the screws in plug J1 terminals and position the plug as you would to plug it into J1 8 Observing the polarity insert the wires into the appropriate screw clamps as shown refer to Figure 2 16 Tighten the screws to secure the wires 9 Install the wired plug into J1 10 Locate jumper position W6 W7 on the bottom left portion of the board Make sure W7 position is selected for 4 20 mA output 11 Repeat steps 2 through 10 for control output 2 printed circuit board as applicable The 4 20 mA output can be used as a retransmission output if it is not used as a control output Release M DR4500A Truline Circular Chart Recorder With or Without Control Product Manual May 2013 39 Installation Output Wiring Procedures Control Output 1 2 PCB Current Output Select Jumper Current Output Control Output 1 PCB or Auxiliary Output 2 Control Output 2 PCB or Auxiliary Output 3 Fair Rite P N 0443164151 or equivalent Controller load Required for CE Mark Conformity amp 0 1000 ohms Kit Part No 51197612 502 contains two ferrite filters Part No 51197612 508 contains 8 ferrite filters Install inside of 7
65. Timer set up group MAN KEY MANUAL MODE KEY SELECTION make selection to enable or disable the Manual Mode selection through the MAN AUTO key ENABLE ENABLE allows you to use the MAN AUTO key to select Manual Mode DISABL DISABLE disables the MAN AUTO key Release M DR4500A Truline Circular Chart Recorder With or Without Control Product Manual 113 May 2013 Configuration Parameter Definitions Control Parameters Set Up Group PBorGAIN Note GAIN must be used with settings of TIME D TIME DUPLEX or TI CUR TIME CURRENT PROPORTIONAL BAND UNITS select one of the following for the Proportional P term of the PID algorithm PB PCT GAIN e PROPORTIONAL BAND selects units of percent proportional band for the P term of the PID algorithm where 10096 FS GAIN e GAIN selects the unitless term of gain for the P term of the PID algorithm where GAIN 100 FS PB MINorRPM RESET UNITS selects units of minutes or repeat per minutes for the term of the PID algorithm 20 Repeats per Minute 0 05 Minutes per Repeat RPM REPEATS PER MINUTE the number of times per minute that the proportional action is repeated by reset MIN MINUTES PER REPEAT the time between each repeat of the proportional action by reset CONT1ALG The CONTROL ALGORITHM lets you select the type of control that is best for your process ATTENTION If the recorder has t
66. UP The value or selection you have made will be entered into memory after another key is pressed 7 Exit configuration LOWR This exits configuration mode and returns the recorder to DISP the same state it was in immediately preceding entry into the Set Up mode It stores any changes you have made Release M DR4500A Truline Circular Chart Recorder With or Without Control Product Manual 63 May 2013 Configuration Input Set Up Group 3 6 Input Set Up Group Introduction This data deals with various parameters required to configure input 1 input 2 input 3 or input 4 Function prompts Table 3 3 lists all the function prompts in the INPUT 1 Set Up group Repeat the process for each input you want to set up e Press the SET UP key until INPUT 2 INPUT 3 or INPUT 4 appears in the display Table 3 3 Input Group Function Prompts Function Prompt Function Name Selections or Range of Setting Factory Lower Display Upper Display Setting INPUT 1 Input 1 Actuation DISABL ENABLE ENABLE DECIMAL Decimal Point Location XXXX None XXX X XXX X One XX XX Two X XXX Three UNITS Temperature Units DEGF DEG F DEGC XXXXX make selection at prompt ENGUNITS ENGUNITS Engineering Units 0 to 9 AtoZ blank IN1TYPE Input 1 Actuation Type B TC W TC H 100 PT E TC H WTCL or ETCL 100 PT 0 5 V JTCH 200 HI with Control JTCL 200 LO KTCH 500 PT KTCL 100 RH NNM TC 4 20 mA NIC TC 0
67. aangesloten en als laatste worden verbroken Het verdient aanbeveling een netschakelaar aan te brengen vlakbij het instrument APPARATUUR VOORWAARDEN Voedingsspanning 102 tot 132 Vac 204 to 264 Vac Frequentie 50 60 Hz Vermogen of 20 watts max stroomvermogen OMGEVINGSCONDITIES Gebruik het instrument niet in de aanwezigheid van ontvlambare vloeistoffen of dampen Het gebruik van elk elektrisch instrument in een dergelijke omgeving vormt een gevaar voor uw veiligheid Temperatuur In bedrijf 0 tot 55 C Vochtigheid 5 tot 90 RH 40 C Trilling 0 tot 200 Hz versnelling 0 2 g MONTAGE VAN DE APPARATUUR 278 De recorder moet worden gemonteerd in een paneel om de toegankelijkheid tot de achterste aansluitpunten te beperken DR4500A Truline Circular Chart Recorder With or Without Control Product Manual Release M May 2013 Foreign Language Safety Instructions FI21 6056 TURVALLISUUSMAARAYKSET D 3 FI21 6056 Noudata t m n ohjeen kaikkia turvaohjeita valtt aksesi s hk tapaturman vaaraa T m merkki varoittaa k ytt j s hk iskun vaarasta paikassa miss voi koskettaa vaarallisia j nnitteit Suojamaaliitin Kytke maadoitsjohdin t h n liittimeen Om e Jos laitetta k ytet n olosuhteissa joihin sit ei ole suunniteltu k ytt turvallisuus voi heikenty e Ala vaihda mit n komponettia tai osaa jota valmistaja ei ole m ritellyt k ytt j n vaihdettavaksi e Asennus ja johdotus
68. alphanumeric entries the display will cycle from left to right with highlighting increased brightness of each digit The value of each digit can be changed only when it is highlighted 94 DR4500A Truline Circular Chart Recorder With or Without Control Product Manual Release M May 2013 Configuration Parameter Definitions Input Parameters Set Up Group Lower Display Prompt Upper Display Range of Setting or Selection Parameter Definition INn TYPE n 1 2 3 or 4 BTC ETCH ETCL J TC H JTCL K TC H KTCL NNM TC NIC TC RTC STC TTCH TTCL W TC H WTC L 100 PT 200 HI 200 LO 500 PT 100 RH 4 20mA 0 10mV 10 50m 0 5 V 0 10 V RADIAM INPUT ACTUATION TYPE This selection determines what actuation you are going to use for input one Be sure that the values configured for high and low chart range soak setpoint alarm setpoint etc are within the measuring range for the selected actuation type B thermocouple 105 E thermocouple high 454 E thermocouple low 200 J thermocouple high 0 J thermocouple low 20 K thermocouple high 320 K thermocouple low 20 NNM NiNiMo thermocouple 32 NIC Nicrosil Nisil thermocouple 0 R thermocouple 0 S thermocouple 0 T thermocouple high 300 T thermocouple low 200 W5W26 thermocouple high 0 W5W26 thermocouple low 0 100 Ohm RTD 300 200 Ohm RTD 32 200 Ohm RTD 32 500 Ohm RTD 300 100 Ohm RTD 130 4 to 2
69. and follow the procedure in Table 2 17 to wire relay control outputs ATTENTION Relay 2 is used for time proportional control Relay 2 can also be used for 3 position step control see Figure 2 17 Step Table 2 17 Relay Control Output Wiring Action Open the recorder door Loosen the captive screw in the chart plate and swing the plate out Locate connector J5 on the control output 1 printed circuit board refer to Figure 2 18 for location Remove the unwired plug from J5 Locate jumper positions W2 W3 and W4 W5 below connector J5 on the printed circuit board Remove plug in output 1 printed circuit board for better access to the jumpers Be sure to tag and remove all the plug connections to the printed circuit board before removing it Position the jumpers as shown in Figure 2 18 for desired relay contact action Locate jumper position W6 W7 on the bottom left portion of the board Make sure W7 position is selected for relay control output then reinstall the printed circuit board Run the relay load wires through the desired knockouts For CE Mark conformity install the ferrite filter as shown in Figure 2 11 install the shield capacitor as shown in Figure 2 18 Strip insulation from the end of each wire Loosen the screws in plug J5 terminals and position the plug as you would to plug it into J5 Insert the relay wires and relay power into the appropriate screw clamps for single or dupl
70. associated with each group Figure 3 1 shows an overview of the prompt hierarchy 56 DR4500A Truline Circular Chart Recorder With or Without Control Product Manual Release M May 2013 Configuration Configuration Prompts 3 2 Configuration Prompts Diagram prompt hierarchy Figure 3 1 shows an overview of the DR4500A Set Up prompts and their associated Function prompt read from left to right Figure 3 1 DR4500A Prompt Hierarchy Set Up Group Function Prompts FO RESET RESET FO Only with key number DR45AR see Appendix A INPUT 1 Sissi Eu d ets ta REI INPUT 2 INPUT 3 Same as INPUT 1 INPUT 4 PEN 1 PEN 2 PEN3 Same as PEN 1 PEN 4 TOTAL 1 TOTAL 2 Same as TOTAL 1 B RATIOC C BIASC C POLYNOM CO VALUE VALUE 2 10 1 1 3 10 3 zag 4 10 5 0 5 5 10 7 0 7 Release M DR4500A Truline Circular Chart Recorder With or Without Control Product Manual 57 May 2013 Configuration Configuration Prompts Set Up Group Function Prompts CONTROL 1 CONTROL 2 Sameas CONTROL 1 TUNING 1 or or GAIN RSET RPM PROF 802 or RSET2RPM or GAIN 2 TUNING 2 Same as TUNING 1 SP RAMPI SP RAMP2 Same as SP RAMP1 PROFILES SPP SEGS SPP EVNT ALARM 1 sisrvac aiszvat_ wsrrvee xiszmvee writ srscnz H ALARM 2 ALARM 3 ALARM 4 Same as ALARM 1 ALARM 5 ALARM 6 58 DR4500A Truline Circular Chart Re
71. at the new setpoint ATTENTION Any time the local setpoint is different from the final setpoint value and the RUN HOLD key is pressed the ramp will start again Release M DR4500A Truline Circular Chart Recorder With or Without Control Product Manual 153 May 2013 Operation Single Setpoint Ramp Step Operation Press Action Result 7 Disable the setpoint ramp SET Until you see function UP Upper Display SET UP Lower Display SP RAMP X FUNC You will see Upper Display ENABLE Lower Display SP RAMP X A You will see Upper Display DISABL Lower Display SP RAMP X 8 Return to normal LOWR Returns to normal operating mode operating mode DISP 154 DR4500A Truline Circular Chart Recorder With or Without Control Product Manual Release M May 2013 Operation Using Two Sets of Tuning Constants PID Values 5 8 Using Two Sets of Tuning Constants PID Values Introduction You can use two sets of tuning constants for single output types and choose the way they are to be switched The sets can be e Keyboard selected e Automatically switched when a predetermined Process Variable value is reached e Automatically switched when a predetermined Setpoint value is reached The following procedures show you how to e Select two sets e Set the switchover value e Set tuning constant value for each set e Switch between two sets via the keyboard without automatic switchover
72. been removed from its shipping carton inspect the carton for damage and remove the recorder Inspect the unit for any obvious shipping damage and report any damage due to transit to the carrier Make sure a bag containing mounting hardware is included in the carton with the recorder Check that the model number shown on the chart plate agrees with what you have ordered CE Conformity special conditions Europe Braid shielded twisted pair cables are required for all Analog I O Process Variable RTD Thermocouple dc millivolt low level signal 4 20 mA and relay output circuits Supplementary bonding of the recorder enclosure to a local ground using a 3 4 braided copper conductor is required Ferrite suppression filters and capacitor filters see Subsection 2 5 for Wiring Prerequisites shall be installed on all cables connected to the recorder controller Refer to document 5 52 05 01 How to Apply Digital Instrumentation in Severe Electrical Noise Environments for additional installation guidance Release M DR4500A Truline Circular Chart Recorder With or Without Control Product Manual 7 May 2013 Installation Overview Operating limits and condensed specifications We recommend that you review and adhere to the operating limits listed in Table 2 1 when you install your recorder Table 2 1 Operating Limits and Condensed Specifications Condition Specifications Ambient Temperature 32 F to 131 F 0 C
73. configuration using digital inputs Select the chart position where Pen 1 pen 2 pen 3 and pen 4 is to mark trace occurrence of an OFF event Prompt only appears if DGTL1 or 2 is selected as pen 1 pen 2 pen 3 or pen 4 input MAJORDIV 2 to 10 MAJOR CHART DIVISIONS This is the number of Major Divisions in range of chart 1 2 3 or 4 scale between CHART1HI and CHART1LO Must divide evenly into chart range ATTENTION The values of major divisions are now printed with decimal points when possible The restriction is four characters including the decimal and sign EXAMPLES Pen Range Print Format 0 to 99 XX X 0 to 9 X XX 9 to 9 XX X 99 to 99 XXX 0 to 999 XXX MINORDIV 2to 10 MINOR CHART DIVISIONS This is the number of Minor Divisions in range of chart 1 2 3 or 4 scale increments in each Major Division RNGnTAG n21 2 30r4 0 to 9 AtoZ T blank RANGE 1 TAG NAME Enter a tag name for chart 1 2 3 or 4 range It can be up to 5 characters e For alphanumeric entries the display will cycle from left to right with highlighting increased brightness of each digit The value of each digit can only be changed when it is highlighted Repeat this procedure for PEN 2 PEN 3 and PEN 4 configuration Release M May 2013 DR4500A Truline Circular Chart Recorder With or Without Control Product Manual 99 C
74. display will cycle from left to right with highlighting increased brightness of BLANK each digit e The value of each digit can be changed only when it is highlighted HEADER YES HEADER FOR CHART Is the header to be printed NO each time the recorder goes from chart hold to chart run the CHART key is pressed HEADER EXAMPLE Chart Ranges Lo Hi Date mo day yr 08 25 93 dock P1 0TO350 PSI 2 50 450 GPM Pon channel 0 1000 PSI 450 50 GPM lt 010 020 gt TRULIN Engineering Name Units 21423 e f you select NO only the chart name will be printed Release M DR4500A Truline Circular Chart Recorder With or Without Control Product Manual 101 May 2013 Configuration Parameter Definitions Chart Parameters Set Up Group Lower Display Upper Display Parameter Definition Prompt Range of Setting or Selection REM CHRT REMOTE CHART ACTIVATION Select the desired function to activate the chart from a remote location or an internal signal NONE NONE No selection EXT SW1 EXT SW 1 External Switch 1 activates chart Digital Input 1 EXT SW2 EXT SW 2 External Switch 2 activates chart Digital Input 2 ALARM 1 ALARM 1 Alarm 1 activates chart ALARM 2 ALARM 2 Alarm 2 activates chart TIME TIME Wake Time activates chart ALARM 3 ALARM 3 Alarm 3 activates chart ALARM 4 ALARM 4 Alarm 4 activates chart ALARM 5 ALARM 5 Alarm 5 activates chart ALARM 6 ALARM 6 Al
75. does not move Instead the existing 0 and 100 96 values may be changed with the or V keys Aor V Select automatic or manual calibration Upper Display DO AUTO or DO MAN Lower Display POS PROP e If you select DO AUTO go to step 4 e f you select DO MAN go to step 6 ATTENTION When calibration is terminated this selection reverts to DISABL 4 DO AUTO FUNC The decrement relay is turned on to move the motor to Set 0 value 0 96 position Upper Display counts of feedback slidewire 0 to 2047 Lower Display ZERO VAL e When the motor stops the display should stop counting go to the next step Release M DR4500A Truline Circular Chart Recorder With or Without Control Product Manual 221 May 2013 Output Calibration Position Proportional and Three Position Step Output Calibration Step Operation Press Action Result 5 Set 100 value FUNC The increment relay is turned on to move the motor to 100 position Upper Display counts of feedback slidewire 0 to 2047 Lower Display SPAN VAL e When the motor stops the display should stop counting then go on to step 8 6 DO MAN FUNC You will see Set 0 value Upper Display existing zero calibration value in counts approximately 100 Lower Display ZERO VAL Aor V Until the desired zero value is reached in the upper display Upper Display desired zero value Lower Display ZERO VAL 7 Set 100 value FUNC T
76. e See Section 3 Configuration for selections and limits 29 Change any configuration item check Device Status to see if CONFTEST PASS return configuration item to original value e See Section 3 Configuration for instructions to change a configuration item Release M DR4500A Truline Circular Chart Recorder With or Without Control Product Manual 231 May 2013 Troubleshooting Service Self Diagnostics Lower Display Indication Test Group Reason for Failure How to Correct the Problem CNFG ERR Background Configuration data is in error 30 Check all the configuration prompts for accuracy e See Section 3 Configuration for selections and limits 3 Change any configuration item then return it to the original value e See Section 3 Configuration for instructions to change a configuration item CAL TEST Note 1 CAL1 ERR Power up Background The working calibration constants in the recorder are in error Working CAL TEST failure Control 1 Input 1 Input 2 32 Change to a different input type e See Section 3 Configuration 33 Check Device Status page 230 to see if FACT CRC PASS e If PASS return to original input type e If FAlL field calibrate Refer to Section 7 Input Calibration 34 Change to a different input type e See Section 3 Configuration 35 Check Device Status page 230 to see if FACT CRC PASS e If PASS ret
77. e Stop at the Set Up group title which describes the group of parameters you want to configure Then proceed to the next step Select a Function parameter FUNC Upper Display Shows the current value or selection for the first function prompt of the particular Set Up group that you have selected EXAMPLE ENABLE DISABLE Lower Display Depends on what is selected in Set Up group Shows the first function prompt within that Set Up group Example INPUT 1 Select other Function parameters FUNC e Successive presses of the FUNC key will sequentially display the other function prompts of the Set Up group you have selected e Stop at the function prompt that you want to change then proceed to the next step 62 DR4500A Truline Circular Chart Recorder With or Without Control Product Manual Release M May 2013 Configuration Configuration Procedure Step Operation Press Result 5 Change the value or A v e These keys increment or decrement the value or or selection selection that appears for the function prompt you have selected e See Subsection 3 4 Configuration Tips for instructions to increase or decrease value quickly e Change the value or selection to meet your needs Ifthe display flashes you are trying to make an unacceptable entry 6 Enter the value or selection FUNC e This key selects another function prompt or SET e This key selects another Set Up group
78. e eR RE d ned 168 Instalhing Replacine tlie Chart 2 eee III RR eee ae 169 Remote Chatt E 171 Parameter settings for example 12 step profile sse 178 Setpoint program data entry procedure sssssssssssssssseseeeeenenerener ener enne nnns 182 SP RAMP prompts and available selections sess ener 184 Setpoint Program Profiles Group Definitions ssssssssssssssseseeeeeneeerenr ener 186 Setpoint Program Segments Group Definitions sse ener 188 Setpoint Program Event Group Definitions essen ener enne 191 Segment Event relay operation requirements cccececeseesseesseeseeeeceesceecesecsecaeesecseecaeecaeeaeceeeeeeneeses 192 Rut Monitor Eutictiolls a oi tte edt p boe ba OA ott bo otl 195 Restoring Factory Calibration ende atem ede e e E D tas 198 Voltage and Resistance Equivalents for 0 and 100 Range Values eene 200 Disconnect th Field Wiring aeo p neret e dee p p ptt dans 201 EquipidenteNeeded 4 ene natia tete emi ev t eai petatur 202 General Set Up Procedure nh ea aedi e ait epe cad ette e ot diea tyi D gts 204 Set Up Wiring Procedure for Thermocouple Inputs Using an Ice Bath sss 205 Set Up Wiring Procedure for Thermocouple Inputs Using a Compensated Calibrator Method 206 DR4500A Truline Circular Chart Recorder With or With
79. filler plate kit nennen 20 Mounting flush in panel using cutout made for Kent Model 105 21 Panel mounting recorder with NEMA4X door sssssesseeeneene nennen ennemi rennen 22 Mounting On ai2 Ineh Pipe x os erue niece rr ne Uses ke EDO dtes a dee E c Redden e Marte 24 Mounting on surface of panel or wall ssseseeeneeenn enm nennen rernm ne enne nennen nennen 25 2 5 Wiring Preredquisites iir teen donde ete devel need ini 27 Taking electrical amp eee eot re ceret ie de e oe Eze pee dde pre eee ended 27 Electrical considerations neirinnen He Dey tue cedes ecb areae aaa 27 Recorder gro ndiNg pep 27 Functional DR 27 CE conformity special conditions Europe enn nne ennemi nennen nennen 27 Permissible wire bundling sieeve Slee ade ieee ete Herne ie gees er ge A iy dene eee De nuevo re redeo 28 Identify your wiring requirements ne ose eeu ee Toe equ ded voee etd a dep cea dove vods 28 DR4500A Truline Circular Chart Recorder With or Without Control Product Manual Release M May 2013 2 67 Input Wiring united toam ea nmn 29 Wiring the reCOrder P
80. four inputs essere nneneeneen nennen nre nre tenete ennt ennt nne 254 Figure B 1 Flow Recorder Field Wiring eese eene enne nnne tenerent nee enne nennen nnne ens 262 DR4500A Truline Circular Chart Recorder With or Without Control Product Manual Release M May 2013 Introduction 1 Overview 1 1 Introduction Function The DR4500A Truline Recorder is a one to four channel microprocessor based circular chart recorder Its one pen stylus printhead produces up to four analog traces and prints alphanumeric chart data on a blank heat sensitive chart four traces share the same time line reference which the Truline prints This eliminates the error caused by pen alignment offsets in conventional pen designs Since the Truline prints the chart and generates the analog traces at the same time there 1s no error due to variations in chart size caused by changes in temperature and humidity In addition to printing chart records the Truline recorder alternately displays process variable values for all channels in the selected engineering units Models with up to four input channels accept inputs from any one of a variety of sensors or transmitters within the configurable range limits The Truline is also available with one or two independent digital controllers and setpoint programmers CE Conformity Europe Indicated models of this product are in conformity with the protection requirements of the
81. hex nuts provided Pipe Mounting J Bracket i Plastite Bb e screw t 24224 Figure 2 9 Pipe Mounting Brackets 24 DR4500A Truline Circular Chart Recorder With or Without Control Product Manual Release M May 2013 Installation Mounting Methods Mounting on surface of panel or wall Refer to Figure 2 10 and follow the procedure in Table 2 9 to mount your recorder on a surface panel or wall ATTENTION You must supply three 3 screws for attaching the mounting hardware brackets and support hook to panel or wall Table 2 9 Mounting Flush on a Surface of Panel or Wall Step Action Using two flat head 10 32 x 1 4 inch screws supplied with the recorder fasten the support hook into the recess at the back of the recorder case as shown in Figure 2 10 Using 1 4 20 x 1 2 inch hex screws and lockwashers attach a mounting bracket to each side of the case Leave the screws slightly loose so as to permit some adjustments of the brackets On the panel mark the locations for the three holes as shown by the hole pattern in Figure 2 10 Using a drill of appropriate size for user supplied screws drill a hole in the front of the panel for the eye of the support hook Insert the screws for the support hook into the panel allowing the screw head to protrude approximately 5 16 inch Hang the recorder support hook on the screw Make sure that the locations for the other two hole
82. id ed tee tr tamea Fev ete Pete er tbe or eed 283 INSTALLAZIONE se usine se nns 283 0 8 4 E010 Loo Sane err ere 284 UTSTYRSPESIFIKASJONE Y a b e e USt e PR ote te aah eu 284 3 9 PO2E6050 ch mt ee rA tT pa dE Ieri eset eL A II TU Mun as 285 ESPECIFICAC ES DO EQUIPAMEN TO enr trees Ehre perd ev etr reo Mene T E a Ee ova E eu Del 285 CONDIC ES AMBIENTAJIS 5 2 m etin attic e b eee et src eoa er iratus 285 INSTALA O DO EQUIPAMENTO eaea rei darrean iaei Tai 285 D 10 SP21 6050 53 3 n ni a a Aaa a edes on teet 286 DATOS ELECTRICOS DEL EQUIPO reor aae o Yee Coa ee 286 CONDICIONES AMBIEN TAL E O oreet Fa eder beoe Pet cedes rex dae Qa dagen evi ober deeper des 286 INSTALAGION DEL EQU r o Pret Ee a pea uio reno us 286 0 117 5 021260565 rise dem ee eer edo bay e A ede uec eerte eee eoa 287 STROMFORSORJNING Ep ec ete RU pe RET E UU e E OE 287 OMGIVNINGSVIELKOR qr 287 TEE 287 aLe N dette edt odt e abu ze lbi baa eit eh bet o t S 289 xv
83. identical The prerequisites are e Model Number Table 1 1XXX XIXX XXXI n ATTENTION For thermocouple or RTD inputs calibrate the recorder to achieve the stated accuracy Refer to Section 7 Input Calibration Refer to Figure 2 13 and follow the procedure in Table 2 12 to wire Thermocouple RTD Radiamatic mV 0 5 inputs Table 2 12 Thermocouple RTD Radiamatic mV or 0 5 Vdc Input Wiring Step Action 1 Open the recorder door Loosen the captive screw in the chart plate and swing the plate out 2 Locate connector J2 on the printed circuit board for input 1 refer to Figure 2 13 3 Remove the unwired plug from J2 4 Run the input wires through the desired knockout DO NOT bundle them with the power wires 5 For CE Mark conformity e Install the ferrite filter as shown in Figure 2 11 e Install a 01 uF capacitor across the J2 terminals and a 0047 uF capacitor at the sensor end of the input wiring as shown in Figure 2 13 6 Locate jumper position MA W1 and make sure the jumper is in the W1 position See Figure 2 13 for the location 7 Locate jumper position W3 and make sure the jumper is in the proper position for your input type See Figure 2 13 for the jumper locations 8 Strip insulation from the end of each wire 9 Loosen the screws in plug J2 terminals and position the plug as you would to plug it into J2 10 Insert the wires into the appropriate screw cla
84. in panel 78 20 Flush in panel 27 NEMAAX door 22 Surface 25 290 DR4500A Truline Circular Chart Recorder With or Without Control Product Manual Release M May 2013 Index ON OFF algorithm 114 Operating limits 8 Operating modes 749 Operating parameters 145 Operator functions 148 Operator interface 3 142 Output algorithm 74 116 Output wiring for alarms 3 and 4 47 Output wiring for alarms 5 and 6 48 P Parts lists 245 Password 134 PD with manual reset 715 Pen Set Up group 66 Pen tip 169 Cleaning 169 Physical considerations 16 PID A 115 PID B 715 PID sets 758 Pipe mounting 24 Polynomial Equation 707 Position proportional control output wiring 47 Position proportional output calibration 222 Position proportional simplex 117 Power loss 172 Power supply mains 30 Power up controller mode recall 73 111 Power up diagnostic tests 138 Power up tests 237 Printing characteristics adjustments 135 217 Prompt hierarchy 57 Proportional band 720 Proportional band 2 721 Proportional band units 713 R Radiamatic millivolts and volts inputs except 0 10 Volts 211 Ramp soak program 23 Rate 2 121 Rate action 20 Rate of integration 70 105 Ratio 7 0 Ratio for remote setpoint 73 Recorder components associated with options 250 Recovery from a power loss 72 RECYCL parameter 185 Rejection frequency 79 82 64 131 Relative humidity 82 131 Relay control output wir
85. nennen enne 134 Printing characteristics adjustments procedure sse eene enne en nnne 135 EUER Ga ean EO c EY 136 5 1 MI 136 InthOGUCHON mE EHE 136 What s iin thiS SOCTION E tr rnb ete er er RESET ERR RE RAI E RED NEMPE TRE ERR TEARS 136 5 25 Starbpss RR RUE a 137 te tem ie eoe ip ide iR Rete 137 B fe e o jifea i iE 137 c 137 RHieTioi peo 137 Check the displays and Keys tiet rre i treten Peu ena g esu Ui vepe uua c pue X 138 eo ei tutius uiu eom MD 138 otart up procedU re Fete i vue ne ude ee de dene Edge Ani doge 138 5 3 Monitoring Your Recorder nennen menn ener 141 INtrOGUCTHION p PIECE 141 Operator Interface 1 debe iere nd tedio td eere qd eire tH bbe E Heec used Pese d Aden pd dede qct 141 1 1 142 Reading the deviation bargraph csesscenercescereegedaecesnoncecuagente
86. of recycles remaining to be run in the Setpoint Program 0 0g Time remaining in Timer function DR4500A Truline Circular Chart Recorder With or Without Control Product Manual Release M May 2013 Operation Monitoring Your Recorder Prompt Description 0 00 Time elapsed in Timer function TUNExXXX Accutune II indicator x Loop number 1 or 2 ON or OFF You can press Aor V to change the value of this parameter Diagnostic error messages The DR4500A runs background tests to verify data and memory integrity If there is a malfunction an error message will blink in the lower display In the case of more than one simultaneous malfunction or alarm each message will be shown in succession A list of error messages is contained in Table 5 6 If any of these error messages occur refer to Section 9 Troubleshooting Service for information to correct the failure Table 5 6 Error Messages Prompt Description EE FAIL Unable to write to nonvolatile memory FAILSAFE Failsafe INP1FAIL Two consecutive failures of input 1 integration INP2FAIL Two consecutive failures of input 2 integration INP3FAIL Two consecutive failures of input 3 integration INP4FAIL Two consecutive failures of input 4 integration INP1 RNG Input out of range INP2 RNG INP3 RNG INP4 RNG PV LIMIT PV 10 out of range RV LIMIT Remote Variable out of range Not
87. of settings that you can make for each plus a detailed explanation or definition of each parameter Configuration record sheet Located in Subsection 3 23 1s a Configuration Record Sheet When you make your configuration selections record them on this sheet Then you will have a record of how the recorder was configured Set up the recorder in this order e Inputs Display will be correct e Pens Trace will agree with display e Chart e Alarms e Control e Tuning e Other functions as needed 60 DR4500A Truline Circular Chart Recorder With or Without Control Product Manual Release M May 2013 Configuration Configuration Tips 3 4 Configuration Tips Introduction Listed below in Table 3 1 are some tips that will help you enter the configuration data more quickly Table 3 1 Configuration Tips Function Tip Displaying groups Use the SET UP key to display the Set Up groups The group titles are listed in this section in the order that they appear in the recorder Displaying Use the FUNC key to display the individual parameters under each group The functions prompts are listed in the order of their appearance in each group Scrolling To get to a Set Up group prompt more quickly hold the SET UP key in To get to a function prompt more quickly hold the FUNC key in The display will scroll through the parameters ATTENTION The prompting scrolls at a rate of 2 3 seconds when the SET UP or FUNC key
88. on teht v paikallisten varmuusm r ysten mukaisesti valtuutetun s hk asentajan toimesta e Ensimm iseksi on kytkett v suojamaa liitin ja viimeiseksi irroittettava e Laitteen l heisyyteen suositellaan asennettavaksi verkkokytkin LAITTEEN VAATIMUKSET Sy tt j nnite 102 132 Vac 204 264 Vac Taajuus 50 60 Hz Teho 20 watts K YTT OLOSUHTEET l k yt laitetta paikassa jossa on syttyvi nesteit tai kaasuja koska laitteen k ytt aiheuttaa r j hdysvaaran L mp tila ymp r iv 0 55 C Kosteus 5 90 RH 40 C 0 200 Hz Kiihtyvyys 0 2 g LAITTEEN ASENNUS Piirturi on asennettava paneeliin siten ett per liitimille j riitt v sti tilaa Release M DR4500A Truline Circular Chart Recorder With or Without Control Product Manual 279 May 2013 Foreign Language Safety Instructions FR21 6056 CONSIGNES DE SECURITE D 4 FR21 6056 Pour r duire tout risque de d charge lectrique qui pourrait provoquer une l sion corporelle respectez toutes les consignes de s curit de cette documentation Ce symbole avertit l utilisateur d un risque lectrique potentiel lorsqu il peut avoir acc s des l ments sous tension Borne de mise la terre Destin e au raccordement du conducteur de mise la terre de l alimentation e Sil quipement est utilis dans un but non sp cifi par le constructeur la protection fournie avec cet quipement peut tre affect e e
89. positive grounded load of 0 to 1000 ohms and is operational over 50 of range or the entire range Time Proportional Relay Resolution 4 4 mSec Relay Contact Ratings Resistive Load 5 A 120 Vac 2 5 A 240 Vac Inductive Load 50 VA 120 Vac or 240 Vac Cycle Time 1 second to 120 seconds Current Proportional Resolution 10 bits Accuracy 0 5 full scale Auxiliary Output Output can be field calibrated between 3 1 to 21 0 mA 21 mA dc maximum into a negative or positive grounded load of 0 to 1000 ohms The range can be set between 0 to 21 mA It can be configured to represent any one of 12 control parameters Resolution 12 bits over 0 to 21 mA Accuracy 0 2 of full scale Temperature Stability 0 03 F S C Release M DR4500A Truline Circular Chart Recorder With or Without Control Product Manual 9 May 2013 Installation Overview Types of Input Range Reference Accuracy Temp Stability Actuations E m ds Degrees Error Per 1 F c t F Degree AT Thermocouples 105 to 3300 41 to 1816 B 105 to 150 41 to 66 42 00 23 00 2 00 150 to 500 66 to 260 14 00 7 70 2 00 500 to 1000 260 to 538 3 00 1 70 0 50 1000 to 3300 538 to 1815 1 50 0 80 0 20 E 454 to 1832 270 to 1000 454 to 202 270 to 130 18 00 10 00 0 70 202 to 1832 130 to 1000 1 00 0 55 0 35 E low 200 to 1100 129 to 593 0 50 0 30 0 20 J
90. relay jumper positions Refer to Section 3 Configuration 5 Check the field wiring Refer to Section 2 Installation 6 Replace the control output printed circuit Refer to the instructions included with the board replacement part Table 9 15 Procedure 10 Troubleshooting current time or time current failure symptoms Step What to do How to do it or where to find the data 1 Be sure the recorder is configured for Refer to Section 3 Configuration Make sure current time time current output OUT ALG selection TI CUR or CUR TI 2 Be sure all the recorder and control Refer to Section 3 Configuration related data is correct Check the tuning algorithm and control data 3 Check that the applicable output relay Put the recorder into manual mode and adjust the actuates properly If it does go to step 4 output manually to raise or lower the PV around If it does not check the field wiring then the setpoint Listen for the click of the relay as the go to step 5 PV moves in either direction Observe OUT 1 or 2 indicator on the front display 4 Check the control relay jumper positions Refer to Section 3 Configuration 5 Check the current proportional output Put the recorder in manual mode and manually adjust the output from 0 96 to 100 4 20 mA Use a milliammeter across the terminals in connector J1 on the control output printed circuit board to verify the output 6 Recalibrate the current output
91. relay supplies a dry contact closure User must supply appropriate power connections for his external device Supply voltage 3 This relay has a resistive load rating of 5A 120 Vac _ for example 115 Vac must equal a Load calculation example Resistance of customer Mumberless 21416 than 5 amps controlled device Figure 2 18 Relay Control Output Wiring 44 DR4500A Truline Circular Chart Recorder With or Without Control Product Manual Release M May 2013 Installation Option Wiring Procedures 2 8 Option Wiring Procedures Alarm output and digital input wiring You can wire 1 and 2 Alarm Outputs and Digital Inputs The prerequisites are e Model Number Table 3 Refer to Figure 2 19 and follow the procedure in Table 2 18 to wire alarm outputs or digital inputs The alarm output is a dry contact closure Table 2 18 Alarm Output or Digital Input Wiring Step Action 1 Open the recorder door Loosen the captive screw in the chart plate and swing the plate out 2 Locate connector J3 and J4 on the alarm output digital input printed circuit board refer to Figure 2 19 for location Remove the unwired plug from J3 Run the digital input wires through the desired knockout For CE Mark conformity install the ferrite filter as shown in Figure 2 11 Strip insulation from the end of each wire Loosen the screws in plug J3 terminals and position the plug as you would to plug it into J3
92. segments Segment 1 will be the initial ramp time e This selection of time or rate is made at prompt RAMPUNIT ATTENTION Entering 0 implies an immediate step change in setpoint to the next soak SEGx SP Within the setpoint high and low The soak segment s setpoint value range limits in engineering units X 2 4 6 36 SEGxTIME 0 99 hrs 59 min The soak segment s duration x 2 4 6 36 188 DR4500A Truline Circular Chart Recorder With or Without Control Product Manual Release M May 2013 Setpoint Ramp Soak Programming and Operation Setpoint Program Segments Set Up Group Setpoint program segments worksheet Use this worksheet to keep a record of your setpoint segment settings Prompt Function Range Your Prompt Function Range Your Selection Selection SPP SEGS Settings for SG15RAMP Ramp 00 to 99 59 segments SEG1RAMP Start Seg 00 to SG16 SP Soak SP Within SP Prog 1 99 59 limits SEG2 SP End Seg Within SP SG16TIME Soak 00 00 to Prog 1 limits Time 99 59 SEG2 TIME Start Seg 00 to SG17RAMP Ramp 00 to 99 59 Prog 2 99 59 SEG3 RAMP Ramp 00 to SG18 SP Soak SP Within SP 99 59 limits SEG4 SP Soak SP Within SP SG18TIME Soak 00 00 to limits Time 99 59 SEG4TIME Soak Time 00 00 to SG19RAMP Ramp 00 to 99 59 99 59 SEG5 RAMP Ramp 00 to SG20 SP Soak SP Within SP 99 59 limits SEG6 SP Soak SP Within SP SG20TIME Soa
93. selection is accidentally used with the high speed design the life of that stylus will be shortened Printing characteristics adjustments Normally there is no need to adjust the printing characteristics as part of an input or output calibration procedure However if the chart printing appears to be faded you can use the procedure in Table 4 18 to make slight adjustments in the print contrast n ATTENTION To access Set up group prompt ADJUST the Set Up group prompt LOCKOUT must be set to NONE If the group prompt LOCKOUT has been configured for CALIB or MAX selection you will not be able to access the Printing Characteristics Group prompt Refer to Subsection 4 17 for details 134 DR4500A Truline Circular Chart Recorder With or Without Control Product Manual Release M May 2013 Configuration Parameter Definitions Printing Characteristics Adjustments Printing characteristics adjustments procedure Table 4 18 15 the procedure to adjust the printing characteristics of your recorder Table 4 18 Printing Characteristics Adjustment Procedure Step Description Press Action 1 Enter Set Up Group SET Until you see ADJUST UP Upper Display ADJUST Lower Display PRINTING 2 Select Trace Line FUNC Until you see Contrast Upper Display DARK MEDIUM or LIGHT Lower Display TRACE LN e Press or V to select the desired contrast 3 Select Grid Line Contrast FUNC Until you see Upper
94. source 44 Recalibrate Refer to Section 7 Input Calibration 45 Replace the input card 46 Call Customer Support 1 800 423 9883 USA and Canada BATTERY Power up or Battery test failure 47 Replace battery Status 48 Call Customer Support BATT LOW Background 1 800 423 9883 USA and Canada PV LIMIT Background Process Variable is out of range 49 Be sure pen input configuration is correct 10 of range 50 Check the displayed PV value to see if itis outside input limits 51 Call Customer Support 1 800 423 9883 USA and Canada RV LIMIT Background The result of the formula shown 52 Make sure the input signal is correct below is beyond the range of the remote variable 53 Make sure the ratio and bias settings are correct RV INP2 X RATIO BIAS 54 Go to CONTROL prompt REMOTE SOURCE and change REMOTE to 1LOCAL SW FAIL Background Position proportional slidewire 55 Check motor slidewire connections SW2 FAIL feedback failure 56 Recalibrate the slidewire motor position 57 Replace the control card Release M DR4500A Truline Circular Chart Recorder With or Without Control Product Manual 233 May 2013 Troubleshooting Service Self Diagnostics Lower Test Group Reason for Failure How to Correct the Problem Display Indication INTRNG Background Input out of range The process input 58 Make sure the range and actuation IN2RNG is outside the range limits are configured properly IN3RNG INARNG 59 Check the input source
95. still in Set Up Lower Display SW VALUE group CONTROL Aor V Select the switchover value in the upper display Set tuning constant values for each set There are specific tuning constants that must be set for each set The procedure in Table 5 19 shows you how to access these constants and change their values Table 5 19 Procedure for Setting Tuning Constant Values Step Operation Press Action Result 1 Select Tuning Set Up SET Until you see group UP Upper Display SET UP Lower Display TUNING 2 Select the tuning FUNC Successively displays the following constants constants Upper Display Tuning constant value Lower Display PROPBD or GAIN RATEMIN RSETMIN or RSETRPM PROPBD2 or GAIN2 RATE2MIN RSET2MIN or RSET2RPM PIDSET1 will be used when PV or SP whichever is selected is greater than the switchover value PIDSET2 will be used when PV or SP whichever is selected is less than the switchover value Aor V Change the value of any of the above listed prompts in the lower display 156 DR4500A Truline Circular Chart Recorder With or Without Control Product Manual Release M May 2013 Operation Using Two Sets of Tuning Constants PID Values Switch between two sets via the keyboard without automatic switchover This procedure is operational only if 2 PID SETS was configured at CONTROL set up group The procedure in Table 5 20 shows you how to
96. the Output OUT in percent is displayed in the lower display 3 Adjust the output Aor V Adjust the output value and ensure that the final control element is functioning correctly Upper Display shows the PV value Lower Display shows OUT and the output value in 96 Make sure the pen trace on the chart corresponds to the change in output 4 Tune the recorder SET Make sure the recorder has been configured properly UP and all the values and selections have been recorded on the Configuration Record Sheet To tune your recorder automatically see Subsection 5 9 Using Accutune ll Refer to Set Up group TUNING 1 or TUNING 2 to ensure that the proper selections for PROP BD or GAIN RATE MIN and RSET MIN or RSET RPM have been entered 5 Enter the local setpoint LOWR Until you see DISP Upper Display shows the PV value Lower Display SP and the local setpoint value A or V Adjust the local setpoint to the value at which you want the process variable maintained The local setpoint cannot be changed if the Setpoint Ramp function is enabled H or appears the upper display 6 Select automatic mode MAN Until A indicator is ON AUTO The recorder is in Automatic mode The recorder will automatically adjust the output to maintain the process variable at setpoint as tracked by the pen trace if the recorder is properly tuned Release M DR4500A Truline Circular Chart Recorder
97. to SG36TIME Soak 00 00 to 99 59 Time 99 59 SG33RAMP Ramp 00 00 to 99 59 190 DR4500A Truline Circular Chart Recorder With or Without Control Product Manual Release M May 2013 Setpoint Ramp Soak Programming and Operation Setpoint Program Event Set Up Group 6 8 Setpoint Program Event Set Up Group Introduction Segment events are used to activate relays by means of alarms There are six alarms and six corresponding relays Alarm 1 controls Relay 1 Alarm 2 controls Relay 2 etc When the setpoint program reaches the segment the segment event triggers the alarm which triggers the relay The relay stays on for the duration of the segment There are no alarm conditions to be satisfied that is when the event goes on the alarm goes on How to trigger a relay with a segment event 1 Program the segment event with the alarm corresponding with the desired relay 2 Program that alarm as type EVENT It is not necessary to program any alarm parameters other than the alarm type 3 Do not program other functions that have higher priority control of the relay See During alarm conditions an alarm will deenergize its associated relay unless a higher priority function has been configured for that relay See Table 3 13 If you want the alarm to control the relay do not configure a higher priority function 4 Table 3 13 Setpoint Program Event group prompts Table 6 6 lists all the function prompts in the Setpoint Program Event set
98. to firmware revisions 10 52 or later for earlier revisions refer to doc 44 45 33 39A Password Configuration Key Release M DR4500A Truline Circular Chart Recorder With or Without Control Product Manual 275 May 2013 Security Lockout Overview 276 DR4500A Truline Circular Chart Recorder With or Without Control Product Manual Release M May 2013 D Foreign Language Safety Instructions SIKKERHESKRAV D 1 DA21 6056 For at undg elektrisk st d med mulighed for personskade skal alle sikkerhedsbestemmelser i denne manual felges noje Dette symbol advarer brugeren om en potentiel beroringsfare s fremt der kan v re adgang til den livsfarlige netspzending Beskyttende jordterminal Terminalen er forberedt for og skal forbindes til beskyttelses jordledning i henhold til staerkstremsberkendtgerelsen DK em e Hvis udstyret ikke bruges som specificeret i manualen kan den beskyttelse udstyret yder blive nedsat eller forsvinde e Eerstat kun komponenter som udtrykkeligt er specificeret som udskiftelige 1 manualen e Alle ledningsforbindelser skal f lge st rkstr msberkendtg relsen DK og udf res af autoriseret erfarent personel e Den beskyttende jordterminal skal forbindes f rst af alle forbindelser og fjernes som den sidste e Det anbefales jvf st rkstr msberkendtg relsen at der installeres en afbryder til frosyningssp ndingen n r udstyret UDSTYRS SPECIFIKATIONER Str mforsyning 102 til 132 Vac 20
99. topics Topic See Page 8 1 Overview 217 8 2 Current Proportional Output Aux Out 2 and 3 Calibration 218 e Introduction 218 e Equipment needed 218 e Calibrator connections 218 e Calibration Procedure 219 8 3 Position Proportional and Three Position Step Output Calibration 220 e Position proportional control 220 e Equipment needed 220 e Connections 220 e Auto mode vs manual mode 220 e Displayed values 220 e Calibration Procedure 220 8 4 Auxiliary Output Calibration 223 e Introduction 223 e Equipment needed 223 e Calibrator connections 223 e Calibration Procedure 224 Release M DR4500A Truline Circular Chart Recorder With or Without Control Product Manual 217 May 2013 Output Calibration Current Proportional Output Aux Out 2 and 3 Calibration 8 2 Current Proportional Output Aux Out 2 and 3 Calibration Introduction Calibrate the recorder so that the output provides the proper amount of current over the desired range The recorder can provide an output current range of from 3 1 to 21 milliamperes and can be calibrated at 4 mA for 0 of output and 20 mA for 100 96 of output or any other values between 2 and 3 1 mA Equipment needed You will need a standard shop type milliammeter with whatever accuracy is required capable of measuring 0 to 20 milliamps Calibrator connections Refer to Figure 8 1 and wire the recorder according to the procedure given in Table 8 1 Table 8 1 Set Up Wiring Procedu
100. will be entered This value represents the deviation level that will produce 20 mA output Zero deviation will produce a center scale 12 mA output A negative deviation equal in magnitude to the Auxiliary Output High Value will produce a low end 4 mA output Repeat for AUX OUT 2 and AUX OUT 3 128 DR4500A Truline Circular Chart Recorder With or Without Control Product Manual Release M May 2013 Configuration Parameter Definitions Modbus Communications Set Up Group 4 14 Modbus Communications Set Up Group Introduction This option allows the DR4500A to be connected to a host computer via the Modbus protocol Up to 99 addresses and a maximum of 15 units can be configured over this link Communications group prompts REFERENCE Refer to Documents 51 52 25 66 and 51 52 25 69 for a complete description of the RS485 Modbus Communications Option Table 4 14 lists all the function prompts in the Modbus Communications set up group and their functions Table 4 14 Modbus Communications Group Definitions Lower Display Upper Display Parameter Definition Prompt Range of Setting or Selection ComSTATE DISABL DISABL Disables the communications option MODBUS MODBUS Allows Modbus communication prompts Com ADDR 1 to 99 COMMUNICATIONS STATION ADDRESS This is a number that is assigned to the recorder that is to be used with the communications option BAUD BAUD RATE is the transmi
101. your symptoms with those shown in Table 9 5 and refer to the troubleshooting procedure indicated to correct the problem Table 9 5 Visual failure symptoms Symptom Troubleshooting Procedure Recorder will not operate 1 Recorder operation is normal but pen trace is incorrect Chart rotates at wrong speed or will not rotate pen indication correct 2 3 Pen remains at high end of range when input signal is low 4 Pen does not move when input signal changes 5 6 A key does not respond and or a display does not light Displayed output does not agree with controller output Current Proportional Output Type 7 Position Proportional Output Type 8 Single or Dual Relay Output Type 9 Duplex Current Time or Time Current Proportional Output Type 10 Auxiliary Output Type 11 External Alarm Function does not operate properly 12 Modbus Communications Failure 13 Release M DR4500A Truline Circular Chart Recorder With or Without Control Product Manual 235 May 2013 Troubleshooting Service Troubleshooting Procedures 9 5 Troubleshooting Procedures Introduction The troubleshooting procedures for the Visual Failure Symptoms are listed in numerical order as they appear in Table 9 5 Each procedure lists what to do 1f you have that particular failure and how to do it or where to find the data needed to accomplish the task Progressive steps provide aid in finding and fixing the problem Equipment needed Yo
102. 0 Totalizer group definitions 104 Totalizer reset 70 73 Release M DR4500A Truline Circular Chart Recorder With or Without Control Product Manual 291 May 2013 Index Totalizer scale factor 70 73 Totalizer value 165 Displaying 166 Resetting 165 Trace line contrast 136 140 Transmitter characterization 65 96 Troubleshooting procedures 238 Ttransmitter power 35 Tuning constants 156 Tuning group prompt definitions 119 Tuning messages 147 Tuning parameter sets 73 109 Two local setpoints 1 0 Two sets of tuning constants 156 V Visual failure symptoms 229 237 Voltage equivalent 202 W Wake time days 103 Wake time hours 103 Wake time minutes 703 Wake time months 7 03 Wire bundling 28 Wiring 0 10 Vdc inputs 37 0 5 Vdc inputs 33 4 20 mA auxiliary output 52 4 20 mA control output 39 4 20 mA inputs See AC line power See Electrical noise precautions 27 mV inputs 33 Position proportional control output 47 Radiamatic inputs 33 Relay control output 43 RS485 Modbus communications 50 RTD inputs 33 Shields 29 Thermocouple inputs 33 Three position step control output 47 Transmitter power See Wire bundling 28 Wiring the recorder 29 Wiring for PV inputs 206 0 10 Volt inputs 272 4 20 mA inputs 2 3 Millivolts and Volts inputs except 0 10 Volts 217 RTD inputs 270 Thermocouple inputs using a compensated calibrator method 208 Thermocouple inputs using an ice bath 207 Therm
103. 0 BIAS Bias for Remote Setpoint 999 0 to 9999 in engineering units 0 SP TRACK Setpoint TrackingTotalizer NONE NONE Scale Factor RSP POWER UP Power Up Controller Mode MANUAL MANUAL Recall ALSP A RSP AM SP AM LSP PWR OUT Power Up Output LAST LAST FAIL SF NOTE This prompt will appear only if 3PSTEP is selected at function prompt CONT ALG SP HILIM High Setpoint Limit 999 0 to 9999 500 SP LOLIM Low Setpoint Limit 999 0 to 9999 0 Release M DR4500A Truline Circular Chart Recorder With or Without Control Product Manual 73 May 2013 Configuration Control Set Up Group Function Prompt Function Name Selections or Range of Setting Factory Lower Display Upper Display Setting ACTION Control Output Direction DIRECT REVERSE REVRSE OUTHILIM High Output Limit 5 0 to 105 0 96 of output 100 0 OUTLOLIM Low Output Limit 5 0 to 105 0 96 of output 0 DROPOFF Controller Dropoff Value 5 0 to 105 0 of output 0 0 DEADBAND Output Relay Deadband e Time Proportional Duplex 2 0 5 0 to 25 0 e On Off Duplex 0 0 to 25 0 e Position Proportional 0 5 to 5 0 OUT HYST Output Relay Hysteresis 0 0 to 5 0 of PV Span 0 5 FAILSAFE Failsafe Output Value 0 to 100 96 50 For 3 Position Step Control 0 0 100PCT Set motor position to 100 output position OPCT Set motor to 0 output position REM SW or Remote Switching NONE TO 25 TUNE NONE REM SW2 Digital Input TO MAN TO DIR TI
104. 0 C1 VALUE Polynomial coefficient C1 9 999 to 9 999 0 C2x10 1 Polynomial coefficient C2 9 999 to 9 999 0 C3x10 3 Polynomial coefficient C3 9 999 to 9 999 0 C4x10 5 Polynomial coefficient C4 9 999 to 9 999 0 C5x10 7 Polynomial coefficient C5 9 999 to 9 999 0 72 DR4500A Truline Circular Chart Recorder With or Without Control Product Manual Release M May 2013 Configuration Control Set Up Group 3 12 Control Set Up Group Introduction This data deals with various parameters required to effectively control your process Function prompts Table 3 9 lists all the function prompts in the CONTROL 1 or CONTROL 2 Set Up group You can enable the Control groups in the Option group Table 3 9 Control 1 or Control 2 Group Function Prompts Function Prompt Function Name Selections or Range of Setting Factory Lower Display Upper Display Setting CONTROL1 Control Loop 1 DISABL ENABLE ENABLE PID SETS Tuning Parameter Sets 1 ONLY 1 ONLY 2KEYBD 2PV SW 25 SW SW VALUE Automatic Switchover Value 999 0 to 9999 0 00 SP SOURC Setpoint Source 1 LOCAL 1 LOCAL REMOTE 2 LOCAL OUT 2 available for Control 1 only NOTE If you select REMOTE Input 3 is automatically assigned as your RSP source for control 1 Input 4 is assigned for control 2 However if the unit has only 2 inputs then RSP will be on Input 2 RATIO Ratio for Remote Setpoint 20 00 to 20 00 1
105. 0 Milliamps 0 to 10 Millivolts 10 to 50 Millivolts 0 to 5 Volts 0 to 10 Volts Radiamatic to to to to to to to to to to to to to to to to to to to to 3300 F 1832 F 1100 F 1600 F 770 F 2500 F 1000 F 2500 F 2372 F 3100 F 3100 F 700 F 500 F 4200 F 2240 F 1200 F 752 392 900 F 392 F 1400 to 3400 F Only available with Model DR45AT Only available with Model DR45AR 3Go to prompt XMITTER to characterize the input 41 270 129 18 7 196 29 0 178 18 18 184 129 18 18 184 0 0 184 90 760 to to to to to to to to to to to to to to to to to to to to to 1815 C 1000 C 593 C 871 C 410 C 1371 C 538 C 1371 C 1300 C 1704 C 1704 C 371 C 316 C 2316 C 1227 C 649 C 400 200 482 C 200 C 1871 C Release M May 2013 DR4500A Truline Circular Chart Recorder With or Without Control Product Manual 95 Configuration Parameter Definitions Input Parameters Set Up Group Lower Display Upper Display Parameter Definition Prompt Range of Setting or Selection XMITTER TRANSMITTER CHARACTERIZATION This selection lets you instruct the recorder to characterize a linear input to represent a nonlinear one NOTE Prompt only appears when a linear actuation is selected at prompt IN1 TYPE e FOR EXAM
106. 0 to 1600 18 to 871 0 40 0 22 0 06 J low 20 to 770 7 to 410 0 20 0 11 0 04 K 320 to 2500 196 to 1371 320 to 0 196 to 18 1 25 0 70 0 18 0 to 2500 18 to 1371 0 60 0 35 0 09 K low 20 to 1000 29 to 538 0 30 0 16 0 05 NNM Ni Ni Moly 32 to 2500 0 to 1371 32 to 500 0 to 260 0 75 0 40 0 09 500 to 2500 260 to 1371 0 50 0 30 0 07 NIC Nicrosil Nisil 0 to 2372 18 to 1300 1 0 0 55 0 01 R 0 to 3100 18 to 1704 0 to 500 18 to 260 2 00 1 10 0 25 500 to 3100 260 to 1704 1 00 0 55 0 13 S 0 to 3100 18 to 1704 0 to 500 18 to 260 2 00 1 10 0 23 500 to 3100 260 to 1704 1 00 0 55 0 13 T 300 to 700 184 to 371 0 60 0 35 0 07 T low 200 to 600 129 to 316 0 40 0 22 0 07 W5W26 0 to 4200 18 to 2315 0 to 600 18 to 316 1 40 0 77 0 17 600 to 3600 316 to 1982 1 30 0 70 0 17 3600 to 4200 1982 to 2315 1 60 0 90 0 29 W5W26 low 0 to 2240 18 to 1227 0 to 600 18 to 316 1 10 0 60 0 14 600 to 2240 316 to 1227 1 00 0 55 0 10 Radiamatic 1400 to 3400 760 to 1871 1 00 0 55 0 10 RTD Platinum 100 ohms 300 to 900 184 to 482 0 40 0 22 0 05 200 ohms high 32 to 752 0 to 400 0 30 0 16 0 05 200 ohms low 32 to 392 0 to 200 0 20 0 12 0 05 500 ohms 300 to 900 184 to 482 0 20 0 11 0 05 10 DR4500A Truline Circular Chart Recorder With or Without Control Product Manual Release M May 2013 Installation Overview Types of Input Range Reference Ac
107. 00 Base value x multiplier 2 alarm setpoint value 100000 1E6 ALx HYST 0 0 to 100 0 of span or full ALARM HYSTERESIS an adjustable hysteresis is output as appropriate provided on each alarm such that when the alarm is OFF it activates at exactly the alarm setpoint when the alarm is ON it will not deactivate until the variable is 0 0 to 100 0 whatever has been set away from the alarm setpoint e Configure the hysteresis of the alarms based on INPUT signals as a of input range span e Configure the hysteresis of the alarm based on OUTPUT signals as a of the full scale output range Repeat this procedure for Alarm 2 Alarm 3 Alarm 4 Alarm 5 Alarm 6 configuration 126 DR4500A Truline Circular Chart Recorder With or Without Control Product Manual Release M May 2013 Configuration Parameter Definitions Auxiliary Output Set Up Group 4 13 Auxiliary Output Set Up Group Introduction This provides a milliampere output representing any of twelve control parameters Input 1 4 PV 1 2 Deviation 1 2 Output 1 2 Setpoint 1 2 The display for auxiliary Output viewing will be in engineering units for all but output Output will be designated in percent Timer group prompts Table 4 13 lists all the function prompts in the Auxiliary Output setup group and their definitions Table 4 13 Auxiliary Output Group Definitions Lower Display Prompt Range of Setting or Selection Upper Display
108. 1 Overview Introduction Configuration 15 a dedicated operation where you use straightforward keystroke sequences to select and establish configure pertinent control data best suited for your application What s in this section The table below lists the topics that are covered in this section Topic See Page 3 1 Overview 55 3 2 Configuration Prompts 57 3 3 How to Get Started 60 3 4 Configuration Tips 61 3 5 Configuration Procedure 62 3 6 Input Set Up Group 64 3 7 Pen Set Up Group 66 3 8 Chart Set Up Group 67 3 9 Time Set Up Group 69 3 10 Totalizer Set Up Group 70 3 11 Input Algorithm Set Up Group 72 3 12 Control Set Up Group 73 3 13 Tuning Parameters Set Up Group 75 3 14 SP Ramp Set Up Group 76 3 15 Timer Set Up Group 77 3 16 Alarms Set Up Group 78 3 17 Auxiliary Output Set Up Group 80 3 18 Modbus Communications Set Up Group 81 3 19 Options Set Up Group 82 3 20 Event Message 83 3 21 Lockout Set Up Group 86 3 22 Adjust Printing 87 3 23 Configuration Record Sheet 88 Release M DR4500A Truline Circular Chart Recorder With or Without Control Product Manual May 2013 Configuration Overview Prompts To assist you in the configuration process there are prompts that appear in the upper and lower displays These prompts let you know what group of configuration data set up prompts you are working with and also the specific parameters function prompts
109. 182 502 Case NEMA 4 PARTS NOT SHOWN See Note 2 Card guides for Input PCBs 2 51197612 502 Ferrite Filter Package of 2 CE Mark 1 51197755 001 Capacitor Kit 01mfd 12 per kit CE Mark 30755232 502 0 10 Vdc Input Divider input PCBs 5 30756461 002 250 ohm Resistor Assembly 30755317 001 Box of 100 12 Truline Chart Paper K 30755065 501 Mounting Kit standard 1 K 30755065 502 Mounting Kit Heavy Duty K 30755065 503 Mounting Kit NEMAAX K 30755134 002 Gray Universal Filler Plate Kit i K 30755011 001 Filler Panel Kit for replacing Servoline recorder K 30757301 001 Configuration Lockout Hardware 1 51197657 502 Panel Mounting Gasket Kit 1 NOTE 2 These parts are included with applicable PCB kits as required As required These parts are also included in the miscellaneous hardware kit 30755980 006 246 DR4500A Truline Circular Chart Recorder With or Without Control Product Manual Release M May 2013 Parts List Exploded Views Additional recorder components associated with options Figure 10 4 is an exploded view of the recorder components associated with options Table 10 4 is a list of the associated part numbers eu c 2210 EM f M m i f 12 7 1 7 1 11 10i 12 5 4 8 9 19 21455 Daughter board Figure 10 4 Recorder components associated with options Release M DR4500A Truline Circular Chart Recorder With or Without Control Product Manual 247 May 2013 Parts List Exploded Vi
110. 187 6 7 Setpoint Program Segments Set Up Group sss 188 Introd ctiom E AES 188 Setpoint program segments group prompts sssssesee eene 188 Setpoint program segments 5 1 189 6 8 Setpoint Program Event Set Up Group sss enne 191 T 191 How to trigger a relay with a segment 191 Setpoint Program Event group ener rennes 191 Example of how a segment event works essen 191 To ensure control of relay by segment event sse eene eene nennen nennen enn 192 Setpoint program events worksheet eese isse enenatis dare asm 193 6 9 Run Monitor the Program nennen nennen nennen enn 195 p DP n 195 Run Monitor fUrlctlorniS ERE RENE T 195 xii DR4500A Truline Circular Chart Recorder With or Without Control Product Manual Release M May 2013 7 EE ER ORENSE 197 7 1 OVerviGW E 197 ec ECCLE 197 What s in this Section eiiis
111. 2 INCH ANGLE 1 V Notch Wire Angle 30 DEG 90 DEG Selection 60 DEG 120 DEG Table 1 is continued on the next page Release M DR4500A Truline Circular Chart Recorder With or Without Control Product Manual 265 May 2013 Model DR45AW Configuration Configuration continued Configuration for Open Channel Flow Operation Continued Table B 4 Input Group Function Prompts Continued Function Function Selections or Remarks Prompt Name Range of Setting Lower Display Upper Display WIDTH Width in Inches 0 to 9999 The width setting is in inches cm Selection ATTENTION Centimeters for Metric ATTENTION If you selected Flow Rate selection X INCH for the Parshall Flume Size selection you cannot select a width less than 12 inches The equation is different when the width is less than 12 inches MAX HT 1 Maximum Height in 0 to 9999 The maximum height in inches or cm Inches Selection represents your maximum input signal Centimeters for Metric Flow Rate selection MIN HT 1 Minimum Height in 0 to 9999 The minimum height in inches or cm Inches Selection represents your minimum signal suppressed ranges are possible Centimeters for Metric Flow Rate selection CUT OFF 1 Low Flow Cutoff 0 to 10096 of Input range The Low Flow Cutoff is selected as a Selection percentage of maximum flow This is the minimum flow that the recorder input will detect This is used mostly with flow transmitters to avoid false minimum s
112. 27 Timer group prompts 23 5 4 088 see ete eatin ete eiie o dn ege Dre iSi o en EL ek 127 4 14 Modbus Communications Set Up 129 une cem 129 Communications group promipts 5 ise ue er tr ER ere e ee regn RO I Risk ere 129 4 15 Options Set Up Gro p 2 e ii e HR RR HERI ERRARE USER AR ER AR Tere dade 130 o 27 lo a UE EEA TED TEAM 130 Options group prompts secs Dern eite ede eee Freier re ee eee bug eun ke scene e 130 Release M DR4500A Truline Circular Chart Recorder With or Without Control Product Manual ix May 2013 416 Event Message Set Up 132 ligure Uode pc 132 Event Message group prompts teet ep inen ende hood E i redi eint 132 4 17 Lockout Parameters Set Up Group ssssssssssese ee eene nennen nennen nnne 133 ITO DUCTION p 133 Setthis group last che RO E inermi 133 Lockout group Prompts EE 133 4 18 Printing Characteristics 134 Introduction II 134 Configuration CHOICES ei ERN 134 Printing characteristics adjustments ssssssseseeeeeeeenene
113. 30 min Recycles SOAK DEV Deviation 0 SEG9RAMP Ramp 9 0 Value PROFILE Number of 1 SEG10 SP Soak SP 10 400 profile to run STATE Program HOLD SEG10TIME SoakTime 10 Ohr 30 min State at end RECOVERY Program ENABLE SEG11RAMP Ramp 11 3hrs 30min resumes after power interruption PROG END SP value after LAST SP SEG12 SP Soak SP 12 200 last segment SPP SEGS Settings for SEG12TIME Soak Time 12 Ohr 30 min segments PR1 STRT Profile 1 Start 1 SEG1 EV Event 1 NONE Seg PR1 END Profile 1 End 12 SEG2 EV Event 2 ALARM1 Seg RAMPUNIT Ramp Units TIME SEG3 EV Event 3 NONE SEG1RAMP Ramp 1 1 hr SEG4 EV Event 4 ALARM1 SEG2 SP Soak SP 2 300 SEG5 EV Event 5 NONE SEG2TIME Soak Time 2 1hr 30 min SEG6 EV Event 6 ALARM1 SEG3RAMP Ramp 3 1hr SEG7 EV Event 7 NONE SEG4 SP Soak SP 4 400 SEG8 EV Event 8 ALARM1 SEG4TIME Soak Time 4 1 hr SEG9 EV Event 9 NONE SEG5RAMP Ramp 5 1hr 30 min SEG10 EV Event 10 ALARM1 SEG6 SP Soak SP 6 250 SEG11 EV Event 11 NONE SEG6TIME Soak Time 6 3hrs Omin SEG12 EV Event 12 ALARM1 Reminder There are up to 36 segments available for inclusion in a profile The above example uses only the first 12 178 DR4500A Truline Circular Chart Recorder With or Without Control Product Manual Release M May 2013 Setpoint Ramp Soak Programming and Operation Drawing a Ramp Soak Profile Profile graphs Draw your six ramp soak profiles on the graphs below and fill in the associated in
114. 4 til 264 Vac Frekvens 50 60 Hz Nominel effekt 20 watts max OMGIVELSES SPECIFIKATIONER Placer ikke udstyret i n rheden af brandbare v sker eller dampe Temperatur Rumtemperatur 0 til 55 C Fugtighed 5 til 90 RH 40 C Vibration 0 til 200 Hz acceleration 0 2 g UDSTYRS INSTALLATION Skriveren skal monteres i en tavle for at forhindre adgang til bagterminaler Release M DR4500A Truline Circular Chart Recorder With or Without Control Product Manual 277 May 2013 Foreign Language Safety Instructions DU21 6056 VEILIGHEIDSVEREISTEN D 2 DU21 6056 Ter vermindering van het gevaar van elektrische schokken die lichamelijk letsel kunnen veroorzaken dient u alle veiligheidsaanwijzingen in dit dokument te volgen Dit symbool waarschuwt de gebruiker voor een potentieel schokgevaar wanneer toegang bestaat tot onderdelen die onder gevaarlijke spanning staan Beschermende aarde aansluiting Bestemd voor aansluiting van de aardingsdraad van de voeding Om Indien de apparatuur wordt gebruikt anders dan door de fabrikant gespecificeerd kan de bescherming die de apparatuur biedt ongedaan worden gemaakt Alleen die onderdelen mogen worden vervangen die door de fabrikant als uitwisselbaar zijn aangemerkt Alle bedrading moet in overeenstemming zijn met de lokale elektriciteiseisen en moet aangelegd worden door geauthoriseerd ervaren personeel De aardingsdraad moet worden aangesloten v rdat alle andere bedrading wordt
115. 5 504 Blue with acrylic window and latch 30754955 505 Gray with glass window and latch 30754955 506 Gray with acrylic window and latch 30754955 507 Black with glass window and latch 30754955 508 Black with acrylic window and latch 30756548 501 Stainless Steel Door with Glass window 30756548 501 Stainless Steel Door with Acrylic window 51452435 501 NEMAAX Door with Acrylic window 51452435 502 NEMAAX Door with Glass window 51452435 503 NEMAAX Door with HTST window 51197761 501 SS Heavy duty with acrylic window heavy duty latch before 3 99 51197761 502 SS HTST door with heavy duty latch before 3 99 51197761 503 SS Heavy duty door with lock before 3 99 51197761 504 SS Heavy duty HTST door with lock before 3 99 51404781 501 SS Heavy Duty door with acrylic window after 3 99 51404781 502 SS Heavy Duty door for HTST with acrylic window after 3 99 51404781 503 SS Heavy Duty door with glass window after 3 99 1 31 K 30755980 001 Hinge Pin Note 1 2 1 2 K 30755980 001 Retaining Ring Note 1 2 Release M DR4500A Truline Circular Chart Recorder With or Without Control Product Manual 243 May 2013 Parts List Exploded Views Recommended Quantit Key Part Number Description Spare Parts per uantity r per Unit 10 100 1 3 51309609 503 Latch Lock Assembly Kit Note 2 1 3 1 1 3A 30755980 006 Key kit for keyed latch or lock 51452208 503 NEMAAX Latch Kit 14 30755136 502 Truline Door Overl
116. 500A Truline Circular Chart Recorder With or Without Control Product Manual Release M May 2013 Installation Option Wiring Procedures Additional alarm wiring information The DR4500 has the ability to provide for Alarm outputs 3 4 5 and 6 Follow the procedures listed below to wire No 3 and No 4 Alarm Outputs and No 5 and No 6 Alarm Outputs Alarms 3 and 4 output wiring You can wire 3 and 4 Alarm Outputs The prerequisites are e Model Number Model Table 2 1X 4X 6X If control output is 4 20 mA then the relays on the control card are available for use as alarms all models except DRA45AH AS AP models Refer to Figure 2 20 and follow the procedure in Table 2 19 to wire Alarm 3 and Alarm 4 outputs Table 2 19 Alarm 3 and Alarm 4 Output Wiring Step Action 1 Open the recorder door Loosen the captive screw in the chart plate and swing the plate out 2 Locate connector J5 on the 4 20 mA control output printed circuit board to wire relays 3 and 4 Refer to Figure 2 20 for location 3 Remove the unwired plug from J5 4 Locate jumper position W2 W3 and W4 W5 below connector J5 on the printed circuit board Note that you may want to remove the plug in output printed circuit board for better access to jumpers Be sure to tag and remove all the plug connections to the printed circuit boards before removing it Position the jumpers as shown for the desired relay contact action and reinstall the print
117. 72 IntrOdUctlODo eed ni mer alie nee ido EE EEA 172 Wh ats in this Sectlon er eire edd derer ge ce re Herde aieia ea doni ea eee esee te dene elei gn 173 6 2 Setpoint Program Contents ssiri riii eia Tei a ie ri Ei a TEER enne ener nene 174 What you will configure 2 Mi EE E AE E ee een ie ie ee 174 Recycle MUMBO Pk inns ane e N ands e aa aaie aed aa aae aa i 174 G ar nteed Soak rnise 174 Profile n mber irit a eu egeo RE ren ha shan a LU Link e ne RC IR EI Oi es efte a dee 174 Programristate Ce acetate re RR ERE ne e Eae Ene ER ED pP E rana e aet 174 Recovery is a repe eyed ede e repe vage mre ode a oe epe pee ea he Ee repe e eue ee Re opt Ye a 174 Program End State Senza Te ceat ed E E a ae ea A toate 174 Profile Start and Profile er ertet teresa i Ere xia be E repe IR EL shone hiis toiii tapiat 175 FREIMP UNI TRUTH MEME 175 Ramp time or rate 5 1 trennen tenete sn sten nr teres inns tne rens tein ns 175 Soak segments be ea repe e ee ee ot dr reped 175 Segment Events 2 e pbi e e recrute Lud eus aber Pe ON Rut Ludo A cone 175 Digital input remote operation 2 ciiin etin
118. 85 422 Modbus Communications PCB Mother PCB for 3 4 inputs Control output 1 PCB Table 3XX control and selected options Table Il 1X 4X 6X OR Auxiliary Output and RS485 422 Modbus Com PCB Table Ill 4XX Alarm output digital input PCB Table Ill XX1 Control output 2 PCB Table Il X1 X4 X6 Main Processor Board Input PCB s Table XXXX x 0 1 or3 21404 Refer to Model Selection Guide Figure 2 2 DR4500A Recorder Hardware Components Versus Table Selections Release M DR4500A Truline Circular Chart Recorder With or Without Control Product Manual 15 May 2013 Installation Mounting Considerations and Overall Dimensions 2 3 Mounting Considerations and Overall Dimensions Physical considerations The recorder can be mounted in a panel by making a new cutout or using an existing cutout with a filler plate see Table 2 4 Use the mounting kit supplied Adequate access space must be available at the back of the panel for installation and servicing activities The overall dimensions and panel cutout requirements for mounting the recorder are shown in Figure 2 3 Overall dimensions Figure 2 3 shows the overall dimensions for mounting the recorder millimeters Dimensions inches Standard DR4500 Reference 20 3 17 5 0 255 D 321 D 0 69 F 752 196 14 6 us e 77 Short wing latch e TET oJ oO H
119. ALARM 4 ALARM 5 ALARM 6 NONE 68 DR4500A Truline Circular Chart Recorder With or Without Control Product Manual Release M May 2013 Configuration Time Set Up Group 3 9 Time Set Up Group Introduction The functions listed in this group deal with the parameters that let you configure the real time that will appear on the chart Function prompts Table 3 6 lists all the function prompts in the Time Set Up group Table 3 6 Time Group Function Prompts Function Prompt Function Name Selections or Range of Setting Factory Lower Display Upper Display Setting MINUTES Real Time in Minutes Chart 0 to 59 Speed Selection HOURS Real Time in Hours 0 to 23 DAY Real Time in Days 1 to 31 ARP Set to local MONTH Real Time in Months 1 to 12 time YEAR Real Time in Years 0 to 99 DAY Day of the Week Chart MONDAY Name TUEDAY WEDDAY THRDAY FRIDAY SATDAY SUNDAY WAKE MIN Wake Minutes 0 to 59 0 WAKE HR Wake Hour 0 to 23 0 WAKE DAY Wake Day 0 to 31 0 WAKE MON Wake Month 1 to 12 1 Release M DR4500A Truline Circular Chart Recorder With or Without Control Product Manual 69 May 2013 Configuration Totalizer Set Up Group 3 10 Totalizer Set Up Group Introduction The functions listed in this group deal with the calculation and display of the total flow volume as measured by input 1 total 1 or input 2 total 2 The displayed value is 8 digits with a configurable scale
120. ARMS ALARM6 NONE MESSAGE6 Message for Event 6 up to six characters 0 to 9 AtoZ blank EVENT6 POSITON6 Chart Position for Message 6 Printing 0 to 100 76 9 For alphanumeric entries the display will cycle from left to right with highlighting increased brightness of each digit The value of each digit can be changed only when it is highlighted Release M May 2013 DR4500A Truline Circular Chart Recorder With or Without Control Product Manual 85 Configuration Lockout Set Up Group 3 21 Lockout Set Up Group Introduction These are the parameters that you will select to lockout any unauthorized changes to the recorder s configuration and calibration prompts You must know the password in order to change the Lockout configuration Function prompt Table 3 19 lists all the function prompts in the Lockout Set Up group Table 3 19 Lockout Group Function Prompts Function Prompt Function Name Selections or Range of Setting Factory Lower Display Upper Display Setting PASSWORD Lockout Password Select up to 4 alphanumeric characters XXXX is factory default password For more information on password security refer to Appendix B LOCKOUT Lockout NONE CALIB CALIB CONF MAX CHANGE Change Password 0 to 9 XXXX AtoZ ATTENTION Configuration can also be locked using S1 switch on the main printed circuit board Refer to Subsection
121. AW is basically configured as outlined in Sections 3 and 4 of the Product Manual However some configuration and operation actions have been modified as outlined in this section Table 1 lists all the function prompts in the INPUT 1 Set Up group Repeat the process for each input you want to set up May 2013 Operation Press the SET UP key to enter the configuration mode and continue pressing until INPUT 1 INPUT 2 INPUT 3 or INPUT 4 prompt appears in the lower display Press FUNC key to display the prompts in Table 1 Press or t key to make selections Table B 1 Input Group Function Prompts Function Function Selections or Remarks Prompt Name Range of Setting Lower Display Upper Display DECIMAL Decimal Point XXXX None Factory setting is XXX X Location XXX X One XX XX Two UNITS Temperature Units DEG F Factory setting is DEG F DEGC ATTENTION Neither UNITS nor promp ENGUNITS prompt will be displayed once the FLOW or HEIGHT prompt is selected in the Flow Transmitter selection The engineering units will then be configured through the prompt Flow Rate selection ENGUNITS Engineering Units Oto 9 See previous note for UNITS AtoZ T blank IN1 TYPE Input 1 Actuation BTC W TC H Select a linear input type e g 4 20mA 0 Type ETCH 10mV 10 50mA 0 5V or 0 10V ETCL 100 PT JTCH 500 PT Factory setting is 100 PT JTCL 100 RH K TCH 4 20mA KTCL 0 10mV
122. Adjust the output value while in manual mode manual mode Upper Display shows the PV value Lower Display shows OUT and the output value in 96 4 Return to automatic MAN A indicator appears indicating automatic mode mode AUTO Position proportional backup mode This feature provides for Position Proportional models to automatically change to a Three Position Step algorithm if the slidewire input signal fails This will maintain control of your process SWFAIL or SW2FAIL will flash in the lower display and the OUT display will show an estimated motor position WITHOUT a decimal point Release M DR4500A Truline Circular Chart Recorder With or Without Control Product Manual 149 May 2013 Operation Setpoints 5 6 Setpoints Introduction You can configure the following setpoints for the DR4500A recorder e A single local setpoint e 2 local setpoints A local setpoint and a remote setpoint A computer setpoint These setpoints can be toggled by the FUNC key Selecting the setpoint source Use the procedure in Table 5 11 to select a single local setpoint source a remote setpoint source or two local setpoints Table 5 11 Procedure for Selecting the Setpoint Source Step Operation Press Action Result 1 Enter set up mode SET Until the displays read UP Upper Display SET UP Lower Display CONTROL 2 Display local setpoint FUNC Until the displays read Source select
123. Be sure W1 MA Be sure W3 jumper is in the jumper is in position Linear position on the input board W1 on the input board Figure 7 7 Calibration Set Up Diagram for Radiamatic Millivolts and Volts Inputs except 0 10 Volts Release M DR4500A Truline Circular Chart Recorder With or Without Control Product Manual 209 May 2013 Input Calibration Calibration Set Up and Wiring for PV Inputs 0 10 Volt inputs Refer to Figure 7 8 and wire the recorder according to the procedure given in Table 7 11 Table 7 11 Set Up Wiring Procedure for 0 10 Volt Inputs Step Action 1 Connect the copper wire to the calibration source see Figure 7 8 2 Connect the other end of the copper wire to the clamp type terminals in the plug for the applicable input connector J2 3 Reinstall the plug into the input connector J2 on the applicable circuit board for input 1 input 2 input 3 or input 4 Calibration source Copper wires or 3 21449 Ol T C RTD Resistor assembly part no 30755232 002 is furnished with the recorder sure W1 MA Be sure W3 jumper is in the jumper is in position Linear position on the input board W1 on the input board Figure 7 8 Calibration Set Up Diagram for 0 10 Volt Inputs 210 DR4500A Truline Circular Chart Recorder With or Without Control Product Manual Release M May 2013 Input Calibration Calibration Set Up and Wiring for PV Input
124. CHT HOLD flashes in lower display Pull the pen lifter up to raise the pen from the chart Carefully remove the used chart from the hub and retaining clips do not remove the hub adapter Install the new chart so that its edges are under the four retaining clips and its small alignment hole is over the alignment pin on the hub that is press the chart down completely around the hub adapter Push the pen lifter down to lower the pen Press the CHART key The recorder goes to the CHART RUN CHT HOLD stops flashing in lower display ATTENTION The recorder has a non volatile memory You can reset the processor by cycling the power but it will have no affect on any data stored One portion of this stored data is how many motor steps remain in the 7200 steps contained in 360 degrees of chart rotation The counter that holds this data is reset by going from CHART HOLD to CHART RUN If in the CHART set up group the recorder is configured for HEADER YES a new header is printed then the pen recording of input values resumes If HEADER NO is configured recording resumes immediately Be sure to keep the door closed during operation to minimize dust collection on the chart When using REM CHRT ver 2 10 57 after pressing CHART in this step CHT HOLD changes to REM CHRT flashes in lower display to indicate the chart is ready for delayed start Refer to Table 3 8 Release M May 2013
125. Circular Chart Recorder With or Without Control Product Manual 257 May 2013 Model 45 Operations Additions A 5 Operations Additions Introduction In addition to the standard operating functions in this manual the addition listed below appears if you have model DR45AR Viewing Fo sterilization display Add the following prompt to Table 5 5 Lower Display Key Parameter Prompts Prompt Description Fo Fo sterilization time in the lower display with the appropriate input in the upper display Digital input REM SW prompt selection Add the following selections to Table 5 25 Digital Input Option Action on Contact Closure REM SW Display Indication Action on Contact Closure Selections Fo RST None Resets Fo sterilization calculation if Fo RESET prompt is enabled 258 DR4500A Truline Circular Chart Recorder With or Without Control Product Manual Release M May 2013 Model 45 Configuration Worksheet Additions A 6 Configuration Worksheet Additions Configuration additions In addition to the Configuration worksheet items that are listed in Section 3 Configuration the following parameters also appear in Model DR45AR Release M May 2013 Group Function Value or Factory Prompt prompt Selection Setting FO RESET RESET FO OPTIONS REJ FREQ 60 HF REJ ENABLE RELHUMID NO ATMPRES DEVIATION NONE DEVSETPT 0 SCROLL NONE GRANDTOT D
126. Configuration Configuration Procedure 3 5 Configuration Procedure Introduc Procedu tion Each of the Set Up groups and their functions are preconfigured at the factory The factory settings are shown in the Set Up group tables that follow this procedure If you want to change any of these selections or values follow the procedure in Table 3 2 This procedure tells you the keys to press to get to any Set Up group and any associated Function parameter prompt If you need a detailed explanation of any prompt refer to Section 4 Configuration Parameter Definitions re Follow the procedure listed in Table 3 2 to access the Set Up groups and Function prompts n TIP The prompting scrolls at a rate of 2 3 seconds when the SET UP or FUNC key is held in Also A V keys will move group prompts forward or backward at a rate twice as fast Table 3 2 Configuration Procedure Step Operation Press Result Select Set Up mode SET UP Upper Display SET UP Lets you know you are in the configuration mode and a Set Up group title is being displayed in the lower display Lower Display INPUT 1 This is the first Set Up group title Select any Set Up group SET UP e Successive presses of the SET UP key will sequentially display the other Set Up group titles shown in the prompt hierarchy in Figure 3 1 e You can also use the A V keys to scan the Set Up groups in both directions
127. Control Product Manual 213 May 2013 Input Calibration Calibration Procedure Step Operation Press Action Result 4 Check the Cold Junction FUNC The calculations for zero and span are now stored and Temperature you will see WARNING Upper Display The cold junction temperature at The the rear terminals accuracy of the recorder is directly affected by the Lower Display C J TEMP accuracy of this value Change this value only if e The value in the upper display is in the tenths of a the zero and span degree It is the current reading of the temperature calibration procedures did as measured at the thermocouple terminals not bring the controller that is at J2 and recognized by the recorder within the specified pines e When using the Ice Bath method this value should be the terminal ambient temperature You can change this value if it is in error using the A or Y key 5 Exit the Calibration Mode FUNC The recorder stores the calibration constants and exit calibration mode 214 DR4500A Truline Circular Chart Recorder With or Without Control Product Manual Release M May 2013 Input Calibration Printing Characteristics Adjustments 7 7 Printing Characteristics Adjustments Printing characteristics adjustments Normally there is no need to adjust the printing characteristics as part of an input or output calibration procedure However if the chart printing appears to be faded you can use
128. DECRMENT RUN HOLD RUN HOLD Note that MAN AUTO or RESET is shown but not both fno key is pressed for 25 seconds the test times out and the recorder exits the key test e f any test fails go to Subsection 9 3 Self Diagnostics for more information Key error When a key is pressed and the prompt KEY ERROR appears in the lower display it will be for one of the following reasons e parameter not available not in Set Up mode press SET UP key first key malfunction perform keyboard test Start up procedure Use the procedure listed in Table 5 3 to start up the recorder Open the recorder door Apply power and wait for the recorder to run its power up tests 138 DR4500A Truline Circular Chart Recorder With or Without Control Product Manual Release M May 2013 Operation Start up n ATTENTION e If FAILSAFE starts blinking in the lower display refer to Section 9 for troubleshooting data e For recorders with two controllers both enabled be sure the CHN 1 indication is lit for steps 2 6 If CHN 1 is not lit sequentially press the LOWR DISP key until 1 is lit when OUT is displayed Table 5 3 Procedure for Starting Up the Recorder Step Description Press Action 1 Pen check For RECORDER ONLY models just check that the pen is operating and skip to step 6 2 Select manual mode MAN Until MAN indicator is ON AUTO The recorder is in manual mode and
129. Display DARK MEDIUM or LIGHT Lower Display GRID LN e Press or V to select the desired contrast 4 Select Stylus FUNC Until you see Upper Display NORMAL or JEWEL Lower Display PEN TYPE e Press A or V to select the pen type Select NORMAL if high speed stylus black tip is installed e Select JEWEL only if abrasion resistant stylus beige tip is installed 5 Return to normal LOWR Return to normal operation and observe the change in operation DISP printing characteristics e Change Set Up group LOCKOUT to something other than NONE Release M DR4500A Truline Circular Chart Recorder With or Without Control Product Manual 135 May 2013 5 Operation 5 1 Overview Introduction This section gives you all the information necessary to monitor and operate your recorder and for performing routine maintenance tasks In this section assume that the recorder has been properly installed and configured and that the inputs are properly calibrated Some of the procedures in this section are required only initially and some are required only randomly as conditions dictate Once the recorder is up and running required operation actions are infrequent and straightforward Review the Operator Interface Display and Keypad descriptions shown in Section 1 Overview What s in this section This section contains the following topics
130. HEIGHT HECTMT MULTIPLY Multiplier Selection X 001 X 001 to X 1 produce a display with the X 01 indicated number of decimal places If a X 1 multiplier gt 1 has been selected the X1 multiplier will be printed after the X10 engineering units selected e g GAL x X100 1K X1K X10K X100K TOTAL EU Totalizer Engineering three alpha characters Will be printed on chart next to totalizer Units Selection value A Grand Total feature is available under the OPTIONS Set Up group If this function is enabled the recorder will print the sum of all the active totalizers at each major time line This is printed in the space where the totalizer 4 is normally printed See the Truline Product Manual Options Set Up Continued on next page 268 DR4500A Truline Circular Chart Recorder With or Without Control Product Manual Release M May 2013 Model DR45AW Configuration Configuration Continued Table 3 lists the function prompts available in the PULS OUT Set Up group Pulse Counter configuration There is a second pulse output available using control relay 2 on the control 1 card Press the SET UP key to enter the configuration mode and continue pressing until PULS OUT prompt appears in the lower display Press the key to display the prompts in Table 3 Press t key to make selections B 3 Pulse Counter Group Function Prompts Function Function Selections or Remarks Prompt Name Range of S
131. Honeywell DR4500A Truline Circular Chart Recorder With or Without Control Product Manual Doc 44 45 25 30 Release M Last Revision Date May 2013 Honeywell Process Solutions Notices and Trademarks Copyright 2013 by Honeywell Release M May 2013 WARRANTY REMEDY Honeywell warrants goods of its manufacture as being free of defective materials and faulty workmanship Contact your local sales office for warranty information If warranted goods are returned to Honeywell during the period of coverage Honeywell will repair or replace without charge those items it finds defective The foregoing is Buyer s sole remedy and is in lieu of all other warranties expressed or implied including those of merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose Specifications may change without notice The information we supply is believed to be accurate and reliable as of this printing However we assume no responsibility for its use While we provide application assistance personally through our literature and the Honeywell web site it is up to the customer to determine the suitability of the product in the application Honeywell Process Solutions 1860 West Rose Garden Lane Phoenix Arizona 85027 www honeywellprocess com DR4500 Truline is a U S registered trademark of Honeywell Other brand or product names are trademarks of their respective owners ii DR4500A Truline Circular Chart Recorder With or Without Control Produc
132. I 900 PENAOFF 93 0 IN3 LO 300 MAJORDIV 10 CUTOFF 3 0 MINORDIV 10 BIAS n n 1 4 RNG4TAG RNG4 FILTER 3 0 BURNOUT UP CHART CHRTSPD XHR EMISSIV 01 HOUR REV 12 TIME DIV 24 INPUT 4 DECIMAL XXX X MINORDIV Four UNITS DEGF CONTINUE NO ENGUNITS CHARTNAM TRULIN IN4 TYPE 100PT HEADER NO XMITTER LINEAR REM CHRT NONE IN4 HI 900 INA LO 300 TIME MINUTES Set CUTOFF 4 0 HOURS to BIAS n 1 4 DAY local FILTER 4 0 MONTH time BURNOUT DEGF YEAR EMISSIV 01 DAY WAKE MIN 0 WAKE HR 0 WAKE DAY 0 WAKE MON 0 88 DR4500A Truline Circular Chart Recorder With or Without Control Product Manual Release M May 2013 Configuration Configuration Record Sheet Group Function Value or Factory Group Function Value or Factory Prompt prompt Selection Setting Prompt prompt Selection Setting TOTAL 1 Value EO GAL CONTROL 2 CONTROL2 ENABLE RSET TOT NO PID SETS 1ONLY TOTAL 1 DISABL SW VALUE 0 0 TOTAL EU GAL SP SOURC 1LOCAL RATE SECOND RATIO 1 0 SCALER 1 BIAS 0 RSETABLE NO SP TRACK NONE INHIBIT NONE POWER UP MANUAL PWR OUT LAST TOTAL 2 Value EO GAL SP HILIM 500 RSET TOT NO SP LOLIM 0 TOTAL 2 DISABL ACTION REVRSE TOTAL EU GAL OUTHILIM 100 0 RATE SECOND OUTLOLIM 0 SCALER 1 DROPOFF 0 0 RSETABLE NO DEADBAND 0 OUT HYST 0 5 FAILSAFE 50 HEALS vee REM SW2 NONE PV HIGH 0 0 MAN KEY ENABLE RATIO A 1 0 MINorRPM MIN BIAS A 0 0 CONT2ALG PIDA RATIO B 1 0 OUT2ALG CURRENT BIAS B 0 0 4 20 RNG 50
133. ILIM 5 0 to 105 0 96 of output HIGH OUTPUT LIMIT this is the highest value of output beyond which you do not want the recorder automatic output to exceed Use 0 to 100 for time proportional output type OUTLOLIM 5 0 to 105 0 96 of output LOW OUTPUT LIMIT this is the lowest value of output below which you do not want the recorder automatic output to exceed Use 0 to 100 for time proportional output type DROPOFF 5 to 105 0 of output CONTROLLER DROPOFF VALUE select an output value that below which the recorder output will dropoff to the low output limit value set in prompt OUT LOLIM DEADBAND 5 0 to 25 0 96 0 to 25 0 0 5 to 5 0 DEADBAND is an adjustable gap between the operating ranges of output 1 and output 2 in which neither output operates positive value or both outputs operate negative value It is the difference between the nominal trip points of relay 1 and relay 2 Time Duplex On Off Duplex Position Proportional The Local Setpoint will automatically adjust itself to be within the setpoint limit range For example if SP 1500 and the SP HILIM is changed to 1200 the new Local Setpoint will be 1200 Applies for Input 3 and Input 4 for recorders with two controllers 112 DR4500A Truline Circular Chart Recorder With or Without Control Product Manual Release M May 2013 Configuration Parameter Definitions Control Parameters Set
134. ISABL STERILIZ IN TEMP STDTEMP Z VALUE REM SW REM SW2 DR4500A Truline Circular Chart Recorder With or Without Control Product Manual 259 B Model DRASAW B 1 Overview Introduction The Model DR45AW is a Truline Recorder that has been designed toperform as an Open Channel Flow Recorder This addendum describes thespecial features and includes installation and operating requirements that are specific to the Model DRASAW Features The following is a list of features specific to the Model DR45AW Controlfunctions are NOT available in this unit e Open Channel Flow Recorder feature is Record Only with anoptional pulse output function The pulse output counter alarm function provides a configurable timeduration relay output when a selected incremental change in volume hasoccurred The pulse output relay can be reset from the keyboard e Two additional totalizers can be provided making a total of up to fourtotalizers possible A manual adjustable totalizer function can beselected to make corrections to the accumulated value as a result ofpower outages e The Truline Flow Recorder is configurable to five different primaryopen channel flow elements VNOTCH WEIR RECTANGULAR WEIR CIPOLLETTI WEIR PARSHALL FLUME PALMER BOWLUS FLUME Metric Flow Rate selections are available e The product provides a configurable low flow cutoff function for eachinput being used for totalization This feature allows the user to select ape
135. Lower Display Upper Display Parameter Definition Prompt Range of Setting or Selection AxS1 VAL Value in engineering units ALARM x SETPOINT 1 VALUE this is the value at which you want the alarm type chosen in prompt AxS1TYPE to actuate The value depends on what the setpoint has been configured to represent NO setpoint is required for Communications SHED For SP Programming the value is the segment number for which the event applies AxS2 VAL Value in engineering units ALARM x SETPOINT 2 VALUE this is the value at which you want the alarm type chosen in prompt AxS2TYPE to actuate e The details are the same as AxS1 VAL AxS1TYPE ALARM x SETPOINT 1 TYPE select what you want Setpoint 1 of Alarm 1 to represent It can represent any of the Inputs Relative Humidity Deviation loop 1 or 2 Output loop 1 or 2 and if you have a model with communications you can configure the recorder to alarm on SHED If you have setpoint programming you can alarm when a segment goes ON or OFF loop 1 or 2 An alarm can also be set to activate if a totalizer value has exceeded a configured alarm value NONE NO ALARM IN 1 INPUT 1 IN 2 INPUT 2 IN 3 INPUT 3 IN 4 INPUT 4 RH RELATIVE HUMIDITY DEV loop 1 LOOP 1 DEVIATION OUT loop 1 LOOP 1 OUTPUT DEV2 loop 2 LOOP 2 DEVIATION OUT2 loop 2 LOOP 2 OUTPUT EVENT EVENT ON SP PROGRAMMING TOTAL 1 TOTALIZER TO ALARM ON TOTAL 2 TOTALIZER TO ALARM ON
136. MER TO LSP RN HLD MAN KEY Manual Mode Key Selection ENABLE ENABLE DISABL PB orGAIN Proportional Band or Gain PB PCT GAIN Units GAIN GAIN must be used with OUTPUT ALG settings of TIME D TIME DUPLEX or TI CUR TIME CURRENT MIN orRPM Reset Units R P M repeats per minute MIN MIN minutes per repeat CONT1 ALG or Control Algorithm ON OFF PD MR PID A CONT2 ALG PID A 3PSTEP PID B not applicable for model DR45AR OUT1 ALG or Output Algorithm TIME TIME D CURRENT OUT2 ALG CURRNT CUR TI appears if not POSITN TI CUR 3PSTEP above not applicable for Model DR45AR 4 20RNG Current Time Duplex Range 100PCT FULL 50PCT CUR D 50 PCT SPLIT 74 DR4500A Truline Circular Chart Recorder With or Without Control Product Manual Release M May 2013 Configuration Tuning Parameters Set Up Group 3 13 Tuning Parameters Set Up Group Introduction These Tuning Set Up groups contain the Function parameters that will allow your recorder to respond correctly to changes in process variable or setpoint You can start with predetermined values but you will have to watch your process to determine how to modify them Function prompts Table 3 10 lists all the function prompts in the Tuning 1 or Tuning 2 Set Up groups How the Algorithm and Control Set Up groups are configured determines which prompts will appear Table 3 10 Tuning 1 or Tuning 2 Group Function Prompts Funct
137. May 2013 Installation Input Wiring Procedures 4 20 mA inputs and transmitter power You can wire input 1 2 3 or 4 for 4 20 mA actuations The polarity for inputs 1 2 3 and 4 is identical The prerequisites are Model Number Table 1 1XXX X1XX ATTENTION Connector J11 on the main processor printed circuit board can be used to provide 24 Vdc power to up to two field transmitters without power which are supplying the 4 20 mA input signals to the recorder 1 2W 24 Vdc 50 mA available Refer to Figure 2 14 and follow the procedure in Table 2 13 to wire 4 20 mA inputs Table 2 13 4 20 mA Input Wiring Step Action Open the recorder door Loosen the captive screw in the chart plate and swing the plate out Be sure that the jumper MA WI1 is installed in the position labeled MA this connects internal 250 ohm resistor across the 4 20 mA input terminals on J2 Refer to Figure 2 14 for location of jumper Locate jumper position W3 and make sure the jumper is in the proper position for your input type see Figure 2 14 for the location Locate connector J2 on the printed circuit board for input 1 refer to Figure 2 14 Remove the unwired plug from J2 Run the input wires through the desired knockout DO NOT bundle them with the power wires oc For CE Mark conformity install the ferrite filter as shown in Figure 2 11 and the capacitors as sho
138. PCT RATIO C 1 0 BIAS C 0 0 TUNING 1 FUZZY DISABL POLYNOM NONE ACCUTUNE PORE DISABL CO VALUE 0 AT ERR Read only C1 VALUE 0 PROP BD 1 0 C2x10 1 0 or C3x10 3 0 GAIN 1 0 C4x10 5 0 RATE MIN 0 00 C5x10 7 0 RSET MIN 1 0 or CONTROL CONTROL1 ENABLE RSET RPM 1 0 1 PID SETS 1ONLY MAN RSET 0 0 SW VALUE 0 0 CYCSEC 20 0 SP SOURC 1LOCAL PROP BD2 1 0 RATIO 1 0 Or BIAS 0 GAIN 2 1 0 SP TRACK NONE RATE2MIN 0 00 POWER UP MANUAL RSET2MIN 1 0 PWR OUT LAST or SPHILIM 500 RSET2RPM 1 0 SPLOLIM 0 CYC2SEC 20 0 ACTION REVRSE OUT HILIM 100 0 OUT LOLIM 0 DROPOFF 0 0 DEADBAND 2 0 OUT HYST 0 5 FAILSAFE 50 REM SW NONE MAN KEY ENABLE PBorGAIN GAIN MINorRPM MIN CONT1ALG PIDA OUT1ALG CURRENT 4 20 RNG 50PCT Release M DR4500A Truline Circular Chart Recorder With or Without Control Product Manual 89 May 2013 Configuration Configuration Record Sheet Group Function Value or Factory Group Function Value or Factory Prompt prompt Selection Setting Prompt prompt Selection Setting TUNING 2 FUZZY DISABL TIMER TIMER DISABL ACCUTUNE DISABL PERIOD 0 01 AT ERR Read only START KEY PROP BD 1 0 LDISPLAY TREM RESET KEY GAIN 1 0 ON TIME RATE MIN 0 00 INCRMENT MIN RSET MIN 1 0 or ALARM 1 A1S1 VAL 90 RSET RPM 1 0 A1S2 VAL 95 MAN RSET 0 0 A1S1TYPE INPUT1 CYCSEC 20 0 A1S2TYPE INPUT1 PROP BD2 1 0 A1S1 HL LO or A1S1SCAL 1 GAIN 2 1 0 A1S2HL HI RATE2MIN 0 00 A1S2SCAL 1 RSET2MIN 1 0 AL1 HYST 0 1 HS TPRER 1 0 ALARM 2 A281
139. PEN TYPE Stylus Selection NORMAL Select if high speed stylus black NORMAL tip is installed JEWEL Select if abrasion resistant stylus beige tip is installed Release M DR4500A Truline Circular Chart Recorder With or Without Control Product Manual 87 May 2013 Configuration Configuration Record Sheet 3 23 Configuration Record Sheet Keep a record Enter the value or selection for each prompt on this sheet so you will have a record of how your recorder was configured Group Function Value or Factory Group Function Value or Factory Prompt prompt Selection Setting Prompt prompt Selection Setting INPUT 1 DECIMAL XXX X PEN 1 PENT1IN INPUT1 UNITS DEGF CHART1HI 302 0 ENGUNITS CHART1LO 292 0 IN1 TYPE 100PT PEN1ON 91 0 XMITTER LINEAR PEN1OFF 93 0 IN1 HI 900 MAJORDIV 10 IN1LO 300 MINORDIV 10 CUTOFF 1 0 RNG1TAG RNG1 BIAS n n 1 4 FILTER 1 0 PEN 2 PEN2IN INPUT2 BURNOUT UP CHART2HI 302 0 EMISSIV 01 CHART2LO 292 0 PEN2ON 91 0 INPUT 2 DECIMAL XXX X PEN2OFF 93 0 UNITS DEGF MAJORDIV 10 ENGUNITS MINORDIV 10 IN2 TYPE 100PT RNG2TAG RNG2 XMITTER LINEAR IN2 HI 900 PEN 3 PENSIN INPUT3 IN2 LO 300 CHART3HI 302 0 CUTOFF 2 0 CHART3LO 292 0 BIAS n n 1 4 PEN3ON 91 0 FILTER 2 0 PEN3OFF 93 0 BURNOUT UP MAJORDIV 10 EMISSIV 01 MINORDIV 10 RNG3TAG RNG3 INPUT 3 DECIMAL XXX X UNITS DEGF PEN 4 PENAIN NPUTA ENGUNITS CHART4HI 302 0 IN3 TYPE 100PT CHART4LO 292 0 XMITTER LINEAR PENAON 91 0 IN3 H
140. PLE If input 1 is a 4 to 20 mA signal but the signal represents a type K thermocouple select K TC H and the recorder will characterize the 4 to 20 mA signal so that it is treated as a type K thermocouple input high range BTC B Type Thermocouple ETCH E Type Thermocouple High ETCL E Type Thermocouple Low J TC H J Type Thermocouple High JTCL J Type Thermocouple Low KTCH K Type Thermocouple High KTCL K Type Thermocouple Low NNM H NNM NiNiMo Type Thermocouple High NIC TC NIC Nicrosil Nisil Thermocouple RTC R Type Thermocouple STC S Type Thermocouple TTCH T Type Thermocouple High TTCL T Type Thermocouple Low WTCH W5W26 Type Thermocouple High WTCL W5W26 Type Thermocouple Low 100 PT 100 Ohm RTD 500 PT 500 Ohm RTD 100 RH 100 Ohm RTD LINEAR Linear Range SQROOT Extracts Square Root INn HI 999 9 to 9999 INPUT HIGH RANGE VALUE in engineering units is displayed for all inputs but can only be configured for n 1 2 3 or 4 or linear or square root transmitter characterization 999 to 9999 Otherwise this is a read only display of the higher range in engineering units value for the selected T C or RTD input including transmitter characterization if applicable e Scale the 1 input signal to the display value you want for 100 96 EXAMPLE Actuation Input 4 mA to 20 mA Process Variable Flow Range of Flow 0 to 250 Gal Min High Range display value 250 Then 20 mA 250 Gal Min The control setpoint will be
141. POINT IN AUTO if configured when the recorder transfers out of remote setpoint the last value of the remote setpoint RSP is inserted into the local setpoint POWER UP PWR OUT POWER UP CONTROLLER MODE RECALL this selection determines which mode and setpoint the recorder will use when the it restarts after a power loss Select one from below MANUAL MANUAL LSP at power up the recorder will use manual mode with the output value displayed ALSP A RSP e AUTOMATIC LOCAL SETPOINT at power up the recorder will return to the automatic mode and will use the local setpoint for control e AUTOMATIC REMOTE SETPOINT at power up the recorder will return to the automatic mode and will use the remote setpoint for control AM SP e LAST MODE LAST SETPOINT used before power down AM LSP e LAST MODE LAST LOCAL SETPOINT on power down POWER UP OUTPUT SELECTION for 3P Step Control only this selection determines what position the motor will be in when powered up LAST LAST at power up in automatic mode the motor position will be the last one prior to power down When the unit goes into FAILSAFE it will stay in automatic mode motor will not be driven to the configured Failsafe position Release M May 2013 DR4500A Truline Circular Chart Recorder With or Without Control Product Manual 111 Configuration Parameter Definitions Control Parameters
142. PT2 SETPOINT 2 records Setpoint 2 DGTL1 DIGITAL 1 INPUT records EVENT pen function on contact closure across digital 1 input DGTL2 DIGITAL 2 INPUT records EVENT pen function on contact closure across digital 2 input PV1 PV1 records calculated PV1 when an input algorithm INP ALG has been selected in the Options group Available only in units with software Math Option CHARTnHI 999 0 to 999 CHART HIGH RANGE VALUE Enter a value that corresponds with the chart high range value for n 1 2 3 or 4 pen 1 pen 2 pen 3 or pen 4 CHARTnLO 999 0 to 999 CHART RANGE LOW VALUE Enter a value that n21 2 3or 4 corresponds with the chart low range value for pen 1 pen 2 pen 3 or pen 4 98 DR4500A Truline Circular Chart Recorder With or Without Control Product Manual Release M May 2013 Configuration Parameter Definitions Pen Parameters Set Up Group Lower Display Prompt Upper Display Range of Setting or Selection Parameter Definition PENnON 1 2 4 0 to 100 PEN CHART POSITION FOR ON EVENT This is the event marker configuration using digital inputs Select the chart position where pen 1 pen 2 pen 3 and pen 4 is to mark trace occurrence of an ON event e Prompt only appears if DGTL1 or 2 is selected as pen 1 pen 2 pen 3 or pen 4 input PENnOFF 1 2 3 or 4 0 to 100 PEN CHART POSITION FOR OFF EVENT This is the event marker
143. PULS2CNT Pulse Counter Selection YES Enable YES or disable NO the pulse for Control Relay 2 NO output option for control relay 2 TOTLIZR2 Totalizer Selection for TOTAL1 Select one of the four totalizers as the Control Relay 2 TOTAL2 input to the pulse output counter for TOTAL3 control relay 2 TOTAL4 PULSE2SP Pulse Setpoint Value 0 to 9999 The Pulse Setpoint Value is the Selection for Control incremental volume selected to close the Relay 2 pulse output relay 2 for a pre selected time duration This number will be multiplied by the scaler selected at the SP2SCALE function prompt SP2SCALE Setpoint Scale Selection 1 The Setpoint Scale is used to scale the for Control Relay 2 10 pulse setpoint for control relay 2 100 1000 10000 100000 1E6 PULSE2WID Pulse Width Selection 1 2 SEC Pulse Width is the duration in time of the for Control Relay 2 1 SEC contact closure for control relay 2 5 SEC ATTENTION If the measured flow rate demands contact closure within the pulse width time the relay will remain ON PULS2RST Pulse Counter Reset for YES Used to manually reset the pulse Control Relay 2 NO counter for control relay 2 to zero value 270 DR4500A Truline Circular Chart Recorder With or Without Control Product Manual Release M May 2013 Model DR45AW Operation B 4 Operation Follow the procedure in Table 4 to display the totalizer value Displaying totalizers Procedure for Displaying the Totalizer Value P
144. Permissible Wiring Bundling Bundle No Wire Functions 1 Line power wiring Earth ground wiring Control relay output wiring Line voltage alarm wiring Analog signal wire such as Input signal wire thermocouple 4 to 20 mA etc 4 20 mA output signal wiring Slidewire feedback circuit wiring Digital input signals Communications 4 20 mA auxiliary output Low voltage alarm relay output wiring Low voltage wiring to solid state type control circuits Identify your wiring requirements 28 To determine the appropriate diagrams for wiring your recorder refer to the model number interpretation in this section The model number of the recorder can be found on the chart plate DR4500A Truline Circular Chart Recorder With or Without Control Product Manual Release M May 2013 Installation Input Wiring Procedures 2 6 Input Wiring Procedures Wiring the recorder Using the information contained in the model number select the appropriate wiring diagrams from the figures listed below and wire the recorder accordingly Wiring Requirements Refer to Ferrite Filter Locations Figure 2 11 AC Line Power Figure 2 12 Thermocouple RTD Radiamatic mV or 0 5 Vdc Inputs Figure 2 13 4 20 mA Inputs Figure 2 14 0 10 Vdc Inputs Figure 2 15 4 20 mA Current Outputs or Auxiliary Outputs 2 and 3 Figure 2 16 Position Proportional Control Outputs Figure 2 17 Relay C
145. Program 1 SOAK2 to SOAK36 PR2 STRT Start Segment for Program 2 RAMP1 to RAMP35 PR2 END End Segment for Program 2 SOAK2 to SOAK36 PR3 STRT Start Segment for Program 3 RAMP1 to RAMP35 PR3 END End Segment for Program 3 SOAK2 to SOAK36 PR4 STRT Start Segment for Program 4 RAMP1 to RAMP35 PR4 END End Segment for Program 4 SOAK2 to SOAK36 PR5 STRT Start Segment for Program 5 RAMP1 to RAMP35 PR5 END End Segment for Progam 5 SOAK2 to SOAK36 PR6 STRT Start Segment for Program 6 RAMP1 to RAMP35 PR6 END End Segment for Program 6 SOAK2 to SOAK36 RAMPUNIT Ramp type TIME EU MIN EU HR SYNC 1 2 Synchronizes profile for Control ENABLE Loops 1 and 2 DISABL Release M DR4500A Truline Circular Chart Recorder With or Without Control Product Manual 187 May 2013 Setpoint Ramp Soak Programming and Operation Setpoint Program Segments Set Up Group 6 7 Setpoint Program Segments Set Up Group Introduction You can configure up to 36 ramp and soak segments Setpoint program segments group prompts Table 6 5 lists all the function prompts in the Setpoint Program Segments setup group and their definitions Lower Display Table 6 5 Setpoint Program Segments Group Definitions Upper Display Parameter Definition Prompt Range of Setting or Selection SEGxRAMP 0 99 hrs 59 min Time A ramp segment is the time it takes to change the setpoint to the next setpoint value in the program x 1 3 5 35 0 to 999 Rate Ramps are odd number
146. R4500A Truline Circular Chart Recorder With or Without Control Product Manual 37 May 2013 Installation Input Wiring Procedures Ferrite Filter Fair Rite P N 0443164151 or equivalent Required for CE Mark Conformity Kit Part No 51197512 502 contains two ferrite filters Part No 51197612 508 contains 8 ferrite filters Install inside of case See Figure 2 11 Capacitor Kit 51197755 001 Install capacitors as shown in figure 214138 source wi Ma a Wi mE Wi RID modified 0047 pF d Capacitor NOTE Calibrate recorder to achieve stated accuracy See Section 7 Input Calibration Figure 2 15 0 10 Volt dc Input Wiring 38 DR4500A Truline Circular Chart Recorder With or Without Control Product Manual Release M May 2013 Installation Output Wiring Procedures 2 7 Output Wiring Procedures 4 20 mA control output wiring You can wire control output 1 or 2 for 4 20 mA output The prerequisites are e Model Number Table 2 10 40 44 60 or 66 Refer to Figure 2 16 and follow the procedure in Table 2 15 to wire 4 20 mA control outputs Table 2 15 4 20 mA Control Output Wiring Step Action 1 Open the recorder door Loosen the captive screw in the chart plate and swing the plate out 2 Locate connector J1 near the top of the control output 1 or 2 printed circuit board refer to Figure 2 16 for location 3
147. R4500A recorder Each part is labeled with a key number and the key numbers are listed in tables with associated part number Also included for your reference are an Internal Cabling drawing Figure 10 5 and an Internal Wiring Diagram Figure 10 6 for options only When ordering parts be sure to specify your recorder s serial and model numbers on nameplate as well as the part identification What s in this section This section contains the following topics Topic See Page 10 1 Overview 242 10 2 Exploded Views 243 Figure 10 1 Door assembly 243 Figure 10 2 Chart plate assembly 244 Figure 10 3 Basic recorder components without options 245 Figure 10 4 Recorder components associated with options 247 10 3 Miscellaneous Hardware Kit Contents 249 10 4 Figure 10 5 Internal Cabling Data 250 10 5 Figure 10 6 Internal Wiring Diagram Options Only 251 242 DR4500A Truline Circular Chart Recorder With or Without Control Product Manual Release M May 2013 Parts List Exploded Views 10 2 Exploded Views Door assembly 1 1 T2 Figure 10 1 Door assembly Table 10 1 Door assembly parts 21452 Figure 10 1 is an exploded view of the Door Assembly Table 10 1 is a list of the associated part numbers Recommended Key Part Number Description Spare Parts per Quantity per Unit 10 100 1 Door Assembly 1 Note 30754955 501 Blue with glass window and latch 3 3075495
148. Radiamatic mV 0 5V 4 20 NEMA4X door Glass window 3 0 10 Vdc NEMA4X door Acrylic window NEMA4X HTST door Standard door latch External Output Keyed latch 00 None Door lock with key 10 1 Control Output No illumination 11 2 Control Outputs L Configuration lockout Chart plate seal 4 0 1 Control w SP Programming M Configuration Lockout Chart plate seal Illumination 44 2 Controls w SP Programming Chart illumination 50 Pulse Output 0 approvals 6 0 1 Control Output with FM Approval K CE Mark 6 6 2 Control Outputs with FM Approval L CEMark UL CSA certification M CE Mark FM approval N CE Mark UL CSA certification External Interface P LL listing CSA certification None R FM approved Class 1 Div 2 Groups A B C D 1 Auxiliary 4 20 mA Output U UL listing CSA certification FM approval 3 RS485 Modbus RTU 0 No I D Tag RS485 Modbus RTU plus Auxiliary Output T Customer I D Tag 30 characters maximum 0 Standard Pen B Certificate of Conformance F3391 1 Abrasion Resistant Pen C Custom Calibration Test Report F3399 0 None D Certificate of Conformance 1 0 Tag 1 2 Alarm Outputs 2 Digital Inputs E Customer Calibration 1 0 Tag 2 4 Alarm Outputs 2 Digital Inputs None 3 6 Alarm Outputs 2 Digita
149. Refer to Section 8 Output Calibration 7 Replace the control output printed circuit Refer to the instructions included with the board replacement part DR4500A Truline Circular Chart Recorder With or Without Control Product Manual Release M May 2013 Troubleshooting Service Troubleshooting Procedures Table 9 16 Procedure 11 Troubleshooting the auxiliary output Step What to do How to do it or where to find the data 1 Be sure the controller is configured for Refer to Subsection 3 17 Auxiliary Output Auxiliary Output Group Make sure AUX OUT is enabled and the correct parameter is chosen Check the High and Low Scale values 2 Check the field wiring Refer to Section 2 Installation 3 Check the output Use a milliammeter at connection J2 on the Auxiliary Output printed circuit board to determine the correct output based on your representation of 4 mA and 20 mA 4 Recalibrate the Auxiliary Output Refer to Subsection 8 4 Auxiliary Output Calibration 5 Replace the Auxiliary Output printed Refer to the instructions included with the circuit board replacement part Table 9 17 Procedure 12 Troubleshooting external alarm function failure symptoms Step What to do How to do it or where to find the data 1 Be sure all the alarm configuration data Refer to Section 3 Configuration is correct 2 Check the applicable alarm relay
150. Relay Contact Ratings First Relays Resistive Load 1 A 120 Vac 1 2 A 240 Vac Relays 3 through 6 Resistive Load 5 A 120 Vac 2 5 A 240 Vac Digital Input 20 source for external dry contact or isolated solid state contacts Selects one configured input Totalizers One to four totalizers depending on model Eight digit totals with multiplier on digital display 14 digit totalization printout on chart RS485 Modbus RTU Communications Baud rate 300 600 1200 2400 4800 9600 19 200 38 400 Protocol RS485 Modbus Communications Length of Link 4000 ft 1 219 m maximum Link Characteristics Two wire multidrop Release M May 2013 DR4500A Truline Circular Chart Recorder With or Without Control Product Manual 11 Installation Overview Condition Specifications Calculations F calculation available on DR45AR Math function Miscellaneous e FM Approved 4 20 mA Control Output e AUL and FM approved NEMA4X door Door Lock e External Keypad e Chart Illumination ULL Listing CSA Approval FM Class Div 2 e Control with Accutune Il Tuning capability e Math e Glass or Acrylic Window e Configuration Lockout Switch e Customer ID Tag 30 characters maximum e Pulse output counter alarm function on DR45AW model CE Conformity Europe Product Classification Enclosure Rating Installation Category Overvoltage Category Pollution Degr
151. STEP e Other prompt affected DEADBAND e Controller 1 uses Relays and 4 and overrides control of relays by Alarms 3 and 4 Controller 2 uses Relays 5 and 6 and overrides control of relays by Alarms 5 and 6 TIME D RELAY DUPLEX type of output using two SPDT relays Its normally open NO or normally closed NC contacts are selected by positioning an internal jumper see Installation section e Other prompts affected DEADBAND e Controller 1 uses Relays and 4 and overrides control of relays by Alarms 3 and 4 Controller 2 uses Relays 5 and 6 and overrides control of relays by Alarms 5 and 6 CUR TI CURRENT RELAY DUPLEX RELAY HEAT is a variation of duplex with current active for 0 to 50 output tuning set 2 and relay active for 50 to 100 output tuning set 1 e Other prompts affected 4 20 RNG DEADBAND e Controller 1 uses Relay 3 and overrides control of relay by Alarm 3 Controller 2 uses Relay 5 and overrides control of relay by Alarm 5 TI CUR RELAY CURRENT DUPLEX RELAY COOL is similar to CUR TI except that current is active for 50 96 to 100 and relay is active for O 96 to 50 e Other prompts affected 4 20 RNG DEADBAND e Controller 1 uses Relay 4 and overrides control of relay by Alarm 4 Controller 2 uses Relay 6 and overrides control of relay by Alarm 6 4 20 RNG CURRENT DUPLEX RANGE ALGORITHM used with Output Algorithm selection
152. Set Up Group Lower Display Prompt Upper Display Range of Setting or Selection Parameter Definition PWR OUT continued SP HILIM FAIL SF 999 0 to 9999 input units FAIL SF at power up in manual mode the motor will be driven to either the O or 100 output position whichever is selected at prompt FAILSAFE When the unit goes into FAILSAFE it will go to manual mode motor will be driven to the configured Failsafe position SETPOINT HIGH LIMIT this selection prevents the local and remote setpoints from going above the value selected here The setting must be equal to or less than the upper range of input 1 and input 2 Input 2 when configured for remote setpoint will be restricted to this upper limit SP LOLIM 999 0 to 9999 inputs units SETPOINT LOW LIMIT this selection prevents the local and remote setpoints from going below the value selected here The setting must be equal to or greater than the lower range of input 1 and input 2 Input 2 when configured for remote setpoint will be restricted to this lower limit ACTION CONTROL OUTPUT DIRECTION in what direction do you want the recorder output to go when the process variable increases DIRECT DIRECT ACTING CONTROL the recorder s output increases as the process variable increases REVRSE REVERSE ACTING CONTROL the recorder s output decreases as the process variable increases OUTH
153. TOTAL 3 TOTALIZER TO ALARM ON MODEL DR45AW ONLY TOTAL 4 TOTALIZER TO ALARM ON MODEL DR45AW ONLY Release M DR4500A Truline Circular Chart Recorder With or Without Control Product Manual 125 May 2013 Configuration Parameter Definitions Alarms Set Up Group Lower Display Upper Display Parameter Definition Prompt Range of Setting or Selection AxS2TYPE Same as AxS1TYPE ALARM x SETPOINT 2 TYPE select what you want Setpoint 2 of Alarm x to represent The selections are the same as AxS1TYPE ALARM x SETPOINT 1 STATE select whether you want the alarm type chosen in prompt AxS1TYPE to alarm high or low or the beginning or end of a segment in setpoint Ramp Soak programming AxS1HL HI HI ALARM Relay coil is de energized when the PV is above the setpoint LO LO ALARM Relay coil is de energized when the PV is below the setpoint AxS1SCAL 1 MULTIPLIER FOR ALARM TYPE TOTAL 10 SELECTION the alarm is only a high value Enter a 100 scaler of from 1 to 1000000 1000 10000 Base value x multiplier 2 alarm setpoint value 100000 1E6 ALARM x SETPOINT 2 STATE select whether you want the alarm type chosen in prompt AxS2TYPE to alarm high or low or the beginning or end of a segment in setpoint Ramp Soak programming AxS2HL HI HI ALARM LO LO ALARM AxS2SCAL 1 MULTIPLIER FOR ALARM TYPE TOTAL 10 SELECTION the alarm is only a high value Enter a 100 scaler of from 1 to 1000000 1000 100
154. TSTYRSPESIFIKASJONER Stremtilforsel 102 til 132 Vac 204 til 264 Vac Nettfrekvens 50 60 Hz Kraftforbruk 20 watts max OMGIVELSER Instrumentet ma ikke opereres i n rheten av lettantennelige v sker eller gasser Bruk av elektriske instrumenter i slike omgivelser utgjor en sikkerhetsrisiko Temperatur omgivelse 0 til 55 C Fuktighet 5 til 90 HR 40 Vibrasjon 0 til 200 Hz akselerasjon 0 2 g UTSTYRSINSTALLASJON Pass p montere panelene regulatoren slik at berering av terminalene baksiden forhindres 284 DR4500A Truline Circular Chart Recorder With or Without Control Product Manual Release M May 2013 Foreign Language Safety Instructions PO21 6056 D 9 PO21 6056 INSTRUCOES DE SEGURANCA Para reduzir o risco de choque el ctrico que pode causar danos corporais seguir todas as normas de seguran a contidas nesta documenta o Este s mbolo avisa o utilizador sobre um eventual perigo de choque quando s o acess veis voltagens sob tens o perigosas Terminal de protec o de terra Fornecido para liga o do condutor do sistema da protec o de terra Om e Se este equipamento for usado de modo n o especificado pelo fabricante a protec o fornecida pelo equipamento pode n o ser adequada e Nao se deve substituir qualquer componente ou pe a que nao seja explicitamente especificado como substitu vel pelo nosso revendedor e Toda a cablagem deve estar de acordo com os c digos el
155. Three Position Step Control Algorithm 5 11 Three Position Step Control Algorithm Introduction The Three Position Step Control algorithm allows the control of a valve or other actuator with an electric motor driven by two controller output relays one to move the motor upscale the other to move it downscale without a feedback slidewire linked to the motor shaft Estimated motor position The Three Position Step Control algorithm provides an output display OUT which is an estimated motor position since the motor is not using any feedback Although this output indication is only accurate to a few percent it is corrected each time the controller drives the motor to one of its stops 0 or 100 94 It avoids all the control problems associated with the feedback slidewire wear dirt noise When operating in this algorithm the estimated OUT display is shown to the nearest percent 1 e no decimal Displaying the motor position Table 5 24 lists the procedure for displaying the motor position Table 5 24 Procedure for Displaying the 3PSTEP Motor Position Step Operation Press Action Result 1 Access the displays LOWR Until you see DISP Upper Display The PV value Lower Display OUT Estimated 3PStep motor position Power up output When the controller powers up after a power outage the position of the motor will correspond to whatever was configured at set up group prompt CONTROL fun
156. Up Group Lower Display Upper Display Parameter Definition Prompt Range of Setting or Selection OUT HYST 0 0 to 5 0 96 of PV span HYSTERESIS OUTPUT RELAY ONLY is an adjustable overlap of the ON OFF states of each control output This is the difference between the value of the process variable at which the control outputs energize and the value at which they de energize Only applicable for ON OFF control FAILSAFE to 100 96 FAILSAFE OUTPUT VALUE the output level used when you have communications SHED or when NO BURNOUT is configured and input 1 fails For 3 Position Step Control 100PCT 100PCT motor position set to 100 output position OPCT OPCT motor position set to O output position REM SW REMOTE SWITCHING DIGITAL INPUT contact REM SW2 closure enables one of the following NONE NO DIGITAL INPUT SELECTION TO MAN TO MANUAL contact closure selects Manual mode TO LSP TO LOCAL SETPOINT contact closure selects the local setpoint TO 25 TO LOCAL SETPOINT 2 contact closure selects local setpoint 2 TO DIR TO DIRECT ACTION contact closure selects Direct Control Action RN HLD RUN HOLD contact closure suspends setpoint Ramp Program Contact open resumes TUNE AUTOTUNE contact closure initiates Autotune TIMER TIMER starts the timer if enabled The Timer can also be started by the RH KEY or ALARMA These parameters are found under the
157. VAL 90 CYC2SEC 20 0 252 VAL 95 A2S1TYPE INPUT1 SP RAMP1 SP RAMP DISABL A2S2TYPE INPUT1 TIME MIN 0 A2S1HL LO FINAL SP 100 0 A2S1SCAL 1 SP RATE DISABL A2S2 HL HI EU HR UP A2S2SCAL 1 EU HR DN AL2 HYST 0 1 SP PROG DISABL RECYCLES et ALARM 3 A3S1 VAL 90 SOAK DEV A382 VAL 95 PROFILE A3S1TYPE INPUT1 STATE A3S2TYPE INPUT1 RECOVERY A3S1HL LO PROG END A3S1SCAL 1 A3S2HL HI SP RAMP2 SP RAMP DISABL A3S2SCAL 1 TIME MIN 0 AL3 HYST 0 1 FINAL SP 100 0 SP RATE I ALARM 4 A4S1 VAL 90 EU HR UP 452 VAL 95 EU HR DN A4S1TYPE INPUT1 SP PROG DISABL A4S2TYPE INPUT1 RECYCLES A4S1 HL LO SOAK DEV A4S1SCAL 1 PROFILE A4S2 HL HI STATE A4S2SCAL 1 RECOVERY AL4 HYST 0 1 PROG END PROFILES PRx STRT ES PRx END RAMPUNIT SYNC 1 2 SPP SEGS SEGxRAMP x SEGx SP SEGxTIME SPP EVNT SEGx EV van 90 DR4500A Truline Circular Chart Recorder With or Without Control Product Manual Release M May 2013 Configuration Configuration Record Sheet Group Function Value or Factory Group Function Value or Factory Prompt prompt Selection Setting Prompt prompt Selection Setting ALARM 5 A5S1 VAL 90 EVNT MSG EVENT 1 NONE A5S2 VAL 95 MESSAGE1 EVENT1 A5S1TYPE INPUT1 POSITION1 87 3 A5S2TYPE INPUT1 EVENT 2 NONE A5S1 HL LO MESSAGE2 EVENT2 A5S1SCAL 1 POSITION2 85 5 552 HL HI EVENT 3 NONE A5S2SCAL 1 MESSAGE3 EVENT3 AL5 HYST 0 1 POSITION3 83 6 EVENT 4 NONE ALARM 6 A6S1
158. VAL 90 MESSAGE4 EVENT4 A6S2 VAL 95 POSITION4 80 0 A6S1TYPE INPUT1 EVENT 5 NONE A6S2TYPE INPUT1 MESSAGE5 EVENT5 A6S1 HL LO POSITIONS 78 2 A6S1SCAL 1 EVENT 6 NONE A6S2 HL HI MESSAGE6 EVENT6 A6S2SCAL 1 POSITION6 76 9 AL6 HYST 0 1 LOCKOUT PASSWORD XXXX AUX OUT AUX OUT DISABL LOCKOUT CALIB 4 mA VAL 0 0 CHANGE XXXX 20mA VAL 100 0 ADJUST TRACE LN MEDIUM AUX OUT2 AUX OUT2 DISABL GRID LN MEDIUM 4 mA VAL 0 0 PEN TYPE NORMAL 20mA VAL 100 0 AUXOUT3 AUX OUT3 DISABL 4 mA VAL 0 0 20mA VAL 100 0 COMM ComSTATE DISABL Com ADDR 1 BAUD 9600 XMT DLAY NONE DBL BYTE FPB OPTIONS REJ FREQ 60 HF REJ ENABLE RELHUMID NO ATMPRES TT DEVIATION NONE DEVSETPT 0 SCROLL NONE GRANDTOT DISABL Release M DR4500A Truline Circular Chart Recorder With or Without Control Product Manual 91 May 2013 Configuration Configuration Record Sheet This page has been intentionally left blank 92 DR4500A Truline Circular Chart Recorder With or Without Control Product Manual Release M May 2013 4 Configuration Parameter Definitions 4 1 Overview Introduction This section provides information for all the user configurable control parameters listed in the configuration section If you aren t familiar with these parameters this section gives you the parameter prompt the selection or range of setting that you can make and a definition of how each parameter setting affects recorder performance It will also refer you to any other prompts that might be affected by your
159. W4 W5 below connector J5 on the printed circuit board Note that you may want to remove the plug in output printed circuit board for better access to jumpers Be sure to tag and remove all the plug connections to the printed circuit boards before removing it Position the jumpers as shown for the desired relay contact action and reinstall the printed circuit board 5 Run the Alarm output wires through the desired knockout 6 For CE Mark conformity e install the ferrite filter as shown in Figure 2 11 e install the capacitors as shown in Figure 2 20 7 Strip insulation from the end of each wire 8 Loosen the screws in plug J5 terminals and position the plug as you would to plug it into J5 9 Insert the wires for the alarm devices into the appropriate screw clamps as shown Refer to Figure 2 20 Tighten the screws to secure the wires 10 Install the wired plug into J5 48 DR4500A Truline Circular Chart Recorder With or Without Control Product Manual Release M May 2013 Installation Option Wiring Procedures Wiring for alarm outputs 3 4 5 and 6 Alarm No 3 Ferrite filter W2 contact W3 contact Alarm No 4 Alarm 3 Lo oS o Relay Load WA N O contact Pe fs OR W5 N C contact M W3 r 1W2 ite ee o 4 20 mA control output Plug JS PE and no amp 4 alarm outputs 0047 UF Capacitor Par Fair Rite P N 0443164151 o
160. With or Without Control Product Manual 139 May 2013 Operation Start up Step Description Press Action 7 Start up Controller 2 LOWR Until 2 is lit when OUT is displayed DISP For recorders with two controllers both enabled repeat steps 2 6 for controller 2 but be sure CHN 2 indicator is lit instead of CHN 1 8 Exit Start up Close the door and monitor the operation 140 DR4500A Truline Circular Chart Recorder With or Without Control Product Manual Release M May 2013 Operation Monitoring Your Recorder 5 3 Monitoring Your Recorder Introduction Besides the historical chart record you can monitor the recorder s indicators and displays to get an instantaneous view of various process conditions and of the control loop status Diagnostic error messages signal detection of malfunctions in certain internally monitored data Alarm and tuning messages indicate alarms in effect and control loops being tuned Operator interface The indicators and displays on the operator interface let you see what 1s happening to your process and how the recorder is responding Figure 5 1 1s a view of the operator interface A description of the displays and indicators 15 included Indicates temperature units of PV PV displayed is for channel 1 2 3 4 Alarm condition exists for alarm 1 or 2 when lit Remote set point or 2nd set point is active when lit Blinks when 2nd setpoin
161. ad write except for the Calibration group CONF CONF Tuning SP Ramp and program groups are read write All other groups are read only Calibration group is not available MAX MAX Calibration group not available All other groups are Read only ATTENTION Do not leave in NONE Lockout CHANGE Selections are CHANGE PASSWORD Changes default password to 0 to 9 one of your own AtoZ Be sure to record the new password in a safe location Release M DR4500A Truline Circular Chart Recorder With or Without Control Product Manual 133 May 2013 Configuration Parameter Definitions Printing Characteristics Adjustments 4 18 Printing Characteristics Adjustments Introduction With software version 1005 and newer two different hot stylus pen designs are available check your model number for Table 0 for high speed stylus 30756304 001 black tip Table 1 for abrasion resistant jewel tip stylus 30756304 002 beige tip The abrasion resistant stylus 18 designed for recording applications that include highly abrasive environments The abrasion resistant stylus should only be used with chart speeds from 24 hrs rev to 31 days rev Configuration choices Configuration choices are now provided for PEN TYPE and the selection made must match the stylus design PEN TYPE NORMAL is for the high speed stylus design PEN TYPE JEWEL is used only for abrasion resistant stylus design A CAUTION If the JEWEL
162. ador f lj alla s kerhetsf reskrifter 1 denna dokumentation Denna symbol varnar anv ndaren for risk for elchock vid tillf llig tkomst av spanningsforande del Anslutning av skyddsjord Avsedd f r anslutning av elsysternets skyddsjordsledare Om e Om utrustningen anv nds ett s dant s tt att det inte innefattas av tillverkarens specifikation kan de inbyggda s kerhetsfunktionerna ventyras e Ers tt aldrig n gon komponent eller del som inte ar specificerad som ers ttningsbar av tillverkaren e Allledningsdragning m ste utf ras i enlighet med lokala best mmelser och skall utf ras av beh rig personal med erfarenhet av s dant arbete e Skyddsjordsanslutningen skall anslutas f re alla andra anslutningar och losskopplas sist str mbrytare for n str mmen rekommenderas STR MF RS RJNING Sp nning 102 a 132 Vac 204 a 264 Vac Frekvens 50 60 Hz Effekt eller 20 watts max m rkstr m OMGIVNINGSVILLKOR Anv nd ej instrumentet i n rhet av br nnbara v tskor eller gaser Anv ndandet av instrumenteti s dant milj r en direkt s kerhetsrisk Temperatur Omgivande 0 till 55 C Fuktighet 5 till 90 RH 40 C Vibration 0 till 200 Hz acceleration 0 2 g INSTALLATION Instrumentet skall monteras i en panel eller 1 en l da f r att undvika att personalen kommer i ber ring med bakre inkopplingsplintar Release M DR4500A Truline Circular Chart Recorder With or Without Control
163. age 9 1 Overview 225 9 2 Troubleshooting Aids 227 9 3 Self Diagnostics 229 9 4 Visual Failure Symptoms 235 9 5 Troubleshooting Procedures 236 Types of problems Instrument performance can be adversely affected by installation and application problems as well as hardware problems We recommend that you investigate the problems in the following order e Installation related problems e Application related problems e Hardware and software related problems and use the information presented in this section to solve them If a replacement of any part is required follow the instructions shipped with the replacment part Release M DR4500A Truline Circular Chart Recorder With or Without Control Product Manual 225 May 2013 Troubleshooting Service Overview Installation related problems Read the Installation section in this manual to make sure the DR4500A has been properly installed The installation section provides information on protection against electrical noise connecting external equipment to the recorder and shielding and routing external wiring n ATTENTION System noise induced into the recorder will result in diagnostic error messages recurring If the diagnostic error messages can be cleared it indicates a soft failure and is probably noise related If system noise is suspected completely isolate the recorder from all field wiring Use calibration sources to simulate PV and check all recorder and control fu
164. aking any configuration changes to the Chart Set Up group place the recorder in Chart Hold Press the CHART key to stop the chart rotation Press again after configuration entry is made Function prompts Table 3 5 lists all the function prompts in the Chart Set Up group Table 3 5 Chart Group Function Prompts Function Prompt Function Name Selections or Range of Setting Factory Lower Display Upper Display Setting CHRTSPD Chart Speed Selection 8HR XHR 12HR 24HR 7DAYS XHR See prompt HOUR REV HOUR REV Hours per Revolution 6 to 744 12 hrs for abrasion resistant pen 12 appears only if XHR is NOTE Below 8 hrs chart speed 24 hrs chart selected above speed with abrasion resistant pen printing may be degraded TIME DIV Time Division 8 to 24 time periods 24 MINORDIV Minor Time Division Four Four Eight CONTINUE Continue Chart Rotation YES NO NO CHARTNAM Chart Name 0 to 9 TRULIN AtoZ blank HEADER Header for Chart YES NO NO Release M DR4500A Truline Circular Chart Recorder With or Without Control Product Manual 67 May 2013 Configuration Chart Set Up Group Function Prompt Lower Display Function Name Selections or Range of Setting Upper Display Factory Setting REM CHRT Remote Chart Activation NONE EXT SW1 EXT SW2 ALARM 1 ALARM 2 TIME See WAKE MIN WAKE HOUR WAKE DAY WAKE MON in Time Set Up group ALARM 3
165. amp Running a setpoint ramp includes starting holding viewing the ramp time ending the ramp and disabling it Procedure Table 5 16 lists the procedure for running the setpoint ramp Table 5 16 Procedure for Running a Setpoint Ramp Step Operation Press Action Result 1 Put the controller into MAN Until A indicator is ON and you will see automatic mode AUTO Upper Display H and the PV value Lower Display SP and the present setpoint value 2 Set Start SP or V Until the start setpoint value you desire is indicated in the lower display Upper Display H and the PV value Lower Display SP and the start setpoint value 3 Start the ramp RUN You will see HOLD Upper Display R and the PV value Lower Display SP and a changing setpoint value NOTE The value in the lower display will be increasing or decreasing toward the final setpoint value The PV value in the upper display and the pen trace will also change 4 Hold the ramp at the RUN This holds the ramp at the current setpoint value current value HOLD Press again to continue run A KEY ERROR prompt appears if RUN HOLD key is pressed while SP RAMP is disabled 5 View the remaining ramp LOWR Until you see time DISP Upper Display R or H and the PV value Lower Display RAMP XXXM time remaining 6 End the ramp When the final setpoint is reached the R changes to in the upper display and the recorder operates
166. amp 2 Transmitter Power M A Pa eee 34 V o Shield Wiring To Earth Ground External Ground Bus Bar Recorder Grounding rear of case Use 3 4 inch braided copper conductor Use Cable fitting to support wiring and hold in place Place the washer on the inside of the recorder between the case and the fastening nut to protect the recorder conductive case coating Ferrite Filter location Cable with an outer jacket diameter larger than 6 7 mm 0 264 in may require the outer jacket to be removed to fit the required one turn in the filter or the selection of a different cable 23685 Figure 2 11 Ferrite Filter Locations and Shield Wiring CE Mark AC line power Refer to Figure 2 12 and follow the procedure in Table 2 11 to connect the AC line power WARNING Be sure that the line voltage is OFF before connecting the power wires to the recorder or personal injury could result This equipment is suitable for connection to 120 240 Vac 50 60 Hz power supply mains It is the user s responsibility to provide a switch and non time delay North America quick acting high breaking capacity Type F Europe 1 2 A 250 V fuse s or circuit breaker as part of the installation The switch or circuit breaker shall be located in close proximity to the recorder within easy reach of the OPERATOR The switch or circuit breaker shall be marked as the disconnecting device for the recorder 30 DR4500A Trul
167. arm 6 activates chart e f you select TIME set wake minutes at prompt WAKE MIN and wake hours at prompt WAKE HR in Time Set Up group 102 DR4500A Truline Circular Chart Recorder With or Without Control Product Manual Release M May 2013 Configuration Parameter Definitions Time Parameters Set Up Group 4 5 Time Parameters Set Up Group Introduction The functions listed in this group deal with how to configure the real time in minutes hours days months and years There is also a selection for days of the week Time group prompts Table 4 4 lists all the function prompts in the Time parameters setup group and their definitions Table 4 4 Time Parameters Group Definitions Lower Display Upper Display Parameter Definition Prompt Range of Setting or Selection MINUTES 0 to 59 REAL TIME IN MINUTES Set the present time in minutes HOURS 0 to 23 REAL TIME IN HOURS Set the hour in 24 HR clock format DAY 1 to 31 REAL TIME IN DAYS Set a number corresponding to a day MONTH 1 to 12 REAL TIME IN MONTHS Set a number corresponding to a month YEAR 0 to 99 REAL TIME IN YEARS Set a number corresponding to a year DAY MONDAY e DAY OF THE WEEK Select a day of the week TUEDAY WEDDAY THRDAY FRIDAY SATDAY SUNDAY WAKE MIN 0 to 59 WAKE MINUTES Wake time specifies time in minutes at which Wake Time Event occurs WAKE HR 0 to 23 WAKE HOUR Wake time specifies ti
168. arts with a major time line Chart motor takes 7200 steps printing graph time lines and PV Counter decrements to 0 Graph stops printing PV prints forever or until the next transition from CHART RUN to CHART HOLD DR4500A Truline Circular Chart Recorder With or Without Control Product Manual Release M May 2013 Operation Chart Operation Remote chart operation The Remote Chart feature can be configured to activate on any one of six events Refer to Subsection 3 5 Table 3 5 or Subsection 4 4 Table 4 3 under Function prompt REMCHT to select an event When the Remote Chart feature is activated there are three chart modes as defined in Table 5 32 Table 5 32 Remote Chart Modes Mode Definition HOLD HOLD is the mode when you are changing the paper or when the chart has completed HOLD is indicated by the CHT HLD flashing in the lower display READY You enter the READY mode from the Hold mode by pressing the CHART key once When in the READY mode the lower display will flash REM CHT READY is the armed mode where the remote events are allowed The chart is waiting to be activated by whatever event has been configured or by pressing CHART again It is not retriggerable RUN RUN is the mode where the chart has received its trigger The chart will remain in RUN until the chart is finished for non continue charts o until you press the CHART key When the CHART key is pres
169. ay 1 51404929 501 External Keypad Upgrade Kit not shown 1 NOTE 1 For Door 30754955 50X denotes that these parts are included in the miscellaneous hardware kit 30755980 001 For all other doors the parts are included with applicable door assembly NOTE2 For Heavy Duty doors only before 3 99 for knob type latch order kit 30756584 001 for latch with lock and key order kit 30756584 002 For Heavy Duty doors after 3 99 for knob type latch and or latch with lock and key order 51404673 501 NOTE 3 For instruments with the Door Keypad option order the correct door assembly and the External Keypad Upgrade kit Chart plate Figure 10 2 is an exploded view of the Chart Plate Assembly Table 10 2 15 a list of the associated part numbers T 21453 Figure 10 2 Chart plate assembly 244 DR4500A Truline Circular Chart Recorder With or Without Control Product Manual Release M May 2013 Parts List May 2013 Exploded Views Table 10 2 Chart plate assembly parts Recommended tit Key Part Number Description Spare Parts per Quantity per Unit 10 100 1 30756304 501 Truline Pen Arm Assembly high speed 1 5 1 30756304 502 Truline Pen Arm Assembly abrasion resistant 2 30754957 501 Membrane Switch Key Pad 1 5 1 3 K 30756150 001 Chart Hub Kit 1 3 2 4 30756113 501 Chart Motor includes Chart Hub Kit 1 3 1 5 30757571 501 Display PCB includes key no 6 1 5 1 6 See above R
170. ble This keeps the noise signal on these wires from bypassing built in suppression Also do not bundle any low level signal wires with the power wires Refer to Table 2 10 for permissible wire bundling e Refer to document 51 52 05 01 for additional information concerning noise interference prevention 11 Insert the wired plug into J10 WARNING Input line voltage will be present on the instrument ground plane if safety ground is not attached personal injury and product damage could result Release M DR4500A Truline Circular Chart Recorder With or Without Control Product Manual 31 May 2013 Installation Input Wiring Procedures Required for CE Mark Conformity 14 AWG Braided Wire to AC supply ground Fuse Block on Main PC Board PLUG J10 P N51309355 tab CN y LL LL 120 Vac 240 Vac Fair Rite P N 0443164151 or equivalent Required for CE Mark Conformity Kit supplied Part No 51197612 502 contains two ferrite filters More than one kit may be supplied Install inside of case See Figure 2 11 120 or 240 Vac 214108 Figure 2 12 Line Power Wiring 32 DR4500A Truline Circular Chart Recorder With or Without Control Product Manual Release M May 2013 Installation Input Wiring Procedures Thermocouple RTD Radiamatic mV or 0 5 Vdc inputs You can wire input 1 2 3 or 4 for thermocouple RTD Radiamatic mV or 0 5 Vdc actuations The polarity for inputs 1 2 3 and 4 is
171. ces e trn ER Ene eee 220 3 Position Step control ae no ree p gerat to ag odo 220 Equipment Ne6Cded 2 ELE 220 COnnecliONnS C iaa 220 Auto mode vs manual mode itera Pos pa e eati iade do deed steeds 220 Rules for auto mode vs manual 220 Ip Wehr M 220 PROCCGUIC MERER SERERE TON A ERECTUS T 220 8 4 Auxiliary Output Calibration sss eene nnn nnn nnne 223 al ate bae TELE 223 Equipment needed esee eere Heec ce eed ete idc e 223 MM x M 223 Procedure dee E rur MILD Co LU S ated uate Meta 224 DR4500A Truline Circular Chart Recorder With or Without Control Product Manual xiii May 2013 9 Troubleshooting ServiG8 oce ete tee tee 225 9 1 225 altere o EP P NRI ED ED UTR EL EEAT 225 What s in this sectlorn cei edite dre desee e Heredia des dne eden Ede d dece Hae dene PE idee dede de 225 TYPES Of Problems s I II 225 Installation related problems 1 ite tee ipte e rd De neq egi be Bode ened deat 226 App
172. ci ce 278 MONTAGE 2 2 ade 278 0 35 612126056 ere eee Rene 279 c iod ISP 279 KAY RIOOLOSUEEFEET 279 LAITTEEN ASENNUS t tec eee eer e eee eee er eoe eR eate eoe 279 0 4 FR2L6056 ee RE aa 280 CARACTERISTIQUES DE L EQUIPEMENT 280 CONDITIONS AMBIANTES ee ero ere ee oa ean cree oe de ech ae kee eR Tue Eee ete 280 INSTALLATION DE VEQUIPEMENT aer renoier ne e aa aa aad i 280 D 5 E ES T hee ete donent 281 281 UMGEBUNGSBEDINGUNGEN 281 ANBRINGUNG DER AUSRUSTUNGEN 281 Release M DR4500A Truline Circular Chart Recorder With or Without Control Product Manual 2013 D6 6621260562 ton he dst hui tud Stm senis Kaos LO Ser rude 282 Dil JT721 6056 5 nid as tbi sc v odi dO eo aed 283 ALIMENTAZIONE APPARECCHIATURA EE nasse san nan 283 CONDIZIONA MBIEN TA
173. click of the relays One relay are go to step 7 should click when the output is adjusted higher and the other should click when the output is adjusted lower than the present value Observe OUT 1 and 2 indicators on the front display 7 Check the control relay jumper position Refer to Section 3 Configuration 8 Replace the control output printed Refer to the instructions included with the circuit board replacement part 9 Recalibrate the position proportional Refer to Section 8 Output Calibration output Release M May 2013 DR4500A Truline Circular Chart Recorder With or Without Control Product Manual 239 Troubleshooting Service Troubleshooting Procedures 240 Table 9 14 Procedure 9 Troubleshooting relay output failure symptoms Step What to do How to do it or where to find the data 1 Be sure the recorder is configured for Refer to Section 3 Configuration Make sure relay output OUT ALG selection TIME 2 Be sure all the recorder and control Refer to Section 3 Configuration related data is correct Check the Tuning Algorithm and Control data 3 Check that the applicable output relay Put the recorder into manual mode and adjust the actuates properly If it does go to step 4 output manually to raise or lower the PV around the setpoint Listen for the click of the relay as the PV moves in either direction Observe OUT 1 or 2 indicator on the front display 4 Check the control
174. corder With or Without Control Product Manual Release M May 2013 Configuration Configuration Prompts Set Up Group Function Prompts AUX OUT COMM If key number is DR45AR see Appendix A for Fo calculation prompts LOCKOUT Password ADJUST CALIB For field calibration see Calibration section of manual STATUS Displayed on test failure only Release M DR4500A Truline Circular Chart Recorder With or Without Control Product Manual 59 May 2013 Configuration How To Get Started 3 3 How To Get Started Read the configuration tips Read Subsection 3 4 Configuration Tips which will help you to easily and quickly configure your recorder Read configuration procedure Read Subsection 3 5 Configuration Procedure which tells you how to access the Set Up groups and the function parameters within each of these groups that are shown in the Prompt Hierarchy in Figure 3 1 Set Up groups The Set Up groups and function parameters are listed in the order of their appearance The list includes the name of the prompt the range of setting or selections available and the factory setting It allows you to quickly find a parameter and obtain the available range or selection you require Parameter explanations or definitions If you need a detailed explanation of any prompt listed refer to Section 4 Configuration Parameter Definitions This section lists the set up and function prompts the selections or range
175. ction prompt PWR OUT selection LAST or FAILSAFE Refer to Subsection 4 8 Table 4 7 for definition of each selection 162 DR4500A Truline Circular Chart Recorder With or Without Control Product Manual Release M May 2013 Operation Digital Input Option Remote Switching 5 12 Digital Input Option Remote Switching Introduction The digital input option detects the state of external contacts wired to it On contact closure the controller responds according to how each digital input is configured Make your selection under set up group CONTROL1 or CONTROL2 function group prompt REM SW see Subsection 3 12 Table 3 9 or Subsection 4 8 Table 4 7 Action on contact closure Table 5 25 lists the configuration prompt selections the Action on Contact Closure and the display indication for each selection available REM SW Selections Table 5 25 Digital Input Option Action on Contact Closure Display Indication Action on Contact Closure None None No Digital Input selection To MAN MAN blinks Puts the controller into manual mode contact open returns the controller to former mode unless AUTO MAN key is pressed while digital input is active To LSP To 2SP RSP blinks RSP blinks Puts the controller into local setpoint 1 switches out of remote When contact opens the controller returns to former operation unless the FUNC key is pressed while digital
176. curacy Temp Stability Actuations gt E m n Degrees Error Per 1 F c t F Degree AT Linear Milliamperes dc 4 to 20 0 10 0 004 Millivolts dc 0 to 10 0 05 0 004 10 to 50 0 05 96 0 004 Volts dc 1 to 5 can be 0 05 0 004 calibrated 0 to 5 0 to 10 0 10 96 0 004 Relative Humidity Platinum 100 ohm Wet Dry Bulb Wet Dry Input 130 to 392 90 to 200 0 30 0 03 0 03 Measured Dry Bulb Range Reference Temp Stability RH n n Accuracy 53 F to 104 F E 12 to 40 0 to lt 20 103 to 212 75 to 100 2 96 RH 0 11 RH F 20 to 100 35 to 40 2to4 2 RH 0 11 RH F gt 40 to 100 gt 4 to 38 1 RH 0 06 RH F 100 to 212 38 to 100 1 RH 0 03 96 RH F Condition Specifications Case Molded foamed Noryl with gasketed door A UL and FM approved NEMAAX door is also available Chart 12 inch 304 8 mm diameter chart Plain thermal sensitive paper Wiring Connections Color Terminals inside the case Case Black Door standard Caribbean Blue Black or Gray Approval Bodies U L Approval depending on model CSA Approval Consult Model Selection Guide for information FM approved for Class Div 2 Groups A B C D areas depending on model Weight 13 2 Ibs 6 kg Mounting Panel 2 inch pipe or surface mounted Some adapter kits available for existing panel cutouts OPTIONS Alarm Output Two four or six relays available
177. d 248 DR4500A Truline Circular Chart Recorder With or Without Control Product Manual Release M May 2013 Parts List Miscellaneous Hardware Kit Contents 10 3 Miscellaneous Hardware Kit Contents Kit contents Table 10 5 lists the kit contents of miscellaneous hardware kit part number 30755980 TAB Table 10 5 Miscellaneous hardware kit Part Description Quantity Tab 001 Tab 002 Tab 003 Tab 004 Tab 005 Tab 006 Pen lifter retainer Screw 10 32 3 4 Ig O ring Spring tension NIAJ A Hinge pin Retaining ring Pen arm 1 classic Pen arm 2 classic Latch without lock Latch pin Latch gasket Card guide 4 position connector 3 position connector 3 position connector CE Mark 2 position connector NO NMI NM NM Fuse 0 5 A 250 V 20 Batteries 3 0 V Lithium Button Cell Key for latch or lock Key for Door Keyed latch Noise Suppression Kit 120VAC 51404594 501 Noise Suppression Kit 220VAC 51404594 502 Release M May 2013 DR4500A Truline Circular Chart Recorder With or Without Control Product Manual 249 Parts List Internal Cabling Data 10 4 Internal Cabling Data View of internal cabling Figure 10 5 is a view of the internal cabling for the DR4500A Truline Recorder Optical Pen stylus sensor 9 position keyboard cable asse
178. d no clean air purge is used 5 Never let the pen tip ride on the chart plate when the paper is not present Use the pen lifter to raise the arm when changing the paper 6 Keep the door closed while recording 7 Always insert the pen arm tip into the shipping sponge when storing or shipping the recorder 8 Be sure that the chart paper lays flat against the chart plate Any ripple in the paper will cause light pen printing 9 Be sure the chart hub assembly is pushed onto the motor shaft so that it is flush with the chart plate Release M DR4500A Truline Circular Chart Recorder With or Without Control Product Manual 167 May 2013 Operation Routine Maintenance 5 16 Routine Maintenance Introduction The DR4500A recorder does not require any periodic maintenance as such But you will have to clean the pen tip and replace the chart and optional chart lamp as required WARNING Do not lubricate the plastic gears on the chart and pen motors Cleaning the pen tip Follow the procedure in Table 5 29 to clean the pen tip A CAUTION Cleaning frequency varies with the recording application environment Table 5 29 Cleaning the Pen Tip Step Action Open the recorder door Pull the pen lifter up in order to raise the pen from the chart Carefully clean the pen tip with a cotton swab that has been dipped in alcohol Push the pen lifter down to lower the pen oa AJOIN Close
179. der s configuration and calibration prompts You must know the PASSWORD in order to change the Lockout configuration Refer to Appendix B for more information on security lockout n ATTENTION Configuration can also be locked using S1 switch on the main printed circuit board Refer to Subsection 2 9 Lockout Switch Configuration This feature also includes the special screw and plate that provide for the lead seal capability for sealing the chart plate Set this group last Because this group contains functions that have to do with security and lockout we recommend that you configure this group last after all the other configuration data has been loaded Lockout group prompts Table 4 17 lists all the function prompts in the Lockout set up group and their definitions Table 4 17 Lockout Group Definitions Lower Display Upper Display Parameter Definition Prompt Range of Setting or Selection PASSWORD Select up to four alphanumeric PASSWORD this selection determines the password characters that will be required to gain access to the lockout prompt e is the factory default password LOCKOUT LOCKOUT applies to one of the functional groups Configuration Calibration Tuning Adaptive Tune DO NOT CONFIGURE UNTIL ALL CONFIGURATION IS COMPLETE Ifthe correct password was entered you can call up this prompt NONE No Lockout all groups read write CALIB CALIB All are available for re
180. e Upper Display a value Lower Display SPAN VAL V Until the desired 100 20 mA output is read on the milliammeter 4 Exit the Calibration Mode FUNC The recorder stores the span value LOWR To exit the calibration mode DISP or SET UP n ATTENTION The calibration for Auxiliary Outputs 2 and 3 follows the procedure for calibrating the current proportional output refer to Subsection 8 2 224 DR4500A Truline Circular Chart Recorder With or Without Control Product Manual Release M May 2013 9 Troubleshooting Service 9 1 Overview j SHOCK HAZARD WARNING Disregard of these instructions may cause injury or death TROUBLESHOOTING MAY REQUIRE ACCESS TO HAZARDOUS LIVE CIRCUITS AND SHOULD ONLY BE PERFORMED BY QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL MORE THAN ONE SWITCH MAY BE REQUIRED TO DE ENERGIZE UNIT BEFORE SERVICING Introduction This section explains how to troubleshoot the DR4500A recorder using self diagnostic test results and error messages as well as some visual failure symptoms Using an optimum replacement unit repair philosophy trouble is traced to a printed circuit board PCB hardware assembly level rather than to an individual PCB hardware assembly component While troubleshooting is straightforward we recommend that only trained service technicians repair the recorder What s in this section The following topics are covered in this section Topic See P
181. e MINUTE PPH must use HOUR SECOND SECOND EU Engineering Units per second MINUTE MINUTE EU per minute HOUR HOUR EU per hour DAY DAY EU per day M DAY M DAY Millions of Units per day multiplier 106 x input SCALER 1 TOTALIZER SCALE FACTOR this selection allows 10 you to select a scale factor that is a Multiplier for the 100 totalizer display It affects only the display 1000 10000 The desired factor is applied to the calculated value 100000 to extend the maximum flow range that can be 1E6 displayed e Scaler selection does not affect the totalization value printed on the chart EXAMPLE e 1E6 equals 1 times 106 1 000 000 RSETABLE NO LOCAL LOCAL TOTALIZER RESET Allows the totalizer value to be reset via the display keypad EXT SW1 EXTERNAL SWITCH 1 Allows the totalizer to be set to zero upon switch 1 closure Digital Input 1 EXT SW2 EXTERNAL SWITCH 2 Allows the totalizer to be set to zero upon switch 2 closure Digital Input 2 TIME WAKE TIME Resets the totalizer when the value configured for the Wake Time Event is reached See WAKE MIN WAKE HR WAKE DAY WAKE MON in the Time Set Up group INHIBIT The totalizer will be inhibited while the configured action is true NONE S1 OPEN External SW1 open inhibits totalizer 1 CLOSE External SW1 closed inhibits totalizer 2 OPEN External SW2 open inhibits totalizer S2 CLOSE External SW2 closed inhibits totalizer Repeat the configurati
182. e RV input 2 x ratio bias CNFG ERR Configuration data is in error CAL1 ERR Working CAL TEST failure Control Output 1 Input 1 Input 2 CAL2 ERR Working CAL TEST failure Control Output 2 Input 3 Input 4 BATT LOW Battery failure Release M DR4500A Truline Circular Chart Recorder With or Without Control Product Manual 145 May 2013 Operation Monitoring Your Recorder Alarm and tuning messages Alarms 3 through 6 and Accutune II for Control Loops 1 and 2 are indicated in the lower display In the case of more than one simultaneous diagnostic or alarm message each message will be shown in succession Table 5 7 Alarm and tuning messages Prompt Description ALARM 3 Indicates an alarm 3 action ALARM 4 Indicates an alarm 4 action ALARM 5 Indicates an alarm 5 action ALARM 6 Indicates an alarm 6 action TUNING 1 Indicates Accutune II in progress for Control Loop 1 TUNING 2 Indicates Accutune II in progress for Control Loop 2 n ATTENTION An active alarm will always provide an indication on the display but may not control its associated relay that is a higher priority function such as a control loop or timer may have control of the relay 146 DR4500A Truline Circular Chart Recorder With or Without Control Product Manual Release M May 2013 Operation Operator Functions 5 4 Operator Functions Actions an operator can initiate An operator can do the following Note that som
183. e 2 4 Figure 2 5 Figure 2 6 Figure 2 7 Figure 2 8 Figure 2 9 Figure 2 10 Figure 2 11 Figure 2 12 Figure 2 13 Figure 2 14 Figure 2 15 Figure 2 16 Figure 2 17 Figure 2 18 Figure 2 19 Figure 2 20 Figure 2 21 Figure 2 22 Figure 2 23 Figure 3 1 Figure 5 1 Figure 5 2 Figure 6 1 Figure 7 1 Figure 7 2 Figure 7 3 Figure 7 4 Figure 7 5 Figure 7 6 Figure 7 7 Figure 7 8 Figure 7 9 Figure 8 1 Figure 8 2 Figures Operator Interface rines eot OU IBI OI er etui Ur SS 3 Set Up Tasks ueste d ne T ROTER T CEU REV HR REOR ERG EE LER E Ee RR E e 5 Model Number Interpretation see tete terree terae EE r eaS d ee 13 DR4500A Recorder Hardware Components Versus Table Selections esses 15 Overall Dimensions ne I e or pee o e ode e orn e Ec ee p e ELI EE ee 16 How to Remove Knockouts 17 Mounting Flush in a New Panel 18 Mounting in a Panel Using Universal Filler 20 Mounting in a Panel using Kent Model 105M nennen 21 Panel Mounting Recorder with NEMAAX Doot ccccescceseeeseeesecseeeseeeneeeneeseeeseeeaeeeeeeeeeseeneenseeeeeeaeeenes 23 Pipe Mounting Brackets due metuis er REC e e e ee OH E Ue RS S 24 Mounting Flush on a Surface of Panel or Wall sess 26 Ferrite Filter Loca
184. e Circular Chart Recorder With or Without Control Product Manual 41 Installation Output Wiring Procedures Control output 1 2 PCB w2 Relay No 1 t was W2 N O contact W3 contact Control So Helay No 2 output cl WA N O contact 1 PCB Es W5 W5 N C contact Control iW6 Position output W7 Proportional 2 PCB Output Motor s feedback slidewire 100 CLOSED to 1000 Not required for Three Position an 68 Step Control 0047 E E Capacitor _ _ Cable Shield DN OPEN CW y oq 0 N H d2H P CLOSED CCW Motor power supply fona 0 H 21415 Ferrite Filter Fair Rite P N 0443164151 or equivalent Required for CE Mark Conformity Kit Part No 51197612 502 contains two ferrite filters Part No 51197612 508 contains 8 ferrite filters Install inside of case See Figure 2 11 Capacitor Kit 51197755 001 Install capacitors as shown in figure 2n 0047 UF E Capacitor Figure 2 17 Position Proportional Control Output or Three Position Step Wiring 42 DR4500A Truline Circular Chart Recorder With or Without Control Product Manual Release M May 2013 Installation Output Wiring Procedures Relay control output wiring You can wire control output 1 or 2 for relay output including Time proportional and 3 position step applications The prerequisites are Model Number Table 2 10 40 60 11 44 66 Refer to Figure 2 18
185. e actions depend upon how the recorder was configured and the features supplied on your Change the Control Mode Auto Man Adjust the Output Manually Change the Setpoint Switch between Setpoints Run or Disable a Setpoint Ramp Run or Disable a Setpoint Program Switch between Two Sets of PID Values Run or Disable Control Loop Tuning Check the Alarm Setpoints Reset the Totalizer Run a Key Test particular recorder model Refer to the following pages for functions and procedures CHN indicator Remember for recorders with two controllers both enabled remember that any controller related values displayed including control mode correspond with the lighted CHN indicator 1 means that the values apply for Controller 1 and 2 means that the values apply for Controller 2 Sequentially press the LOWR DISP key to scroll through the displays and light the appropriate CHN indicator for controller related values Release M May 2013 DR4500A Truline Circular Chart Recorder With or Without Control Product Manual 147 Operation Operating Modes 5 5 Operating Modes Available modes The recorder can operate in any of three basic modes e Manual e Automatic with Local Setpoint e Automatic with Remote Setpoint Manual and Automatic with Local setpoint are standard features and Automatic with Remote Setpoint is optional Mode definitions Table 5 8 Operating Mode Definitions Operating Mode Definitio
186. e lines and engineering units of scale eliminate the need to maintain an inventory of a variety of preprinted charts The Truline recorder uses a dot fill technique from a microprocessor algorithm to produce a continuous analog trace of a process variable Release M DR4500A Truline Circular Chart Recorder With or Without Control Product Manual 1 May 2013 Overview Introduction Digital controller The DR4500A recorder controller includes an integral microprocessor based single or dual loop PID controller with optional setpoint program variety of output types including a duplex variation for heat cool applications lets you select the output that is right for your final control element Accutune II lets you automatically tune your loops You can configure the control action as On Off PID A PID B PD with manual reset or Three Position Step English language prompts guide you through the entry of all the controller s configurable parameters Construction The DR4500A recorder is housed in a molded case which can be panel or surface mounted A glass or acrylic windowed door A UL and FM approved NEMA4X door is also available protects the internal components while allowing easy access to the chart and operator interface An optional external keypad that allows operator selections without opening the door is available Circuitry is partitioned on printed circuit boards for ease of service Power input and output wiring connect
187. ed circuit board 5 Run the alarm output wires through the desired knockout 6 For CE Mark conformity e install the ferrite filter as shown in Figure 2 11 e install the capacitors as shown in Figure 2 20 7 Strip insulation from the end of each wire 8 Loosen the screws in plug J5 terminals and position the plug as you would to plug it into J5 9 Insert the wires for the alarm devices into the appropriate screw clamps as shown Refer to Figure 2 20 Tighten the screws to secure the wires 10 Install the wired plug into J5 Release M DR4500A Truline Circular Chart Recorder With or Without Control Product Manual 47 May 2013 Installation Option Wiring Procedures Alarms 5 and 6 output wiring You can wire 5 and 6 Alarm outputs The prerequisites are e Model Number Model Table 2 X1 X4 X6 If control output is 4 20 mA then the relays on the control card are available for use as alarms on all models except DRA45AH AS AP models Refer to Figure 2 20 and follow the procedure in Table 2 20 to wire Alarm 5 and Alarm 6 outputs Table 2 20 Alarm 5 and Alarm 6 Output Wiring Step Action 1 Open the recorder door Loosen the captive screw in the chart plate and swing the plate out 2 Locate connector J5 on the 4 20 mA control output printed circuit board to wire relays 5 and 6 Refer to Figure 2 20 for location 3 Remove the unwired plug from J5 4 Locate jumper position W2 W3 and
188. ee EMC Classification Method of EMC Assessment Declaration of Conformity This product is in conformity with the protection requirements of the following European Council Directives 73 23 EEC the Low Voltage Directive and 89 336 EEC the EMC Directive Conformity of this product with any other CE Mark Directive s shall not be assumed Class 1 Permanently connected Panel Surface Mounted Industrial Control Equipment with protective earthing grounding EN 61010 1 Panel Surface Mounted Equipment IP 54 ref IEC 529 Category 11 Energy consuming equipment supplied from the fixed installation Local level appliances and Industrial Control Equipment EN 61010 1 Pollution Degree 2 Normally non conductive pollution with occasional conductivity caused by condensation ref IEC 664 10 Group 1 Class A ESM Equipment EN 55011 emissions Industrial Equipment EN 50082 2 immunity Technical File TF Document 51197639 000 EC Alpha 0 00385 Q Q C Registered Trademark General Electric Co 1 Not all controller outputs are available on all models of the Truline Recorder Consult Model Selection Guide for information 2 Not all Input Actuations are available on all models of the Truline Recorder Consult Model Selection Guide for information 3 Includes reference junction calibration of 0 01 degrees using standard ice bath method of calibration Factory calibra
189. efinitions Pen Parameters Set Up Group 4 3 Pen Parameters Set Up Group Introduction The functions listed in this group deal with how to configure pen 1 pen 2 pen 3 or pen 4 The procedure for configuring each pen 15 the same The prompts shown in Table 4 2 show PEN 1 e Press the SET UP key until PEN 1 PEN 2 PEN 3 or PEN 4 appears in the display Pen 1 2 3 4 group prompts Table 4 2 lists all the function prompts in the Pen 1 2 3 4 set up groups and their definitions Table 4 2 Pen 1 2 3 or 4 Group Definitions Lower Display Upper Display Parameter Definition Prompt Range of Setting or Selection PENn ENABLE PEN RECORD This selection lets you enable or DISABL disable the pen channel record n 1 2 3 or 4 Remember the lower display prompt could read PEN2 PENG or PENnIN PEN INPUT What do you want the pen to record n21 2 3 or 4 INPUT 1 INPUT 1 records Input 1 INPUT 2 INPUT 2 records Input 2 INPUT 3 INPUT 3 records Input 3 INPUT 4 INPUT 4 records Input 4 RH RELATIVE HUMIDITY records in RH It initiates an external calculation for measuring relative humidity INPUT 1 IN TYP must be configured for 100 PT INPUT 2 IN TYP must be configured for 100 RH The RH prompt only appears when RELHUMID prompt in the OPTIONS group is configured as YES OUTPT1 OUTPUT 1 records Output 1 OUTPT2 OUTPUT 2 records Output 2 SETPT1 SETPOINT 1 records Setpoint 1 SET
190. el only requires that the Motor Time be entered as shown in the calibration procedure FULL CALIBRATION IS NOT REQUIRED Equipment needed None Connections Apply power and allow the recorder to warm up 15 minutes before you calibrate Leave all field wiring connected to the plugs in connectors J2 and J5 on the appropriate control output printed circuit board Auto mode vs manual mode There are two ways in which to calibrate Position Proportional control AUTO mode or MANUAL mode Rules for auto mode vs manual mode The auto mode selection must be done at least once before the manual mode will operate properly Failure to use the auto mode procedure will prevent the recorder from going into automatic control mode Displayed values During the auto mode calibration procedure the values being displayed are used only to indicate if the motor is still traveling To view the actual calibration value use the manual mode after the auto mode is completed These values can be changed for purposes of tweaking the calibration Procedure The procedure for calibrating the position proportional output and 3 Position Step control output is listed in Table 8 3 e Make sure LOCKOUT in the Set Up group is set to NONE See Section 3 Configuration Also CONTROL 1 2 must be enabled in the Control Set Up group For Three Position Step Control Output models do steps 1 and 2 only Make sure CONT ALG 3P STEP in the Contro
191. ell Process Solutions 1860 West Rose Garden Lane 44 45 25 30 Rev M Phoenix Arizona 85027 May 2013 www honeywellprocess com 2013 Honeywell International Inc
192. emote setpoint or second local setpoint is not configured as a setpoint source or if you attempt to change the setpoint while a setpoint ramp is enabled 2 Change the Local Aor V The REMOTE setpoint cannot be changed at the setpoint value keyboard Setpoint selection indication Table 5 14 shows how the indicators react and what the displays show for each type of setpoint Table 5 14 Setpoint Selection Indication Using Local Setpoint Using Remote Setpoint Using 2 Local Setpoint RSP Indicator OFF ON Note 1 ON Note 2 Note 3 Upper Display PV PV PV Lower Display SP and the Local Setpoint RSP and Remote Setpoint 2SP and the 2nd Local Source Value Setpoint Value To Change Press or V Cannot change the value at Press or V Setpoint Value the keyboard Note I RSP blinks when RSP is reached using Digital Input Note 2 RSP solid for 2nd Setpoint Note 3 RSP blinks for 2nd setpoint activated by Digital Switch Release M DR4500A Truline Circular Chart Recorder With or Without Control Product Manual 151 May 2013 Operation Single Setpoint Ramp 5 7 Single Setpoint Ramp Configuring the setpoint ramp You can configure a single setpoint ramp to occur between the current local setpoint and a final local setpoint over a time interval of from 1 to 255 minutes You can RUN or HOLD the ramp at any time Procedure Table 5 15 lists the procedure for c
193. en and the chart plate swung out tag and disconnect field wiring from the plug in connector J2 on the auxiliary output PCB see Figure 8 2 Observing polarity connect a milliammeter s leads to the plug for connector J2 Close the chart plate apply power and allow the recorder to warm up 15 minutes before you calibrate Control output 1 PCB ph LA Control output 2 Auxiliary output PCB L Q Deot mAn c Milliammeter RR D Plug J2 auxiliary output 22842 Figure 8 2 Test Equipment Connections for Calibrating Auxiliary Output Release M DR4500A Truline Circular Chart Recorder With or Without Control Product Manual 223 May 2013 Output Calibration Auxiliary Output Calibration Procedure The procedure for calibrating the Auxiliary Output is listed in Table 8 5 Make sure LOCKOUT in the Set Up group is set to NONE See Section 3 Configuration Also AUX OUT must NOT be disabled in the Auxiliary Output group Table 8 5 Auxiliary Output Calibration Procedure Step Operation Press Action Result 1 Enter Calibration Mode SET Until you see UP Upper Display CALIB Lower Display AUX OUT 2 Calibrate 0 FUNC You will see Upper Display a value Lower Display ZERO VAL Aor V Until the desired O 96 4 mA output is read on the milliammeter 3 Calibrate 100 96 FUNC Stores the 0 value and you will se
194. en input 2 operates as a remote setpoint prompt REMOTE e This ratio value can be applied to the remote setpoint It establishes the correct relationship between the remote setpoint and the input 2 signal applied according to the formula below under Bias e Input 2 must be enabled For recorders with two controllers use input 3 for controller 1 and input 4 for controller 2 DR4500A Truline Circular Chart Recorder With or Without Control Product Manual Release M May 2013 Configuration Parameter Definitions Control Parameters Set Up Group Lower Display Prompt Upper Display Range of Setting or Selection Parameter Definition BIAS 9999 to 9999 engineering units BIAS used when input 2 operates as a remote setpoint prompt REMOTE e Bias together with ratio establishes the correct relationship between the remote setpoint and the input 2 signal applied according to the formula REMOTE SETPOINT IN2 VALUE RATIO BIAS NOTE IN2 VALUE Actual engineering units e All values must be within configured setpoint high and low limits e Input 2 must be enabled SP TRACK SETPOINT TRACKING the local setpoint can be configured to track the remote setpoint as listed below NONE NO TRACKING if local setpoint tracking is not configured the LSP will not be altered when transfer from RSP to LSP is made RSP LSP LOCAL SETPOINT TRACKS RSP REMOTE SET
195. en the recorder door Loosen the captive screw in the chart plate and swing the plate out 2 Locate connector J2 on the printed circuit board for input 1 refer to Figure 2 15 3 Remove the unwired plug from J2 and replace it with the modified 4 screw plug from the bag of accessories supplied with the recorder 4 Run the input wires through the desired knockout DO NOT bundle them with the power wires 5 For CE Mark conformity e Install the ferrite filter as shown in Figure 2 11 e Install the 01 uF capacitor and the 0047 uF capacitor as shown in Figure 2 15 6 Strip insulation from the end of each wire 7 Loosen the screws in plug J2 terminals and position the plug as you would to plug it into J2 8 Using the 30755232 002 100K ohm voltage divider connector kit supplied in the bag of accessories insert the wires into the appropriate screw clamps Tighten the screws to secure the wires 9 Install the wired plug into J2 Since J2 has only three receptacles one of the modified plug connectors is designed to slide outside J2 when the plug is installed 10 Locate jumper position W3 and make sure the jumper is in the proper position for your input type See Figure 2 15 for the location 11 Locate jumper position MA W1 and make sure the jumper is in the W1 position See Figure 2 15 for the location 12 Repeat steps 2 through 11 for input 2 3 and 4 printed circuit boards as applicable Release M D
196. ep Action 1 Connect the copper wire to the calibration source see Figure 7 6 2 Connect the other end of the copper wire to the clamp type terminals in the plug for the applicable input connector J2 3 Reinstall the plug into the input connector J2 on the applicable circuit board for input 1 input 2 input 3 or input 4 Decade box RTD Plug J2 Be sure W1 MA Be sure W3 jumper jumper is in position is in position RTD W1 on the input board on the input board Figure 7 6 Calibration Set Up Diagram for RTD Inputs 208 DR4500A Truline Circular Chart Recorder With or Without Control Product Manual Release M May 2013 Input Calibration Calibration Set Up and Wiring for PV Inputs Radiamatic millivolts and volts inputs except 0 10 Volts Refer to Figure 7 7 and wire the recorder according to the procedure given in Table 7 10 Table 7 10 Set Up Wiring Procedure for Radiamatic Millivolts and Volts Inputs except 0 10 Volts Step Action 1 Connect the copper wire to the calibration source see Figure 7 7 2 Connect the other end of the copper wire to the clamp type terminals in the plug for the applicable input connector J2 3 Reinstall the plug into the input connector J2 on the applicable circuit board for input 1 input 2 input 3 or input 4 Calibration source L Copper wires 0 21448 Oj T C 0 E o O Sm Plug J2
197. equirements Ik p Release M DR4500A Truline Circular Chart Recorder With or Without Control Product Manual May 2013 Contents OE VN Laas epe pa pudet mde Db oto cae ied te m PLAQUE mA Depas 1 1 1 HE 1 iei p 1 CE Conformity sire 1 Microprocessor controlled recording and printing 1 p enr Reno 2 ere uie T 2 12 Operator Iriterface ioc eerte etri lare qae ebd eua 3 DLP 3 Key T bctiongs sun ioi eot d Pres iuto eo de E ege EL DER N TET 4 1 3 Setup Tasks eie ge Emtec d exea ud ade pude 5 Major set p tasksi o tie Pec e onu e a decade be feel er dfe coa CE Ete cues et 5 aisi ente 7 2 1 MI eT 7 Introd ction 7 What s inthis Sectlon sciet cop itti eee rrr be Rec pese a alone t ET dae tp os exceder kp iapa tiaan 7 Pre installatioriTifOrmation de Ee etu eei be eii 7 CE Conformity special conditions inneren nennen 7 Operating l
198. er The recycle number allows the program to recycle a specified number of times from beginning to end e Range 0 to 99 Guaranteed soak A SOAK DEV soak deviation parameter is provided If its value is not zero then soaking will be frozen for each segment until the difference plus or minus between PV and SP is less than or equal to the value of SOAK DEV There are no guaranteed soaks whenever SOAKDEV 0 In this case soak segments start timing soak duration as soon as the soak setpoint is first reached regardless of where the process variable remains relative to the soak setpoint during the duration of the segment The decimal location corresponds to input 1 decimal selection Profile number The profile number specifies which of up to six profiles will run Up to 6 profiles can be configured out of any even number of consecutive segments from the 36 segments configured Program state The program state selection determines the program state after completion The selections are DISABL program is disabled HOLD program on hold Recovery If Recovery is enabled the setpoint program will continue from where it left off after the last power down Program End State This determines the status of the recorder upon completion of the profile The selections are LAST SP hold at the last setpoint in the program e FSAFE Manual mode Failsafe Output 174 DR4500A Truline Circular Chart Recorder With or Without Con
199. er Up Diagnostic Tests Prompt on Lower Display Condition RAM TEST Check RAM CONFTEST configuration checksum Check nonvolatile memory CAL TEST working calibration Check calibration BATTERY Check the battery Test failures If control is enabled and one or more of these tests fail the recorder will go to the Failsafe Manual Mode and FAILSAFE will flash in the lower display If control is not configured the self test failures will be displayed periodically as other messages are presently displayed ERR CAL1 ERR CAL2 ERR or BATT LOW Troubleshooting Refer to DEVICE STATUS in Section 9 Troubleshooting Service to identify and correct the problem Release M DR4500A Truline Circular Chart Recorder With or Without Control Product Manual 137 May 2013 Operation Start up Check the displays and keys Use the procedure in Table 5 2 to run the display and key test Table 5 2 Procedure for Testing the Displays and Keys Press Result SET The recorder runs a display test All the displays will light for 8 UP seconds then you will see and hold in then press Upper Display keys FUNC Lower Display try all at the same time Press each key to see if it When the key is pressed the lower display indicates the name of the works key pressed Key Pressed Lower Display SET UP SET UP LOWR DISP LWR DISP MAN AUTO AUTO MAN RESET RESET CHART CHART A INCRMENT v
200. ermocouple Inputs Using an Ice 205 Calibration Set Up Diagram for Thermocouple Inputs Using a Compensated Calibrator Method 206 Calibration Set Up Diagram for Thermocouple Inputs using the Ambient Temperature Method 207 Calibration Set Up Diagram for RTD Inputs 2 0 0 ce sees enne nennen 208 Calibration Set Up Diagram for Radiamatic Millivolts and Volts Inputs except 0 10 Volts 209 Calibration Set Up Diagram for 0 10 Volt Inputs sss 210 Calibration Set Up Diagram for 4 20 mA 211 Test Equipment Connections for Calibrating Current Proportional Output esses 218 Test Equipment Connections for Calibrating Auxiliary Output sss 223 Figure 0 1 Doorassembly i ae etie ain ipae t iet eet 243 Figure 10 2 Chart plate nnne nennen trennen rre n nre 244 Figure 10 3 Basic recorder components without options sess 245 Figure 10 4 Recorder components associated with options essere 247 Figure 10 5 Internal cabling for DR4500A Truline recorder eese nennen 250 Figure 10 6 Internal diagram for DR4500A Truline recorder options only sees 251 Figure A I are gen teet appro edere 253 Figure 2 DR45AR with two to
201. ervice Self Diagnostics Error message prompts The messages listed in Table 9 4 may appear during the power up test or status test or they may blink in the lower display as the result of ongoing background tests that verify data and memory integrity Simultaneous error messages will be displayed in rotation Table 9 4 lists the error message the test group that prompted the message the reason for the failure and how to correct the problem Table 9 4 Error message prompts Lower Display Indication Test Group Reason for Failure How to Correct the Problem FAILSAFE Note 1 Status or Background This error message shows whenever the recorder goes into a failsafe mode of operation This will happen if control is enabled and power up test fails a specific background test fails 23 Run through the Device Status check page 230 to determine the reason for the failsafe indication 24 Identify the other failure message in the display and correct the problem according to the recommendations given in this table for that particular error message RAM TEST Note 1 Power up RAM failure 25 Cycle power 26 Check Device Status page 230 to see if error clears 277 If error doesn t clear replace the main printed circuit board CONFTEST Note 1 Power up Configuration data is in error 28 Check all the configuration prompts for accuracy
202. ess for each pen you want to set up e Press the SET UP key until PEN 2 PEN 3 or PEN 4 appears in the display Function prompts Table 3 4 lists all the function prompts in the PEN Set Up groups Table 3 4 Pen 1 2 3 4 Group Function Prompts Function Prompt Function Name Selections or Range of Setting Factory Lower Display Upper Display Setting PEN 1 Pen Record ENABLE ENABLE or PEN 2 PEN 3 DISABL PEN 4 PEN1IN Pen Input INPUT1 RH SETPT2 INPUT 1 or PEN2IN INPUT2 OUTPT1 DGTL1 PENSIN PENAIN INPUT3 OUTPT2 DGTL2 INPUTA SETPT1 PV1 CHART1HI Chart High Range Value 999 0 to 9999 302 0 or CHART2HI CHART3HI CHARTAHI CHART1LO Chart Low Range Value 999 0 to 9999 292 0 or CHART2LO CHART3LO CHART4LO PEN1ON Pen Chart Position for ON 0 to 100 96 91 0 or PEN2ON Event PEN3ON PEN4ON PEN1OFF Pen Chart Position for OFF 0 to 100 96 93 0 or PEN2OFF Event PEN3OFF PENAOFF MAJORDIV Major Chart Divisions 2to 10 10 MINORDIV Minor Chart Division 2 to 10 10 RNG1TAG Range 1 Tag Name 0 to 9 RNG 1 AtoZ T blank Repeat this procedure for PEN 2 PEN 3 and PEN 4 66 DR4500A Truline Circular Chart Recorder With or Without Control Product Manual Release M May 2013 Configuration Chart Set Up Group 3 8 Chart Set Up Group Introduction The functions listed in this group deal with the parameters that must be set to assure proper chart function CAUTION Before m
203. esume e Pressing V while pressing LOWR DISP will scroll backwards For recorders with two controllers both enabled remember that any controller related values displayed correspond with the lighted CHN indicator 1 means that the values apply for Controller 1 and 2 means that the values apply for Controller 2 Table 5 5 Lower Display Key Parameter Prompts Prompt Description OUT Output Value in Percent 96 Note that the output can only be adjusted through the raise lower keys when the controller in manual mode Estimated motor position for 3 Position Step Control SP Local Setpoint 1 Also current setpoint of SP Ramp or SP Ramp Soak Program SPN Current setpoint for setpoint rate applications 2SP Local Setpoint 2 where remote setpoint does not apply RSP Remote Setpoint when configured 1IN Value of Channel 1 input if Loop1 is a derived PV 2IN Value of Channel 2 input when available 3IN Value of Channel 3 input when available 4IN Value of Channel 4 input when available DEV PV deviation from setpoint 4999 9 maximum EU Engineering units that PV represents when available RH RH value in percent 96 when available PIDSETx Tuning Parameter Set 10 2 RAMP The time minutes remaining in the setpoint ramp RA The time minutes remaining in the SP Ramp segment SK The time minutes remaining in the SP Soak segment RECYC The number
204. etpoint over a time interval SP RAMP Setpoint Rate The Setpoint Ramp Set Up group also contains the function parameters that let you configure a specific ramp rate up and ramp rate down SP RATE These rates are used when the local setpoint is manually changed Setpoint Program Also included under this group are prompts for configuring a Setpoint program SP PROG The prompts and instructions for Setpoint programming are presented in the Section 6 Setpoint Ramp Soak Programming and Operation Function prompts Table 3 11 lists all the function prompts in the SP RAMP 1 or SP RAMP 2 Set Up group Configure each ramp separately When you enable the ramp type SP RAMP SP RATE SP PROG the other two types are hidden from the display Table 3 11 SP Ramp 1 or 2 Group Function Prompts Function Prompt Function Name Selections or Range of Setting Factory Lower Display Upper Display Setting SP RAMP Single Setpoint Ramp DISABL DISABL Selection ENABLE TIME MIN Single Setpoint Ramp Time 0 to 255 minutes 0 FINAL SP Single Setpoint Ramp Final Enter a value within the setpoint limits 100 0 Setpoint SP RATE Setpoint Rate DISABL DISABL ENABLE EU HR UP Rate up value SP Rate 0 to 9999 0 enabled in units per hour EU HR DN Rate down value SP Rate 0 to 9999 0 enabled in units per hour SP PROG Setpoint Programming DISABL DISABL Refer to Section 6 ENABLE Only one of these can be enabled at a time
205. etpoint ramp in automatic mode DISABL DISABLE SETPOINT RAMP Disables the setpoint ramp Release M DR4500A Truline Circular Chart Recorder With or Without Control Product Manual 121 May 2013 Configuration Parameter Definitions Setpoint Ramp Set Up Group Lower Display Upper Display Parameter Definition Prompt Range of Setting or Selection TIME MIN 0 to 255 minutes SETPOINT RAMP TIME Enter the number of minutes desired to reach the final setpoint A ramp time of 0 implies an immediate change of setpoint Example of SP Ramp Settings SP I 120 0 255 I Time 3 21421 FINAL SP Within SP limits SETPOINT RAMP FINAL SETPOINT Enter the value desired for the final setpoint The recorder will operate at the setpoint set here when ramp is ended SP RATE SETPOINT RATE Lets you configure a specific rate of option change for any local setpoint change SP RAMP and SP PROG must be disabled ENABLE ENABLE SETPOINT RATE Allows the SP rate feature DISABL DISABLE SETPOINT RATE Disables the setpoint rate EU HR UP 0 to 9999 in Engineering Units RATE UP Value for SP Rate selection per hour EU HR DN 0 to 9999 in Engineering Units RATE DOWN Value for SP Rate selection per hour SP PROG SETPOINT RAMP SOAK PROGRAM option Available only with recorders that contain this option SP RAMP and SP RATE must be disabled ENABLE For reasons of convenience the pr
206. etting Lower Display Upper Display PULS CNT Pulse Counter Selection YES Enable YES or disable NO the pulse NO output option TOTALIZER Totalizer Selection TOTAL 1 Select one of the four totalizers as the TOTAL 2 input to the pulse output counter TOTAL 3 TOTAL 4 PULSE SP Pulse Setpoint Value 0 to 9999 The Pulse Setpoint Value is the Selection incremental volume selected to close the pulse output relay for a preselected time duration This number will be multiplied by the scaler selected at the SP SCALE function prompt SP SCALE Setpoint Scale Selection 1 The Setpoint Scale is used to scale the 10 above pulse setpoint 100 1000 10000 100000 1E6 PULSE WID Pulse Width Selection 1 2 SEC Pulse Width is the duration in time of the 1 SEC contact closure 5 SEC ATTENTION If the measured flow rate demands contact closure within the pulse width time the relay will remain ON PULS RST Pulse Counter Reset YES Used to manually reset the pulse NO counter to zero value Table 3 is continued on the next page Release M DR4500A Truline Circular Chart Recorder With or Without Control Product Manual 269 May 2013 Model DR45AW Configuration Configuration Continued Pulse Counter configuration Continued B 3 Pulse Counter Group Function Prompts Continued Function Function Selections or Remarks Prompt Name Range of Setting Lower Display Upper Display
207. ews Table 10 4 Recorder parts associated with options Recommended Key Part Number Description Spare Parts per Quantity per Unit 10 100 1 30754922 501 Second Control Output PCB 1 30754922 502 Second Current Output PCB Current Out Only Note 4 2 30754922 501 First Control Output PCB 1 5 1 30754922 502 First Control Output PCB Current Out Only 30755306 501 Control Output Relay 1 relay 1 5 2 30755306 601 Control Output Relay 5 relays 3 Original Main board w o Daughterboard 1 5 1 51404561 503 RS485 Comms 4 20 mA Aux Output 5 E Current Main board with Daughterboard 51404561 504 RS485 Comms only 51404561 505 RS485 Comms 4 20 mA Aux Output 4 K 30756140 001 Alarm output digital input PCB kit 1 5 30755119 501 Ribbon cable 34 conductor See Note 3 1 3 1 7 30755127 502 Light accessory kit 1 7 1 K 30749598 501 Kit of 5 Bulbs General Instruments 1828 or equivalent 1 8 K 30756140 001 Spacers 4 9 10 11 K 30756141 003 Input PCBs 1 2 3 or 4 1 5 1 4 12 30754919 501 Mother board 1 3 0 1 13 30755980 004 Battery Duracell DL2450 or equivalent 1 1 1 NOTE 3 Part included with alarm output digital input PCB kit 30756140 001 NOTE 4 30754922 502 Control Output board is used for Table II Options 60 or 66 NOTE 5 Processor Board change occurred approximately September 2009 See Diagram below for daughter board Main board with Daughter board Daughter boar
208. ex action as shown refer to Figure 2 18 tighten the screws to secure the wires 10 Install the wired plug into J5 11 Repeat steps 2 through 10 for control output 2 printed circuit board as applicable Release M May 2013 DR4500A Truline Circular Chart Recorder With or Without Control Product Manual 43 Installation Output Wiring Procedures Position when shipped 1 Control Es W2 contact iw3 tput bas with power applied Ok W4 and out indicator light off d ra ws W5 contact Control output 311 PCB Current Output Control output 2 PCB Ferrite Filter Cable Shield External Load Fair Rite P N 0443164151 or equivalent y power supply 1 load O OQ o N aoa H ph Relay 2 O N Codin SY O H Plug J5 see Notes 0047 UF Capacitor Required for CE Mark Conformity Kit Part No 51197612 502 contains two ferrite filters Part No 51197612 508 contains 8 ferrite filters Install inside of case See Figure 2 11 Capacitor Kit 51197755 001 Install capacitors as shown in figure Relay 2 is used for time proportional duplex Also used for 3 position step See Figure 2 17 Not 1 J5 terminals 2 and 4 are the non switched connections to an SPST relay Selectable for normally open or normally closed as required 2 This
209. f a setpoint program is to be used n ATTENTION If power is lost during execution of a program upon power up the recorder will use the last setpoint value prior to the beginning of the setpoint program The program is placed in hold at the beginning The Manual Auto mode will be as configured under POWER in the CONTROL group Release M DR4500A Truline Circular Chart Recorder With or Without Control Product Manual 172 May 2013 Setpoint Ramp Soak Programming and Operation Overview What s in this section This section contains the following information Topic See Page 6 2 Setpoint Program Contents 174 6 3 Drawing a Ramp Soak Profile 177 6 4 Entering the Setpoint Program Data 182 6 5 SP RAMP1 and SP RAMP2 Set Up Group 184 6 6 Setpoint Program Profiles Set Up Group 186 6 7 Setpoint Program Segments Set Up Group 188 6 8 Setpoint Program Event Set Up Group 191 6 9 Run Monitor the Program 195 Release M DR4500A Truline Circular Chart Recorder With or Without Control Product Manual 173 May 2013 Setpoint Ramp Soak Programming and Operation Setpoint Program Contents 6 2 Setpoint Program Contents What you will configure You will configure all the data that is relevant to each ramp and soak segment for a given setpoint versus time program profile The recorder will prompt you through the sequence of segments and associated functions These prompts and functions are described below Recycle numb
210. fe output 196 DR4500A Truline Circular Chart Recorder With or Without Control Product Manual Release M May 2013 7 Input Calibration 7 1 Overview SHOCK HAZARD WARNING Disregard of these instructions may cause injury or death INPUT CALIBRATION MAY REQUIRE ACCESS TO HAZARDOUS LIVE CIRCUITS AND SHOULD ONLY BE PERFORMED BY QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL MORE THAN ONE SWITCH MAY BE REQUIRED TO DE ENERGIZE UNIT BEFORE CALIBRATION Introduction This section describes the field calibration procedures for inputs 1 2 3 and 4 All DR4500A recorders are factory calibrated prior to shipment It should not therefore be necessary to recalibrate the recorder when it is initially installed However you must recalibrate the input if any one of the conditions summarized below applies e The thermocouple or RTD input must meet published accuracy rates Note that the factory calibration at reference is 1 2 F plus 10 microvolts for thermocouples or 0 3 ohms for RTDs Specifications 44 45 03 14 e You are using a 0 10 Vdc input Recalibration is necessary because the resistor network used for this input has a tolerance of 1 0 e You have cause to believe that the recorder is out of calibration e You must perform regularly scheduled or periodic recalibration based on your own needs e You have performed specific servicing activities such as replacement of an input PCB ATTENTION
211. figuration LOWR This exits from the configuration mode DISP Release M DR4500A Truline Circular Chart Recorder With or Without Control Product Manual 183 May 2013 Setpoint Ramp Soak Programming and Operation SP RAMP1 and SP RAMP2 Set Up Group 6 5 SP RAMP1 and SP RAMP2 Set Up Group Introduction There is a SP RAMP set up group for each control loop Use the prompts to select the settings for each loop s program SP RAMP prompts Table 6 3 lists all the function prompts for SP RAMP configuration in the order of their appearance These prompts are available when SPPROG is enabled in the SPRAMP set up group described in Section 4 All parameters may be changed while the program is disabled or in HOLD Table 6 3 SP RAMP prompts and available selections Lower Display Upper Display Parameter Definition Prompt Range of Setting or Selection SPPROG SETPOINT PROGRAMMING This must be set to ENABLE for the setpoint program feature to work and for the associated operating parameters to be displayed SPRAMP and SP RATE must be disabled See Section 4 DISABL DISABL Disabled ENABLE ENABLE Enabled RECYCLES 0 to 99 RECYCLES Enter the number of times the program selected for execution will be repeated SOAKDEV 99 9 to 99 9 engineering units SOAK DEVIATION Enter the acceptable deviation from setpoint during a soak cycle If the PV differs from the setpoint by more than the value of SOAKDEV soak time is frozen
212. five screws have a 5 to 8 Ib in of torque applied Do the same to both the other three brackets When completed all twenty screws should have a 5 to 8 Ib in of torque applied This assures that the case and panel gaskets are adequately sealed against the panel 22 DR4500A Truline Circular Chart Recorder With or Without Control Product Manual Release M May 2013 Installation Mounting Methods Pan Head Screw Hex Head Bolt 8 32 x 3 4 inch 1 4 20 x 5 8 inch Hex Head Bolt 1 4 20 x 5 8 inch Hex Head Bolt 1 4 20 x 5 8 inch Pan Head Screw 8 32 x 3 4 inch Side View NOTE Mounting brackets attaching hardware and panel gasket are included in kit 30755065 503 Figure 2 8 Panel Mounting Recorder with NEMA4X Door Release M May 2013 DR4500A Truline Circular Chart Recorder With or Without Control Product Manual 23 Installation Mounting Methods Mounting on a 2 inch pipe Refer to Figure 2 9 and follow the procedure in Table 2 8 to mount your recorder on a 2 inch pipe Table 2 8 Pipe Mounting Procedure Step Action 1 Using the eight plastite screws supplied with the pipe mounting bracket kit attach the two mounting brackets flat side against the case to the back of the recorder Refer to Figure 2 9 for location 2 Position the recorder with brackets on the 2 inch pipe 3 Install the U bolts around the pipe and through the bracket holes Secure with lockwashers and
213. following European Council Directives 73 23 EEC the Low Voltage Directive and 89 336 EEC the EMC Directive Conformity of this product with any other CE Mark Directive s shall not be assumed Deviation from the installation conditions specified in this manual and the special conditions for CE conformity in Subsection 2 1 may invalidate this product s conformity with the Low Voltage and EMC Directives n ATTENTION The emission limits of EN 61326 are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when this equipment is operated in an industrial environment Operation of this equipment in a residential area may cause harmful interference This equipment generates uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and may cause interference to radio and television reception when the equipment is used closer than 30 meters 98 feet to the antenna e In special cases when highly susceptible apparatus is used in close proximity the user may have to employ additional mitigating measures to further reduce the electromagnetic emissions of this equipment Microprocessor controlled recording and printing Both the chart and printhead are driven by stepper motors controlled by the microprocessor with configurable chart speed through the keypad You can configure various printed chart data such as range marking in engineering units digital values for process variables and trace identification This data plus printed tim
214. formation in the worksheets that follow in the next sections This will give you a permanent record of your program and will assist you when entering the ramp and soak values Profile 1 Profile 2 179 DR4500A Truline Circular Chart Recorder With or Without Control Product Manual Release M May 2013 Setpoint Ramp Soak Programming and Operation Drawing a Ramp Soak Profile Profile 3 Profile 4 Release M May 2013 DR4500A Truline Circular Chart Recorder With or Without Control Product Manual 180 Setpoint Ramp Soak Programming and Operation Drawing a Ramp Soak Profile Profile 5 N A o o Profile 6 Release M DR4500A Truline Circular Chart Recorder With or Without Control Product Manual 181 May 2013 Setpoint Ramp Soak Programming and Operation Entering the Setpoint Program Data 6 4 Entering the Setpoint Program Data Introduction The procedure listed in Table 6 2 tells you what keys to press and what prompts you will see when entering the setpoint program data Follow the prompts in Subsections 6 5 through 6 8 when selecting the functions for setpoint programming n ATTENTION Make sure SP RAMP and SP RATE are disabled first Table 6 2 Setpoint program data entry procedure Step Operation Press Action Result Select SP PROG Group SET UP Until you see Upper Display SET UP Lower Display SP RAMPn 1 2 Access SP PROG
215. functions that operate relays During alarm conditions an alarm will deenergize its associated relay unless a higher priority function has been configured for that relay See Table 3 13 If you want the alarm to control the relay do not configure a higher priority function Table 4 11 Priority of functions that operate relays Relay Relay is controlled by in order of priority 1 3 Timer function 4 Alarm 1 2 Alarm 2 only 3 5 Controller 1 output algorithms Relay Simplex Position Proportional Relay Duplex Current Relay Duplex 6 Alarm 3 4 7 Controller 1 output algorithms Position Proportional Relay Duplex Current Relay Duplex 8 Alarm 4 5 9 Controller 2 output algorithms Relay Simplex Position Proportional Relay Duplex Current Relay Duplex 10 Alarm 5 6 11 Controller 2 output algorithms Position Proportional Relay Duplex Current Relay Duplex 12 Alarm 6 124 DR4500A Truline Circular Chart Recorder With or Without Control Product Manual Release M May 2013 Configuration Parameter Definitions Alarms Set Up Group Alarms group prompts Table 4 12 lists all the function prompts in the Alarms setup group and their definitions These prompts repeat for all 6 alarms n TIP To configure an alarm for a setpoint program segment event program either type AXS1TYPE or AXS2TYPE as EVENT It is not necessary to configure any other alarm prompts Table 4 12 Alarms Group Definitions
216. g chart initiation and before the first valid hour mark NOTE If X hour chart is selected standard charts are disabled HOUR REV 6 to 744 Hours HOURS PER REVOLUTION Set the desired chart 12 hrs for abrasion resistant speed Appears only if XHR was selected at prompt pen CHRT SPD ATTENTION Below 8 hour chart speed 24 hours with abrasion resistant pen printing may be degraded 100 DR4500A Truline Circular Chart Recorder With or Without Control Product Manual Release M May 2013 Configuration Parameter Definitions Chart Parameters Set Up Group Lower Display Upper Display Parameter Definition Prompt Range of Setting or Selection TIME DIV 8 to 24 time periods TIME DIVISION This is the number of time periods MAJOR into which the chart record is to be divided TIME PERIOD TIME DIV Software set for 4 or 8 MINOR seg minor time divisions ATTENTION Make sure that the chart selected is evenly divisible into the time periods For example 7 day 14 or 21 lines CONTINUE CONTINUE CHART ROTATION Do you want to continue or stop the chart drive after a single 360 rotation YES Yes continue chart drive NO No stop chart drive If NO is selected chart paper must be replaced for proper printout CHARTNAM 0 TO 9 CHART NAME This is where you determine the chart ATOZ name identifier For example TRULINE 4 T 2 For alphanumeric entries the
217. g wires into bundles see Table 2 10 and route the individual bundles through separate conduits or metal trays e Use Suppression Devices for additional noise protection you may want to add suppression devices at the external source appropriate suppression devices are commercially available ei REFERENCE For additional noise information refer to document number 51 52 05 01 Electrical considerations The recorder is considered rack and panel mounted equipment per EN 61010 1 Safety Requirements for Electrical Equipment for Measurement Control and Laboratory Use Part 1 General Requirements Recorder grounding PROTECTIVE BONDING grounding of this recorder shall be in accordance with National and local electrical codes Functional earth N minimize electrical noise and transients that may adversely affect the system supplementary bonding of the recorder enclosure to a functional earth ground using a 3 4 braided copper conductor is required A terminal on the rear of the recorder is provided for this connection CE conformity special conditions Europe Braid shielded cable is required for all Input I O and Output Relay cables All recorder cable shield wires except the RS485 Modbus communications cable shield must be connected to a low impedance earth ground at the recorder This can be done by bussing the shields to an earth ground point or by connecting the shields to the conduit ent
218. ge of Setting Lower Display Upper Display ADJUST Totalizer Adjustment YES Selection of the adjustment to totalizers Selection NO in case of power outage The following prompts appear only if YES was selected above ADJ RATE Flow Rate for Totalizer 0 to 9999 Select the average flow before the Adjustment outage The ADJ RATE uses the unit selected as the flow rate See input configuration ADJ TIME Time for Totalizer 0 to 9999 Enter the time duration of the power Adjustment outage The unit of time is minutes EXECUTE Execute Totalizer YES No adjustment is made to the totalizer Adjustment NO until YES is selected Table 2 is continued on the next page Release M DR4500A Truline Circular Chart Recorder With or Without Control Product Manual 267 May 2013 Model DR45AW Configuration Configuration continued Totalizer 1 to 4 configuration Continued B 2 Additional Totalizer Group Function Prompts Continued Function Function Selections or Remarks Prompt Name Range of Setting Lower Display Upper Display The following prompts appear only if FLORATE1 appears under the Input 1 set up group CNVRT TO Conversion Selection NONE Select desired totalizer units Applicable CU FT conversion factors will be applied based GALLON on the input FLORATE1 selected This ACREFT selection is only available when the input CU MTR FLOXMIT1 has been set to FLOW or LITER
219. gin and the lower display will flash TUNING The output will cycle between 50 and 100 or high output limit When tuning has been completed the lower display will again show TUNExOFF The Heat tuning parameters are entered for the first set of PID constants in the tuning set up group Release M DR4500A Truline Circular Chart Recorder With or Without Control Product Manual 159 May 2013 Operation Using Accutune II 160 Step Press Action Result Cooling Tuning 6 DISP Until you see Setpoint 2 Lower Display SP nnn 7 A Until the value of Setpoint 2 is at the desired value within the Cooling zone or v 8 DISP Until you see Lower Display Use SP1 9 A to toggle to o Lower Display Use SP2 v 10 DISP Lower Display TUNExOFF 11 A to toggle to or 4 Lower Display TUNExON Tuning will begin and the lower display will flash TUNING The output will cycle between 0 and 50 or low output limit When tuning has been completed the lower display will again show TUNEXOFF The Cool tuning parameters are entered for the second set of PID constants in the tuning set up group DR4500A Truline Circular Chart Recorder With or Without Control Product Manual Release M May 2013 Operation Alarm Setpoints 5 10 Alarm Setpoints Introduction An alarm consists of a relay contact and an operator interface indication The alarm relay is de energized if Alarm Setpoint 1
220. gorithms 16 Alarm 3 e Configure Alarm type Event 4 17 Controller 1 output algorithms Position Do not configure Controller Proportional Relay Duplex Current Relay Duplex 1 with these output algorithms 18 Alarm 4 e Configure Alarm 4 type Event 5 19 Controller 2 output algorithms Relay Simplex Do not configure Controller Position Proportional Relay Duplex Current Relay 2 with these output Duplex algorithms 20 Alarm 5 e Configure Alarm 5 type Event 6 21 Controller 2 output algorithms Position Do not configure Controller Proportional Relay Duplex Current Relay Duplex 2 with these output algorithms 22 Alarm 6 e Configure Alarm 6 type Event DR4500A Truline Circular Chart Recorder With or Without Control Product Manual Release M May 2013 Setpoint Ramp Soak Programming and Operation Setpoint Program Event Set Up Group Setpoint program events worksheet Use this worksheet to make a record of the segment event settings Prompt Description Range Your selection SPP EVNT Access to events N A N A SEG1 EV Event status NONE ALARM1 ALARM2 ALARMS ALARMA ALARM5 ALARM6 SEG2 EV Event status Same SEG3 EV Event status Same SEG4 EV Event status Same SEG5 EV Event status Same SEG6 EV Event status Same SEG7 EV Event status Same SEG8 EV Event status Same SEG9 EV Event status Same SEG10 EV Event status Same SEG11 EV
221. group ACCUTUNE parameter described in Section 4 Detailed instructions for using Accutune follow Starting and Stopping Tuning with Accutune After ACCUTUNE has been enabled in the tuning set up group as described in Section 4 use the procedure in Table 5 21 to start tuning To abort tuning in progress press the MAN AUTO RESET key to take the recorder out of Auto mode The message AbRT abort will be displayed as the value of tuning set up group parameter ERR The tuning parameters will retain the values they had at the start of the Accutune operation Table 5 21 Procedure for Starting Accutune Step Press Action Result 1 DISP Until you see until you see Lower Display TUNExOFF 1 or 2 If TUNExOFF tune off does not appear then Accutune is not enabled 2 A to toggle to or Lower Display TUNExON x 1 or 2 Tuning will begin and the lower display will flash TUNING v When tuning has been ompleted the lower display will again show TUNEXOFF 158 DR4500A Truline Circular Chart Recorder With or Without Control Product Manual Release M May 2013 Operation Using Accutune II Using Accutune with Duplex Heat Cool Control can be done for applications using Duplex Heat Cool control During tuning Accutune II assumes SP 1 will cause a Heating demand and then the calculated tuning parameters will be automatically entered as the first set of PID co
222. gured inputs Tb standard reference temperature configurable t product input temperature F or C 2 thermal resistance configurable Only applicable if Model Table Il is 40 Model Table III is 0X3 and Model Table IV is INTEMP INPUT 1 INPUT FOR PRODUCT TEMPERATURE selects INPUT 2 which input will supply product temperature for INPUT 3 sterilization calculation INPUT 4 STDTEMP 0 1 to 9999 STANDARD REFERENCE TEMPERATURE selects a reference temperature constant for sterilization calculation usually 250 F or 121 Z VALUE 0 1 to 9999 THERMAL RESISTANCE selects a thermal resistance constant for sterilization calculation usually 18 or 10 REM SW REMOTE SWITCHING allows you to select an action to be initiated by remote contact closure through digital input NONE NONE No Selection TO MAN from AUTO TO MAN switch to manual mode from automatic TO LSP from REMOTE TO LSP switch to local setpoint from remote TO 2SP from LSP TO 2SP switch to 2nd setpoint from local setpoint TO DIR from REV TO DIR switch to direct output action from reverse TO HOLD from RUN TO HOLD put ramp soak program in hold TUNE TUNE start Accutune FO RST FO RST reset sterilization calculation REM SW2 NONE REMOTE SWITCHING DIGITAL 2 INPUT allows you FO RST to select remote contact closure through digital 2 input to reset sterilization calculation or not Release M DR4500A Truline
223. h or Without Control Product Manual 281 May 2013 Foreign Language Safety Instructions GR21 6056 D 6 GR21 6056 282 DR4500A Truline Circular Chart Recorder With or Without Control Product Manual Release M May 2013 Foreign Language Safety Instructions IT21 6056 NORME DI SICUREZZA 0 7 1721 6056 Per ridurre i rischi di scariche elettriche che potrebbero causare alle persone seguire tutte le precauzioni circa la sicurezza indicate in questa documentazione Questo simbolo avverte del pericolo di scossa elettrica nelle aree in cui sono accessibili conduttori sotto tensione Terminale di protezione verso terra Previsto per il collegamento del conduttore di protezione verso terra del sistema di alimentazione e Selostrumento viene utilizzato in modo diverso dalla specifica del costruttore la protezione fornita dallo strumento pu essere diversa e sostituire alcun componente o parte non specificato esplicitamente come ricambio dal vostro fornitore e Tutti i cablaggi devono essere in accordo con i regolamenti locali e devono essere eseguiti da personale esperto ed autorizzato e lterminale di massa deve essere collegato prima di ogni altro filo e scollegato per ultimo e necessario che sia presente un interruttore nell alimentazione principale accanto all apparecchio ALIMENTAZIONE APPARECCHIATURA Tensione di Da 102 a 132 Vac 6 da 204 a 264 Vac alimentazione Frequenza 50 60 Hz Potenza o corren
224. h setpoint programming capability Alarm output digital input capability High speed pen Totalization for input 1 Gray door with acrylic window Door lock Chart illumination Customer I D tag No approvals Location of hardware components 14 After you decode your recorder s model number refer to Figure 2 2 to match table selections with the location of actual recorder hardware components This will help you to determine applicable input output wiring requirements as well as identify appropriate software functions to be configured later To access and view the actual components inside your recorder follow the procedure in Table 2 2 Table 2 2 Procedure to Access Components Step Action 1 Turn the latch on the recorder door and swing the door open 2 Loosen the captive screw on the right hand side of the chart plate and swing the chart plate out 3 Reverse the steps to close the chart plate and door DR4500A Truline Circular Chart Recorder With or Without Control Product Manual Release M May 2013 Installation Model Number Interpretation View of hardware components Figure 2 2 shows the location of the actual hardware components for key number DRASAT If key number is DRASAR see Appendix A for internal views Key Number DR 45AT If Key number is DR45AR see Appendix A for internal views One Pen stylus printhead Auxiliary Output PCB Table Ill 1XX OR RS4
225. he recorder stores the 0 value and you will see Upper Display existing span calibration value in counts approximately 1500 Lower Display SPAN VAL Aor V Until the desired span value is reached in the upper display Upper Display desired span value Lower Display SPAN VAL For manual calibration the motor does not move from its position prior to the start of position proportional calibration 8 Exit the Calibration Mode FUNC The recorder stores the 100 96 value LOWR To exit the calibration mode DISP or SET UP 222 DR4500A Truline Circular Chart Recorder With or Without Control Product Manual Release M May 2013 Output Calibration Auxiliary Output Calibration 8 4 Auxiliary Output Calibration Introduction Calibrate the recorder so that the auxiliary output provides the proper amount of current over the desired range e The recorder can provide an auxiliary output current range of from 2 to 21 milliamperes and can be calibrated at 4 mA for 0 96 of output and 20 mA for 100 96 of output or any other values between 2 and 21 mA Equipment needed You will need a standard shop type milliammeter with whatever accuracy is required capable of measuring 0 to 20 milliamps Calibrator connections Refer to Figure 8 2 and wire the recorder according to the procedure given in Table 8 4 Table 8 4 Set Up Wiring Procedure Auxiliary Output Step Action 1 With the power off door op
226. i DR4500A Truline Circular Chart Recorder With or Without Control Product Manual Release M May 2013 Tables Table 1 1 Function of Keys iuo deett e tese niei pe viet e e eet ie ess ei era efe ruere 4 Table 2 1 Operating Limits and Condensed Specifications sse ene 8 Table 2 2 Procedure to Access Components 14 Table 2 3 Mounting Flush in a New Panel Cutout essere 18 Table 2 4 Reference Data for Mounting DR4500A in Existing Panel Cutouts esee 19 Table 2 5 Mounting Flush in a Panel Using Universal Filler Kit 20 Table 2 6 Mounting Flush in a Panel Using Kent Model 105M Cutout sese 21 Table 2 7 Procedure for Mounting Recorder with NEMAAX Door ene 22 Table 2 8 Pipe Mounting Procedure iege e etit eet deer de ed eere deeds 24 Table 2 9 Mounting Flush on a Surface of Panel or Wall essere 25 Table 2 10 Permissible Wiring Bundling eeeseseseseeeeeeen eene nennen nn ennt nitens 28 Table 2 11 AC Line Power Wiring isis e case etae eT E E e PP Ee ERIS 31 Table 2 12 Thermocouple RTD Radiamatic mV or 0 5 Vdc Input Wiring sse 33 Table 2213 420 mA Input Wiring coste 35 Table 2514 0 10 Volt WiN a eere OVER IE ee SEE d Ato es EU 37 Table 2 15 4 20 mA Control Output Wiring
227. ibbon Cable Display included with key no 5 7 30756114 501 Servo Motor Assembly 8 30754975 503 Servo Plate Assembly includes key no 7 1 2 1 9 K 30755980 002 Spring tension 1 10 30754977 503 Chart plate for standard high speed pen 1 2 1 30754977 504 Chart plate for abrasion resistant pen 30754977 513 Chart plate for standard high speed pen CE Mark 30754977 514 Chart plate for abrasion resistant pen CE Mark Basic recorder components without options Figure 10 3 is an exploded view of the basic recorder components Table 10 3 15 a list of the associated part numbers 4 4 21454 Figure 10 3 Basic recorder components without options Release M DR4500A Truline Circular Chart Recorder With or Without Control Product Manual 245 Parts List Exploded Views Table 10 3 Basic recorder parts without options Recommended f Key Part Number Description Spare Parts per Quantity per Unit 10 100 1 30754982 502 Main Transformer 1 3 1 2 51309355 502 Main PCB CE Mark model DR45AT 1 5 1 51309355 503 Main PCB CE Mark model DR45AR 51309355 504 Main PCB CE Mark model DR45AW 51309355 505 Main PCB CE Mark model DR45AH AP AS 3 K 30756141 003 Input PCB input 1 2 3 or 4 1 4 4 See Note 2 3 position connector 2 5 See Note 2 2 position connector 1 6 30755980 005 Fuse Wilkman 19374 041 K 500 ohm or equal 1 7 30754924 502 Case 1 51452
228. ified during configuration The ramp is configured in terms of ramp time or ramp rate depending on how you have configured the RAMPUNIT parameter During a soak segment the setpoint is held at the specified value For each control loop you can build up to 6 profiles using any number of consecutive segments of the program Odd numbered segments are always ramp segments Even numbered segments are always soaks These ramp and soak segments can be used in up to six programs You designate the beginning and end segments to determine where the program will start or stop Every profile must start with a ramp segment and end on a soak segment e Control Loop must have Setpoint Source set to ILOCAL e Control Loop 1 uses SP RAMPI Control Loop 2 uses SP RAMP2 SP RAMPI and SP RAMP2 are the prompts under which the setpoint program is configured Recorder must be set to use SP1 setpoint 1 e Only contiguous segments can be used by a profile e There can be overlap between programs For example Profile 1 could use Segments 1 2 3 4 5 and 6 Profile 2 could be configured to begin with Segment 5 and end with Segment 8 This section contains instructions for setting up a setpoint program and for executing the program at runtime Note that Section 4 contains instructions for using the setpoint ramp or setpoint rate The SP RAMP setpoint ramp and SP RATE setpoint rate parameters described in Section 4 must be set to DISABL disabled i
229. ignals INPTCOMP Input Compensation 999 9 to 9999 Factory setting is 0 FILTER 1 Input 1 Filter 0 to 120 seconds Factory setting is 0 BURNOUT Burnout Protection NONE Factory setting is UP UP DOWN 266 ATTENTION Repeat this procedure for INPUT 2 INPUT 3 and INPUT 4 The function prompts will be the same except that a 2 3 or 4 will appear instead ofa 1 Continued on next page DR4500A Truline Circular Chart Recorder With or Without Control Product Manual Release M May 2013 Model DR45AW Configuration Configuration Continued Selected inputs must be enabled to select totalization prompts Totalizer 1 to 4 configuration Table 2 lists the additional function prompts available in the TOTAL 1 Set Up group Repeat the process for each input you want to set up Press the SET UP key to enter the configuration mode and continue pressing until TOTAL 1 TOTAL 2 TOTAL 3 or TOTAL 4 prompt appears in the lower display Press the key to display the prompts in Table 2 Press or t key to make selections ATTENTION Aj prompts described in the Product Manual are the same except for RATE This prompt does not appear for Model DR45AW since the totalizer flow rate is always the same as the flow rate configured at the input Table B 5 Additional Totalizer Group Function Prompts Function Function Selections or Remarks Prompt Name Ran
230. igure 7 1 Location of the Input Connections on the Input Boards Release M DR4500A Truline Circular Chart Recorder With or Without Control Product Manual 201 May 2013 Input Calibration Preliminary Information Equipment needed Table 7 4 lists the equipment required to calibrate the specific types of inputs listed in the table You will need a medium size bladed screwdriver for general use and a small size bladed screwdriver for use with the screws on the connector plugs Table 7 4 Equipment Needed Type of Input Equipment Needed Thermocouple Inputs A calibrating device with 0 02 accuracy for use as a Ice Bath signal source such as a millivolt source e Thermocouple extension wire that corresponds with the type of thermocouple that will be used with the recorder input e Two insulated copper leads for connecting the thermocouple extension wire from the ice baths to the precision calibrator e Two containers of crushed ice Thermocouple Inputs A calibrating device with 0 02 96 accuracy for use as a Ambient Temperature signal source such as a millivolt source e Two insulated copper leads for connecting the calibrator to the controller Thermocouple Inputs e A calibrating device with temperature compensation and Compensated Calibrator 0 02 accuracy for use as a signal source e Thermocouple extension wire that corresponds with the type of thermocouple that will be used with the recorder
231. iled and how to correct them e If control is not configured self test failures will be displayed periodically as other error messages are presently displayed ERR CAL1 ERR CAL2 ERR or BATT LOW Release M DR4500A Truline Circular Chart Recorder With or Without Control Product Manual 229 May 2013 Troubleshooting Service Self Diagnostics Device status When required the results of the power up tests can be checked to determine the reason the recorder has gone to Failsafe The following procedure in Table 9 3 tells you how to display the results of the latest tests run Table 9 4 lists the tests the reason for the failure and how to correct the problem Table 9 3 Displaying the test results Step Operation Press Action Result 230 Select STATUS Set Up Group Read the status tests results SET UP FUNC Until you see Upper Display READ Lower Display STATUS Until you see Upper Display NO or YES YES indicates a failure Lower Display FAILSAFE e Successive presses of the FUNC key will display the results of the tests PASS or FAIL in the following order RAM TEST CONFTEST CAL TEST FACT CRC BATTERY Identify the problem from the error message and correct the failure as shown under lower display indication in Table 9 4 DR4500A Truline Circular Chart Recorder With or Without Control Product Manual Release M May 2013 Troubleshooting S
232. imits and condensed specifications ssssssseeeeeeenen enne nnne nennen nennen 8 2 2 Model Number Interpretation tiit Piet e UR iab CORE ARI ERR 13 Model Bye n 13 Example of model number decoding cccccccecsecceceeeeeeeeeeecaeceeeeececaeaaeceeeeeceeeeeaeceeeeeseseeaeeeeeeeseasaeeeeeeeseeninaeees 14 Location of hardware components pereat iet erede ridens a Dens cde rinde rd dep e ead ase eene tad nie osa 14 View of hardware components nennen nne nnnemr sisi sn nnn rnnr sls i inse teens sese senten nsns sd 15 2 3 Mounting Considerations and Overall Dimensions eene 16 Physical considerations e Rte ERR RR ENDO ES Hes 16 Overall GIMENSIONS EMT s 16 244 Mounting Methods niente erii te ae ee au eaa Deu een d 17 IntrodUCHION p E E 17 How to remove knockouts for conduits ssssssssesseeeene 17 Mounting flush in panel New panel cutout sssssseeeeene enne eene 18 Reference data for existing panel cutouts sssssssseseeene eene 19 Adapter plate dimensions u s isisi duck iere e Hle eite dee Per de eL de eode Dn pter ede ere ea dae tec 19 Mounting flush in panel using universal
233. ine Circular Chart Recorder With or Without Control Product Manual Release M May 2013 Installation Input Wiring Procedures Table 2 11 AC Line Power Wiring Step Action 1 Open the recorder door Loosen the captive screw in the chart plate and swing the plate out 2 2 connector J10 on the bottom edge of the main printed circuit board Refer to Figure 3 Remove the unwired plug from J10 4 Run the power wires separately through second conduit from the right 5 For CE Mark conformity install the ferrite filter as shown in Figure 2 11 6 Strip insulation from the end of each wire 7 Loosen the screws in plug J10 terminals and position the plug as you would to plug it into J10 8 Insert e the green wire into the first screw clamp from the right e the white wire L2 into the second screw clamp from the right and e the black wire L1 into the third screw clamp from the right Tighten the screws to secure the wires CAUTION To avoid damaging the recorder be sure that you install the power wires into the correct screw clamps Make sure the fuse block is installed properly for the given supply rating 120 Vac or 240 Vac The fuse is in the 120 Vac location from the factory 9 Make sure the fuse block is installed in the proper location Refer to Figure 2 12 for fuse block location e 120 Vac Fuse block in location F2 e 240 Vac Fuse block in location F1 10 Dress the wires as slack as possi
234. ing 43 Relay duplex 117 Relay current duplex 717 Remote chart activation 68 102 Remote setpoint 710 Remote switching 164 Repeats per minute 714 Replacing chart 770 Reset 720 Reset 2 121 Reset units 74 114 Resetting totalizer value 165 Resistance equivalent 202 Restoring factory calibration 200 Reverse acting control 712 RS485 Modbus communications wiring 50 RSP 152 RTD inputs 270 S Safety Requirements for Electrical Equipment 27 Self diagnostics 229 Setpoint high limit 712 Setpoint low limit 2 Setpoint program profiles set up 187 Setpoint Program Data entry 183 event setup 192 overview 173 ramp setup 185 run monitor functions 196 segment setup 189 Setpoint ramp 122 Configuring 153 Running 154 Setpoint ramp final setpoint 123 Setpoint ramp time 723 Setpoint selection indication 152 Setpoint source 73 110 151 Setpoint tracking 73 111 Set up tasks 5 Shield wiring 29 Single setpoint ramp 122 153 SOKDEV parameter 185 SPPROG parameter 185 Start up 139 Stylus 136 140 Suppression filters 29 Switchover value 157 Temperature units 64 94 Thermal resistance 259 Thermocouple inputs using a compensated calibrator method 208 Thermocouple inputs using an ice bath 207 Thermocouple inputs using the ambient temperature method 209 Three position step control output wiring 4 Time division 701 Time parameters group definitions 103 Totalizer 7
235. ing procedures are divided into two parts Self Diagnostics Error Message Prompts and e Visual Failure Symptoms If a Failed indication is given for one of the power up tests and or an error message prompt blinks in the lower display refer to the Self Diagnostic error message prompts If erratic operation is observed refer to the Visual Failure symptoms In either case run the status tests to verify the status of the recorder s basic self diagnostic tests 228 DR4500A Truline Circular Chart Recorder With or Without Control Product Manual Release M May 2013 Troubleshooting Service Self Diagnostics 9 3 Self Diagnostics Power up tests When the recorder is powered up four tests are run by the DR4500A software to ensure memory integrity As the tests run the displays appear as shown in Table 9 2 Table 9 2 Power up tests Lower Display Upper Display RAM TEST PASS or FAIL CONFTEST configuration checksum PASS or FAIL CAL TEST working calibration PASS or FAIL BATTERY PASS or FAIL Battery test failure does not cause a failsafe Failsafe f control is configured and any of these tests fail FAIL appears momentarily in the upper display then a display test is run after which the controller goes into manual mode and you will see Upper Display PV value Lower Display FAILSAFE blinking Refer to Device Status next page to determine which tests have fa
236. input RTD Resistance Thermometer e A resistance decade box with 0 02 accuracy capable Device of providing stepped resistance values over a minimum range of 0 to 1400 ohms with a resolution of 0 01 ohm e Three insulated copper leads for connecting the decade box to the controller Radiamatic Milliampere Millivolt and calibrating device with 0 02 accuracy for use as a Volts Inputs signal source e Two insulated copper leads for connecting the calibrator to the controller 202 DR4500A Truline Circular Chart Recorder With or Without Control Product Manual Release M May 2013 Input Calibration Calibration Set Up and Wiring for PV Inputs 7 5 Calibration Set Up and Wiring for PV Inputs Jumper positions Before starting the calibration activity check that the jumper plugs on the applicable input circuit board are installed in the proper jumper position in WI MA and W3 for the particular sensor being used refer to the wiring connection drawings in this section for each individual setting Refer to Figure 7 2 for the location of jumper positions W1 MA and W3 on these circuit boards and the status of these jumpers for each type of input sensor Main board Input board Position RTD Position T C MA Linear Position MA Position W1 Status of jumper plugs 1 Install W1 MA plug in position W1 for thermocouple RTD Radiamatic mV 0 5 Vdc 0 10 Vdc inputs 2 Install W1 MA plug in p
237. input is active Puts the controller into local setpoint 2 To DIR None Selects direct controller action transfer if in reverse RN HOLD H blinks in upper display Suspends setpoint program or setpoint ramp e Keyboard takes priority over external switch for RUN HOLD function e Contact open runs the program or ramp e If initially in the HOLD state close then open the contact to remotely start the SP ramp or Program TUNE TUNING x Initiates Accutune Keyboard operation If a particular mode or parameter is selected by the contact closure using the keyboard to select the same parameter ensures that the selected mode will be maintained after the remote digital switch 1s reopened Release M May 2013 DR4500A Truline Circular Chart Recorder With or Without Control Product Manual 163 Operation Resetting and Displaying Totalizer Value 5 13 Resetting and Displaying Totalizer Value Introduction If the totalizer is enabled and has been configured to allow resetting you can reset the current totalizer value as follows e Refer to Section 3 Configuration under set up prompt TOTAL 1 for Input 1 or TOTAL 2 for Input 2 to enable the totalizer function and allow the totalizer to be reset Refer to the procedures that follow to reset the totalizer locally reset the totalizer using the Wake Time feature reset the totalizer externally switch dis
238. int SP RAMP 1 and SP RAMP 2 can be configured only one of three ways ramp rate or setpoint program Single Setpoint Ramp Setpoint will ramp between the current local setpoint and a final setpoint over a time interval of up to 255 minutes SP RAMP Setpoint Rate The Setpoint Ramp Set Up group also contains the function parameters that let you configure a specific rate of change for any local setpoint change SP RATE It includes selections for Rate Up and Rate Down Setpoint Program Also included under this group are prompts for configuring a 36 segment Setpoint program SP PROG The prompts and instructions for Setpoint programming are presented in the Section 6 Setpoint Ramp Soak Programming and Operation e You can start and stop the ramp program using the RUN HOLD key Setpoint Ramp Program group prompts Table 4 9 lists all the function prompts in the Setpoint Ramp 1 or 2 setup group and their definitions When you enable the ramp type SP RAMP SP RATE SP PROG the other two types are hidden from the display Table 4 9 Setpoint Ramp 1 or 2 Group Definitions Lower Display Upper Display Parameter Definition Prompt Range of Setting or Selection SP RAMP SINGLE SETPOINT RAMP Make selection to enable or disable the setpoint ramp function Make sure you configure a ramp time and a final setpoint value SP PROG and SP RATE must be disabled ENABLE ENABLE SETPOINT RAMP Allows you to start the s
239. io p EO RT nad 106 lungs LEEREN 106 4 8 Control Parameters Set Up 109 eee er rM 109 Gontrol gro p prompts ettet stem t eee tee men tte te tme ma tele tumet 109 49 Tuning Parameters Set Up Group ener nennen nnn nennen nnns 118 rr cnm 118 Tuning group prombpls E 118 4 10 Setpoint Ramp Set Up 121 aj iere Ue io a ERO DIEM ITEM 121 Single Setpoint Ramp eee ite rer ile te s eee e die iv ee Roe pe ne e E e per e needs 121 Iiis SE 121 Setpoint Progra EE 121 Setpoint Ramp Program group prompts enm nnns 121 4 11 Timer Set Up Group ibn RP ten RO ndn etai eiie 123 a igere Ute ie a neg tans A E Cae 123 Timer group ea aape a deeb 123 4 12 Alarms Set Up iR edidere coe ubi d 124 EE 124 Priority of functions that operate 124 Alarms QrOUp prompts t oie n 125 4 13 Auxiliary Output Set Up eene eren nennen ennt 127 WACOM CUO ater EET 1
240. ion If a set of symptoms still persists refer to Section 2 Installation and ensure proper installation and proper use of the recorder in the system Customer support If you cannot solve the problem using the troubleshooting procedures listed in this section get the model number and serial number from the label on the chart plate and software version see Determining the software version then call Customer Support Phone Number 1 800 423 9883 USA and Canada If it is determined that a hardware problem exists and the recorder is still within the two year warranty a replacement recorder will be shipped with instructions for returning the defective unit Release M DR4500A Truline Circular Chart Recorder With or Without Control Product Manual 227 May 2013 Troubleshooting Service Troubleshooting Aids Determining the software version Table 9 1 lists the procedure for identifying the software version number Table 9 1 Identifying the software version Step Operation Press Action Result 1 Select STATUS SET Until you see Set Up Group UP Upper Display READ Lower Display STATUS 2 Read the software FUNC Until you see version Upper Display Software Version Number Lower Display VERSION Please give this number to the Customer Support person It will indicate which version of DR4500A you have and help them determine a solution to your problem Troubleshooting The troubleshoot
241. ion REJ FREQ 60HZ REJECTION FREQUENCY be sure that this selection 50HZ agrees with the line voltage frequency HF REJ ENABLE HIGH FREQUENCY REJECTION This selection DISABL allows high frequency noise rejection It is used to quiet noisy pens or PV ATTENTION For fast processes it will cause additional lag RELHUMID NO RELATIVE HUMIDITY allows you to activate or YES deactivate the RH calculation algorithm e You must select 100RH input type for two inputs to measure RH It requires two 100 ohm RTD inputs so INPUT 2 must be enabled for this prompt to appear e Also you must select RH for PEN2IN which represents the wet bulb temperature when input 2 is selected ATMPRES 590 to 800 mmHg ATMOSPHERIC PRESSURE COMPENSATION This prompt only appears if you select YES at RELHUMID prompt previously Select the desired compensation DEVIATION DEVIATION selects deviation recording action NONE NONE No deviation recording SETPNT e SETPNT Records deviation from setpoint CHAN1 e CHANT Pen 1 records the difference between Input 1 and Input 2 DEVSETPT 999 0 to 9999 DEVIATION SETPOINT VALUE sets the desired deviation setpoint value for deviation recording e This prompt only appears if SETPNT was selected at prompt DEVIATION previously 130 DR4500A Truline Circular Chart Recorder With or Without Control Product Manual Release M May 2013 Configuration Parameter Definitions Options Set Up Gro
242. ion Prompt Function Name Selections or Range of Setting Factory Lower Display Upper Display Setting FUZZY Fuzzy Overshoot DISABL DISABL Suppression ENABLE ACCUTUNE Accutune II for Control Loop DISABL DISABL ENABLE AT ERR Accutune Error Codes No message under normal conditions Read Only message displayed if tuning has been manually aborted PROP BD Proportional Band 0 1 to 1000 1 0 or or GAIN Gain 0 1 to 1000 RATE MIN Rate in minutes 0 00 to 10 00 minutes 0 00 RSET MIN Reset in minutes repeat 0 02 to 50 00 1 0 or or RSET RPM Reset in repeats minute 0 02 to 50 00 1 0 MAN RSET Manual Reset 100 to 100 output 0 0 PROP BD2 Proportional Band 2 0 1 to 1000 96 5 0 or or GAIN 2 Gain 2 0 1 to 1000 RATE2MIN Rate 2 in minutes 0 08 to 10 00 minutes 0 00 RSET2MIN Reset 2 in minutes repeat 0 02 to 50 00 0 2 RSET2RPM Reset 2 in repeats minute 0 02 to 50 00 0 2 CYC SEC Cycle Time Heat 1 to 120 seconds 20 0 Electromechanical Relays CYC2 SEC Cycle Time 2 Cool 1 to 120 seconds 20 0 Electromechanical Relays Release M DR4500A Truline Circular Chart Recorder With or Without Control Product Manual 75 May 2013 Configuration SP Ramp Set Up Groups 3 14 SP Ramp Set Up Groups The Setpoint Ramp 1 or 2 Set Up groups let you configure 2 setpoint ramps Each group SP and SP RAMP 2 can be configured one of three ways ramp rate or setpoint program Setpoint Ramp Setpoint will ramp between the current local setpoint and a final s
243. ions Upper Display Setpoint source selections 1LOCAL 2LOCAL REMOTE Lower Display SP SOURCE 3 Select the desired source A or V Select the desired setpoint source in the upper display 4 Return to control LOWR Controller assumes normal control DISP Changing the local setpoints Use the procedure in Table 5 12 to change either local setpoint value Table 5 12 Procedure for Changing the Local Setpoint Step Operation Press Action Result 1 Select the setpoint LOWR Until you see DISP Upper Display PV value Lower Display SP or SP2 and the local setpoint value 2 Change the value Aor V Change the local setpoint to the value at which you want the process maintained The deviation bargraph indicates PV deviation from setpoint Switching between setpoints 150 DR4500A Truline Circular Chart Recorder With or Without Control Product Manual Release M May 2013 Operation Setpoints You can switch between Local and Remote setpoints or between two Local setpoints when configured Use the procedure in Table 5 13 to switch between setpoints Table 5 13 Procedure for Switching Between Setpoints Step Operation Press Action Result 1 Switch between setpoints FUNC Alternately select Local setpoint 1 and Remote setpoint or switch between the 2 Local Setpoints LOWR Press appropriate key until you see the desired setpoint DISP indicated ATTENTION KEY ERROR appears in the lower display if the r
244. is held in Also A V keys will move group prompts forward or backward at a rate twice as fast Changing values quickly When Changing the value of a parameter you can adjust a more significant digit in the upper display by holding in one key A or V and pressing the other A or V at the same time e The adjustment will move one digit to the left e Press the key again and you will move one more digit to the left Restoring to the original value When you change the value or selection of a parameter while in Set Up mode and decide not to enter it press RUN HOLD once the original value or selection will be recalled Exiting Set Up mode To exit Set Up mode press the LOWR DISP key This returns the display to the same state it was in immediately preceding entry into the Set Up mode Timing out from Set Up mode If you are in Set Up mode and do not press any keys for one minute the recorder will time out and revert to the mode and display that was being used prior to entry into Set Up mode Key error When key is pressed and the prompt KEY ERROR appears in the lower display it will be for one of the following reasons parameter not available notin Set Up mode press SET UP key first e key malfunction do keyboard test operation e individual key locked out Release M May 2013 DR4500A Truline Circular Chart Recorder With or Without Control Product Manual 61
245. ius 61 3 5 Configuration Proced re siete itin ee deo oU ten d EL t 62 62 Procedure a a eee deen eh da ee 62 3 6 Inp t Set Up ts exe mmus audit 64 p 64 Function prompts ris sce euni taedium uM 64 Sf 4 Pen Set Up Group u intendit emisti miohdi e 66 InttOdUctlOn coi eR e EE FRED ERE E PE RR EB e E RU METER ERU ETE seeds 66 Function prombpts ere ee A iere ace Er ee ee EU eoe o qe ve e equ 66 3 9 Chart Set UP Group Ee ecce ete ee qe ei a Eae E e de ed 67 Introduction M EE 67 FUNCTION prompts x M 67 3 9 Ume Sat Up Group d ioo eie e E d e e teet e hes 69 INtOCUCTION P L EE 69 5 E EN pates ioa E ege cusa eet pe Seca 69 Release M DR4500A Truline Circular Chart Recorder With or Without Control Product Manual vii May 2013 3 10 Totalizer Set Up Group erred d dote erede e E 70 MEE 70 Function prombplts Due xo 70 3 11 Input Algorithm Set Up Group ie iona o eurea en aa aaeeea aai ia
246. ivolts and volts inputs except 0 10 Volts sesee emm 209 UD 210 4 20 mA InpUts teo edet Ox Coen pi PER e eigen ee cede E 211 7 6 Calibration Procedure ui entire tesi a cd Hi pe dtu nada 212 Introduction raar e CC 212 Calibration procedure sequence EEEN nere EEEn Eneee nnne 212 7 7 Printing Characteristics Adjustments ssssssssssessee eene ene eene 215 Printing characteristics adjustments cesce e a a a e a a aaae e nre nnns reist ne 215 8 Outp t Calibration ODER DR UC DDR 217 8 1 NIME RTL 217 1 eS E E LE 217 What s in this section icti dece nee eer IEEE ERO UR Srt ee koe ese EL I Et Poco ea oe ER REGE 217 8 2 Current Proportional Output Aux Out 2 and Calibration sss 218 Introductio oot orte See cette tune pom ML ontetefei toe eine Lc Ito e Deere OE Stain e 218 Equipment nieeded icr e onte PEL tui Ert COP RUD MNA SET ERG 218 Calibrator connections oca tette eer eder ieu dae E a eer eerie beans oe Eee e E nca 218 Agel DR e CI MES 219 8 3 Position Proportional and Three Position Step Output Calibration 220 Position proportional control iuter eo ne
247. jumper Refer to Section 3 Configuration position 3 Check the field wiring Refer to Section 2 Installation 4 Check that the applicable alarm relay Alarms can be triggered either by actuates properly depending on ALARM TYPE configuration selection e reconfiguring the value of the trip points AnSnVAL or e connecting a signal generator to the input and setting the generator level beyond the trip point values Table 9 18 Procedure 13 Troubleshooting Modbus communications Step What to do How to do it or where to find the data 1 Check the field wiring and termination Refer to Figure 2 21 in Section 2 Installation in resistor this manual 2 Make sure the Modbus Communications Open the recorder door and chart plate and board is properly installed in the inspect the board Refer to Figure 10 4 for recorder location of the board 3 Run a Loopback test Refer to Modbus Communications manual 51 52 25 66 for loopback information Release M May 2013 DR4500A Truline Circular Chart Recorder With or Without Control Product Manual 241 Parts List Overview 10 Parts List 10 1 Overview Introduction This section provides the replacement parts lists for the DRA500A Truline Recorder Most parts are supplied on an optimum replacement unit basis that is part numbers are given for complete printed circuit boards rather than for individual PCB components The figures that follow are exploded views of the D
248. k 00 00 to limits Time 99 59 SEG6TIME Soak Tlme 00 00 to SG21RAMP Ramp 00 to 99 59 99 59 SEG7 RAMP Ramp 00 to SG22 SP Soak SP Within SP 99 59 limits SEG8 SP Soak SP Within SP SG22TIME Soak 00 00 to limits Time 99 59 SEG8TIME Soak Time 00 00 to SG23RAMP Ramp 00 to 99 59 99 59 SEG9RAMP Ramp 00 to SG24 SP Soak SP Within SP 99 59 limits SG10 SP Soak SP Within SP SG24TIME Soak 00 00 to limits Time 99 59 SG10TIME Soak Time 00 00 to SG25RAMP Ramp 00 to 99 59 99 59 SG11RAMP Ramp 00 to SG26 SP Soak SP Within SP 99 59 limits SG12 SP Soak SP Within SP SG26TIME Soak 00 00 to limits Time 99 59 SG12TIME Soak Tlme 00 00 to SG27RAMP Ramp 00 00 to 99 59 99 59 SG13RAMP Ramp 00 to SG28 SP Soak SP Within SP 99 59 limits SG14 SP Soak SP Within SP SG28TIME Soak 00 00 to limits Time 99 59 SG14TIME Soak Tlme 00 00 to SG29RAMP Ramp 00 00 to 99 59 99 59 Release M DR4500A Truline Circular Chart Recorder With or Without Control Product Manual 189 May 2013 Setpoint Ramp Soak Programming and Operation Setpoint Program Segments Set Up Group Prompt Function Range Your Prompt Function Range Your Selection Selection 5930 SP Soak SP Within SP SG34 SP Soak SP Within SP limits limits SG30TIME Soak Time 00 00 to SG34TIME Soak 00 00 to 99 59 Time 99 59 SG31RAMP Ramp 00 00 to SG35RAMP Ramp 00 00 to 99 59 99 59 SG32 SP Soak SP Within SP SG36 SP Soak SP Within SP limits limits SG32TIME Soak Time 00 00
249. l Inputs Product Configuration 4 1 Alarm 1 Timer 2 Digital Inputs Only available with key number DR45AT AR AW Hardware Options Pasteurization Recorder Flow Safety Thermal Limit Recorder Software Options 0 None A Totalization Input 1 NOTE 1 Every 4500 recorder has all the available inputactuations stored in its nonvolatile memory B Math Only and can accept up to 4 inputs which must be specified sequentially in 1 4 entries in Table 1 E Totalization Inputs 1 amp 2 Therefore you can easily change the input actuation in the field by re wiring input connections F Fo Sterilization Calculation changing the input jumper position and reconfiguring the input type as applicable H Totalization Inputs 1 2 3 amp 4 Totalization Input 1 Math L Totalization Input 1 and 2 Math M Totalization Input 1 2 3 4 Math Figure 2 1 Model Number Interpretation Release M DR4500A Truline Circular Chart Recorder With or Without Control Product Manual 13 May 2013 Installation Model Number Interpretation Example of model number decoding Assume that the model number on the label is DR4SAT 1300 44 001 A IKNOTO 0 Using the table code definitions from Figure 2 1 this recorder has the following features and options 2 input type with thermocouple RTD Radiamatic mV 0 5 Vdc or 4 20 mA input for channel 1 0 10 Vdc input for channel 2 Two controllers wit
250. l Set Up group For Position Proportional Output follow the entire calibration procedure Make sure CONT ALG PID A and OUT ALG POSITN in the Control 1 Set Up group 220 DR4500A Truline Circular Chart Recorder With or Without Control Product Manual Release M May 2013 Output Calibration Position Proportional and Three Position Step Output Calibration Table 8 3 Position Proportional and 3 Position Step Output Calibration Procedure Step Operation Press Action Result 1 Enter Calibration Mode SET Until you see UP Upper Display CALIB Lower Display POS PROP 2 Set Motor Traverse Time FUNC Until you see NOTE This is the time it Upper Display a value takes the motor to travel Lower Display MTR TIME from 0 to 100 96 Aor V Until the proper motor stroke time is reached see the motor specs or measure the time e Range of setting 5 to 255 Seconds 3 Select Automatic or FUNC Until you see Manual Calibration Upper Display DISABL Lower Display POS PROP e You can calibrate the control output manually or let the recorder calibrate the control output automatically In the Automatic Calibration Mode DO AUTO the control relays automatically move the motor in the proper direction e If desired however the motor may be manually positioned to 0 and 100 positions Disconnect the relay wires DO MAN In the Manual Calibration Mode DO MAN the motor
251. lar Chart Recorder With or Without Control Product Manual Release M May 2013 Symbol Definitions The following table lists those symbols used in this document to denote certain conditions Symbol Definition This CAUTION symbol on the equipment refers the user to the Product Manual for additional information This symbol appears next to required information in the manual WARNING risk of electrical shock This symbol warns the user of a potential shock hazard where HAZARDOUS LIVE voltages greater than 30 Vrms 42 4 Vpeak or 60 VDC may be accessible ATTENTION Electrostatic Discharge ESD hazards Observe precautions for handling electrostatic sensitive devices gt gt gt Protective Earth PE terminal Provided for connection of the protective earth green or green yellow supply system conductor ap Functional earth terminal Used for non safety purposes such as noise immunity improvement NOTE This connection shall be bonded to protective earth at the source of supply in accordance with national local electrical code requirements Earth Ground Functional earth connection NOTE This connection shall be bonded to Protective earth at the source of supply in accordance with national and local electrical code requirements Chassis Ground Identifies a connection to the chassis or frame of the equipment shall be bonded to Protective Earth at the source of supply in accordance with national and local electrical code r
252. le 7 5 Table 7 6 Table 7 7 xviii Priority of functions that operate relays ssssssssssssssssessesseeeeenener ener enne nenne 124 Alarms Group Definitions x sat tea e D e IET e UN esed 125 Auxiliary Output Group Definitions sssssssseseeee eene ener enne enne 127 Modbus Communications Group Definitions essere ener 129 Option Group Definitions eec cete e e ea eie e a Re dn E ee aS 130 Event Message Group Definitions ccce met EE E VER REIR ERR we PEERS 132 Lockout Group Definitions x n DT RENE OO 133 Printing Characteristics Adjustment Procedure nennen 135 Power Up Diagnostic Tests ecce eer tege er TUR ten t e REI D UR REEL Cr UR VET 137 Procedure for Testing the Displays and Keys ssssssesssssesseeeeeeeeeee nennen ener 138 Procedure for Starting Up the Recorder esses nennen enne 139 Meaning of Indicators Ss Bt ten be tees 142 Lower Display Key Parameter Prompts ccc cesccesccesecesecesecseecseeeseeeseeseeeeeescenseceseeeaeeaecneceaeenaeenaeenaes 144 BtrorMeSSages etu fee ARE n Re ER UIS BIB ERR RE RUF EUR eS 145 Alarm and tuning messages sse ener ener enne nennen trennen rennen rn en nre n rris 146 Operating Mode Definitions etel e IP im Ett 148 Changing Operating Modes sess nene rr Ee a eE EE 148 Procedure for Selecting Automatic or Manual
253. le input be sure to measure the temperature at the input terminals and subtract the equivalent millivolt value for your particular thermocouple from the 0 value just prior to doing calibration For example for a Type J Thermocouple and input temperature of 68 F From 0 885 mV Type J 0 F Subtract 1 019 mV Type J 68 F To yield 1 904 mV calibrator output for INn ZERO 3 Calibrate 100 FUNC You will see Upper Display APPLY Lower Display INn SPAN 1 2 3 or 4 Adjust your calibration device to an output signal equal to the 100 range value for your particular input sensor see Table 7 2 for voltage or resistance equivalents wait 30 seconds and If Then you are calibrating a Go to thermocouple input step 4 you are calibrating other than a Go to thermocouple input step 5 Using Ambient ATTENTION g ATTENTION If you are using the Ambient Temperature Method Temperature method to calibrate a thermocouple input be sure to measure the temperature at the input terminals and subtract the equivalent millivolt value for your particular thermocouple from the 100 96 value For example for a Type J Thermocouple and input temperature of 68 F From 50 059 mV Type J 1600 F Subtract 1 019 mV Type J 68 F To yield 49 040 mV calibrator output for INn SPAN Release M DR4500A Truline Circular Chart Recorder With or Without
254. libration Set Up and Wiring for PV Inputs Thermocouple inputs using the ambient temperature method Refer to Figure 7 5 and wire the recorder according to the procedure given in Table 7 8 Table 7 8 Set Up Wiring Procedure for Thermocouple Inputs Using the Ambient Temperature Method Step Action 1 Connect the copper wire to the Precision Millivolt Source see Figure 7 5 2 Connect the other end of the copper wire to the clamp type terminals in the plug for the applicable input connector J2 3 Reinstall the plug into the input connector J2 on the applicable circuit board for input 1 input 2 input 3 or input 4 Adjust calibration voltages to compensate for measured ambient temperature Calibration source 21446 Ambient temperature method z TIC poof Connector plug J2 for OOO RID inputs 1 2 3 and 4 Be sure W1 MA Be sure W3 jumper jumper is in position is in position T C W1 on the input board on the input board Figure 7 5 Calibration Set Up Diagram for Thermocouple Inputs using the Ambient Temperature Method Release M DR4500A Truline Circular Chart Recorder With or Without Control Product Manual 207 May 2013 Input Calibration Calibration Set Up and Wiring for PV Inputs RTD Resistance Thermometer Device inputs Refer to Figure 7 6 and wire the recorder according to the procedure given in Table 7 9 Table 7 9 Set Up Wiring Procedure for RTD Inputs St
255. lication related problems cierre iere eite Ere 226 Hardware and software related problems 226 9 2 Troubleshooting AdS eene eene nennen nennen nennen een nennen nennen 227 SRo lelo gres le ERREUR E 227 Visual failure symptoms nce eret n ei Hee e RO vite e Tee En epe eoe ec xe Roe epe dee eds 227 Gheck InstallatiOno rA rci eerte oA Liane EE CR Deep ci eens 227 C stomer SUPPOM ices ses 227 Determining the software version cccccceecceceeeeeeeeeeaeceeeeeeeeeaaaeeeeeeeseceeeaeeeeeeeseseaaaeaeeeeeeeseeaeeesesecseaeeeeeeeeeeeeea 228 Tro bleshodtiNg e 228 9 3 Self Diagnostics eaves ties 229 Power up tests e eim teneo e qe eie tee 229 EIL 229 BI Te UH dc 230 Error message promlbpts drsni oen eite Die Dicet deceat eee te D eben ie 231 9 4 Visual Failure Symptoms nennen mener enne nnns 235 ETT 235 235 9 5 Troubleshooting
256. limited by the range of units selected here 96 DR4500A Truline Circular Chart Recorder With or Without Control Product Manual Release M May 2013 Configuration Parameter Definitions Input Parameters Set Up Group Lower Display Prompt Upper Display Range of Setting or Selection Parameter Definition INn LO n 1 2 3 or 4 999 9 to 9999 or 999 to 9999 in Engineering units INPUT LOW RANGE VALUE in engineering units is displayed for all inputs but can only be configured for linear or square root transmitter characterization e Otherwise this is a read only display of the low range value for the selected T C or RTD input including transmitter characterization if applicable e Scale the input signal to the display value you want for 0 See example on previous page The control setpoint for Input will be limited by the range of units selected here CUTOFF n n 1 2 3 or 4 0 to 100 of Input Range LOW FLOW CUTOFF Lets you set a value in percent of range below which the applicable totalizer does not increment ATTENTION Prompt appears only if totalizer option is present in the recorder BIASn n 1 4 999 9 to 9999 INPUT COMPENSATION used to compensate the input for drift of an input value due to deterioration of a sensor or some other cause select the value you want on the input FILTER n 0 to 120 seconds FILTER FOR INPUT a software digital filter is
257. low e You can also configure the two setpoints to alarm on the same event and to alarm both high and low if desired An adjustable hysteresis of 0 0 to 100 0 15 configurable for each alarm Priority of functions that operate relays During alarm conditions an alarm will deenergize its associated relay unless a higher priority function has been configured for that relay See Table 3 13 If you want the alarm to control the relay do not configure a higher priority function Table 3 13 Priority of functions that operate relays Relay Relay is controlled by in order of priority 1 Timer function 2 Alarm 1 2 Alarm 2 only 3 1 Controller 1 output algorithms Relay Simplex Position Proportional Relay Duplex Current Relay Duplex 2 Alarm 3 4 1 Controller 1 output algorithms Position Proportional Relay Duplex Current Relay Duplex 2 Alarm 4 5 1 Controller 2 output algorithms Relay Simplex Position Proportional Relay Duplex Current Relay Duplex 2 Alarm 5 6 1 Controller 2 output algorithms Position Proportional Relay Duplex Current Relay Duplex 2 Alarm 6 78 DR4500A Truline Circular Chart Recorder With or Without Control Product Manual Release M May 2013 Configuration Alarms Set Up Group Function prompts Table 3 14 lists all the function prompts in the Alarms Set Up group Table 3 14 Alarms Group Function Prompts Function Promp
258. lt 1 Enter Calibration Mode SET Until you see UP Upper Display CALIB Lower Display CURRENT 2 Calibrate 0 FUNC You will see Upper Display a value approximately 380 Lower Display ZERO VAL V Until the desired 0 output is read on the milliammeter Use the values shown below depending on the action of your recorder 4mA For4to 20 mA Direct Action 20 mA For 4 to 20 mA Reverse Action 3 Calibrate 100 96 FUNC Stores the 0 value and you will see Upper Display a value approximately 1890 Lower Display SPAN VAL or V Until the desired 100 output is read on the milliammeter Use the values shown below depending on the action of your recorder 20 mA For 4 to 20 mA Direct Action 4mA For 4 20 mA Reverse Action 4 Exit the Calibration Mode FUNC The recorder stores the span value LOWR To exit the calibration mode DISP or SET UP Release M DR4500A Truline Circular Chart Recorder With or Without Control Product Manual 219 May 2013 Output Calibration Position Proportional and Three Position Step Output Calibration 8 3 Position Proportional and Three Position Step Output Calibration Position proportional control When the DR4500A Recorder has a position proportional control output calibrate the recorder so that the increase and decrease relays operate properly with respect to the position of the external feedback slidewire 3 Position Step control This mod
259. lure symptoms WARNING Do not lubricate the plastic gears on the chart and pen motors Step What to do How to do it or where to find the data 1 Check the sensor for the proper type and Verify the input configuration data and operation its ability to function of the sensor 2 Recalibrate the recorder Refer to Section 7 Input Calibration For thermocouple input be sure to confirm cold junction temperature calibration 3 Replace the servo plate assembly Refer to the instructions included with the replacement part 4 Call Technical Assistance Center 1 800 423 9883 USA and Canada Table 9 8 Procedure 3 Troubleshooting chart rotation failure symptoms WARNING Do not lubricate the plastic gears on the chart and pen motors Step What to do How to do it or where to find the data 1 Check the chart installation Be sure the drive pin on the hub is in the drive hole on the chart 2 Check the configured chart speed value Refer to Section 3 Configuration and change it if required 3 Check the motor cable plug connection Visually examine the plug and reset it at connector J7 on the main printed circuit board 4 Replace the chart motor Refer to the instructions included with the replacement part 5 Call Technical Assistance Center 1 800 423 9883 USA and Canada Release M May 2013 DR4500A Truline Circular Chart Recorder With or Without Control Product Manual 237 T
260. mat along with a rotating clock character TREM Time remaining If the clock rotation is clockwise elapsed time is indicated F1 O OO Elased time If the clock rotation is counterclockwise time left is indicated TU L1 00 RESET RH KEY Timer resets with the keyboard Run Hold key ALARM 1 Timer resets with Alarm 1 REPEAT In Repeat Mode the timer restarts immediately upon timeout and activates the relay for 1 to 5 seconds ON TIME 1 SEC Relay 1 on time when timer is in repeat mode 2 SEC 3 SEC 4 SEC 5 SEC INCRMENT MINUTE Select the units of the timer SECOND Release M DR4500A Truline Circular Chart Recorder With or Without Control Product Manual 123 May 2013 Configuration Parameter Definitions Alarms Set Up Group 4 12 Alarms Set Up Group Introduction An alarm is an indication that an event that you have configured for example Process Variable has exceeded one or more alarm limits There are six alarms available each with two setpoints You can configure each of these two setpoints to alarm on various controller parameters There are two alarm output selections high and low You can configure each setpoint to alarm either high or low These are called single alarms You can also configure the two setpoints to alarm on the same event and to alarm both high and low An adjustable hysteresis of 0 0 to 100 0 is configurable for each alarm setpoint Priority of
261. mbly Chassis ground Note the Pen motor cable is connected to J5 for recorders with Jewel Pen amp firmware revision greater than or equal to 10 64 Optical sensor Pen drive Chart drive Password 30755119 001 Send vd cable Alarm d me E Pen stylus output 2 wire gray pair 2 wire purple pair orange 2 wire black pair 21466 Figure 10 5 Internal cabling for DR4500A Truline recorder 250 DR4500A Truline Circular Chart Recorder With or Without Control Product Manual Release M May 2013 Parts List Internal Wiring Diagram Options Only 10 5 Internal Wiring Diagram Options Only View of internal option wiring Figure 10 6 is a view of the internal wiring diagram options only for the DR4500A Truline Recorder 9 position keyboard cable TABLE 1 Conn Designation on Destinaton Bd WHT Bu 2 BRN 2 Control Output 1 ORG 2 Control Output 2 Communication Card No RS485 422 Connection Auxiliary Output Communication RS485 422 Processor Card VIO Light Chart motor option Chart Plate Female Conn GRN WHT BLK RED Main transformer T1 See Table 1 for connections 2 wire pair Dual Connector Male Female Conn Conn Control Output 1 es Card OR Auxiliary Output Card Alarm digital inputs J2 1 Control Output
262. me in hours at which Wake Time Event occurs WAKE DAY 0 to 31 WAKE DAY Wake time specifies time in days at which Wake Time Event occurs ATTENTION If day is set to 0 the wake up day and month are ignored and only a successful match of the hours and minutes will cause the event WAKE MON 1 to 12 WAKE MONTH Wake time specifies time in months at which Wake Time Event occurs Release M DR4500A Truline Circular Chart Recorder With or Without Control Product Manual 103 May 2013 Configuration Parameter Definitions Total Parameters Set Up Group 4 6 Total Parameters Set Up Group Introduction The functions listed in this group deal with the calculation and display of the total flow volume as measured by Input 1 Total 1 or Input 2 Total 2 The displayed value is eight digits with a configurable scale factor Totalizer 1 and 2 group prompts Table 4 5 lists all the function prompts in the Totalizer 1 and 2 Set Up group and their definitions Table 4 5 Totalizer Group Definitions Lower Display Prompt Upper Display Range of Setting or Selection Parameter Definition Actual Current totalized value Current scale factor Example E1 GPM VIEW CURRENT TOTALIZED VALUE this selection lets you view the current totalized value In the example shown E1 represents exponential value of total total times 101 GPM represents total engineering units selected
263. mp 4 W1 on the input board is in position T C on the input board Figure 7 3 Calibration Set Up Diagram for Thermocouple Inputs Using an Ice Bath Release M DR4500A Truline Circular Chart Recorder With or Without Control Product Manual 205 May 2013 Input Calibration Calibration Set Up and Wiring for PV Inputs Thermocouple inputs using a compensated calibrator method Refer to Figure 7 4 and wire the recorder according to the procedure given in Table 7 7 Table 7 7 Set Up Wiring Procedure for Thermocouple Inputs Using a Compensated Calibrator Method Step Action 1 Connect the thermocouple extension wire to the Precision Compensated Calibrator see Figure 7 4 2 Connect the other end of the thermocouple extension wires to the clamp type terminals in the plug for the applicable input connector J2 3 Reinstall the plug into the input connector J2 on the applicable circuit board for Input 1 Input 2 Input 3 or Input 4 Compensated Thermocouple Calibrator extension wires 21445 TIC O RTD Be sure W3 jumper is in position T C on the input board Connector plug J2 for Be sure W1 MA inputs 1 2 3 amp 4 jumper is in position W1 on the input board Figure 7 4 Calibration Set Up Diagram for Thermocouple Inputs Using a Compensated Calibrator Method 206 DR4500A Truline Circular Chart Recorder With or Without Control Product Manual Release M May 2013 Input Calibration Ca
264. mps for the applicable input type See Figure 2 13 for specific input actuation plug wiring Tighten the screws to secure the wires 11 Insert the wired plug into J2 12 Repeat steps 2 through 11 for input 2 3 and 4 printed circuit boards as applicable Release M DR4500A Truline Circular Chart Recorder With or Without Control Product Manual 33 May 2013 Installation Input Wiring Procedures Required for CE Mark Conformity Kit Part No 51197612 502 contains two ferrite filters Part No 51197612 508 contains 8 ferrite filters Install inside of case See Figure 2 11 Capacitor Kit 51197755 001 Install capacitors as shown in figure 34 Ferrite Filter P N 0443164151 orequiakit 2145 Thermocouple 01 pF qb Capacitors J i D HP 0047 Capacitor Capacitors Radiam atic mV or 0 5 395 05 A 01 pF Capacitor mM or Volt source Be sure that thermocouple extension wire matches thermocouple type Keep resistance of all wires equal Use 18 gauge copper wire for lengths up to NOTE For T C or RTD input calibrate 150 feet recorder to achieve stated accuracy Fortwo wire RTD jumper terminal 1 to 3 See Section 7 input Calibration Figure 2 13 Thermocouple RTD Radiamatic mV or 0 5 Vdc Input Wiring DR4500A Truline Circular Chart Recorder With or Without Control Product Manual Release M
265. n MANUAL When switched to manual mode the recorder holds its output at the last value used during automatic operation and stops adjusting the output for changes in setpoint or process variable Instead you adjust the output by changing the value shown in the lower display See Selecting Modes AUTOMATIC with In automatic local mode the recorder operates from the local setpoint and LOCAL SETPOINT automatically adjusts the output to maintain the setpoint at the desired value In this mode you can adjust the setpoint See Setpoints AUTOMATIC with In automatic remote mode the recorder operates from the setpoint measured at REMOTE input 2 SETPOINT Adjustments are available to ratio this input and add a constant bias before it is applied to the control equation See Subsection 3 12 Control Set Up Group What happens when you change modes Table 5 9 explains what happens to the recorder when you switch from one mode to another Table 5 9 Changing Operating Modes Operating Mode Definition Manual to The local setpoint is usually the value previously stored as the local setpoint Automatic Local Setpoint Manual or Auto The second input value with ratio and bias applied is used to calculate the Local to Automatic control setpoint Remote SP Automatic Remote If configured for RSP Tracking when the recorder transfers out of remote SP to Manual or setpoint the last value of the control setpoint is in
266. n Dieses Symbol warnt den Benutzer vor eventueller Ber hrungsgefahr wo lebensgef hrliche Spannungen zug nglich sein k nnen Sch tzende Erdung F r den Anschluf der sch tzenden Erdung der Versorgungssystemleitung Of gt e Bei Benutzung der Ausr stungen auf nicht vom Hersteller angegebene Art und Weise kann der von der Ausr stung gewahrleistete Schutz beeintr chtigt werden e Ersetzen Sie keine Komponente oder Teil die das nicht ausdr cklich vom Lieferanten als ersetzbar angegeben ist e Die gesamte Verkabelung mu den rtlichen Normen entsprechen und von zugelassenem erfahrenem Personal durchgef hrt werden e Die Erde mu vor allen anderen Kabeln angeschlossen und zuletzt abgeklemmt werden e In der Nahe der Ausr stung mu ein Schalter in der Hauptstromversorgung vorhanden sein AUSR STUNGSDATEN Netzspannung 102 bis 132 Vac oder 204 bis 264 Vac Frequenz 50 60 Hz Nennleistung 20 watts max UMGEBUNGSBEDINGUNGEN Betreiben Sie das Ger t nicht in Gegenwart entflammbarer Fl ssigkeiten oder D mpfe Der Betrieb elektrischer Ger te in solchen Umgebungen stellt ein Sicherheitsrisiko dar Temperatur Umgebung 0 bis 55 C Feuchtigkeit 5 bis 90 RH 40 C Vibration 0 bis 200 Hz Beschleunigung 0 2 g ANBRINGUNG DER AUSR STUNGEN Der Regler mu in ein Pult eingebaut sein damit der Bediener nicht zu oft auf die hinteren Anschl sse zugreifen muB Release M DR4500A Truline Circular Chart Recorder Wit
267. n the Modbus Communications Set Up group Table 3 16 Modbus Communications Group Function Prompts Function Prompt Function Name Selections or Range of Setting Factory Lower Display Upper Display Setting ComSTATE Modbus Communications DISABL DISABL MODBUS Com ADDR Communications Station 1 to 99 1 Address BAUD Communications Baud Rate 300 9600 600 1200 2400 4800 9600 19200 38400 XMT DLAY Transmit Delay NONE NONE in milliseconds 10MSEC 20MSEC 30MSEC 40MSEC 50MSEC DBL BYTE Double Byte Order FPB FPB FP BB FPL FP LB Release M DR4500A Truline Circular Chart Recorder With or Without Control Product Manual 81 May 2013 Configuration Options Set Up Group 3 19 Options Set Up Group Introduction This data deals with various options that are available with your recorder If your recorder does not have any of these options the prompts will not appear Function prompts Table 3 17 lists all the function prompts in the Option Set Up group Table 3 17 Options Group Function Prompts Function Prompt Function Name Selections or Range of Setting Factory Lower Display Upper Display Setting REJ FREQ Rejection Frequency 50HZ 60HZ 60HZ HF REJ High Frequency Rejection ENABLE ENABLE DISABL RELHUMID Relative Humidity NO NO YES ATMPRES Atmospheric Pressure 590 to 800 mmHg Compensation DEVIATION Deviation Recording Action NONE NONE SETPNT CHAN1
268. nctions that is Pen functions Chart Trace Gain Rate Reset Output Alarms etc Application related problems Review the application of the recorder then if necessary direct your questions to the local sales office Hardware and software related problems Use the troubleshooting error message prompts and recorder failure symptoms to identify typical failures which may occur in the recorder Follow the troubleshooting procedures to correct them 226 DR4500A Truline Circular Chart Recorder With or Without Control Product Manual Release M May 2013 Troubleshooting Service Troubleshooting Aids 9 2 Troubleshooting Aids Self diagnostics The DR4500A recorder runs self diagnostic tests to monitor the recorder s general health The tests are divided into three main groups and will produce an error message when failed An error message can occur e at power up run when power is cycled off and on e during continuous background tests while in normal operation and e when the Status Tests are requested by the operator Table 9 4 lists all the error message prompts that you could see the reason for the failure and how to correct the problem Visual failure symptoms Other failures may occur that deal with the power pen functions chart rotation output or alarms Refer to the visual failure symptom in Table 9 5 to determine what is wrong and the troubleshooting procedures to use to correct the problem Check Installat
269. nfiguration Parameter Definitions Input Parameters Set Up Group 4 2 Input Parameters Set Up Group Introduction These are the parameters required for input 1 2 3 or 4 temperature units decimal location actuation transmitter characterization high and low range values in engineering units input compensation filter and burnout Input group prompts Table 4 1 lists all the function prompts in the Input 1 2 3 or 4 setup group and their definitions Table 4 1 Input Group Definitions Lower Display Upper Display Parameter Definition Prompt Range of Setting or Selection Input n n 1 4 ENABLE DISABLE parameter DECIMAL DECIMAL POINT LOCATION This selection determines where the decimal point appears in the display XXXX None XXX X One Place XX XX Two Places X XXX Three Places NOTE Auto ranging will occur when one decimal position has been selected and the value increases above 999 9 but auto ranging will not similarly occur when two decimal positions are selected UNITS TEMPERATURE UNITS This selection will be indicated on the PV display If you select EU go to prompt ENGUNITS DEG F Degrees Fahrenheit DEG Degrees Celsius EU Engineering Units ENGUNITS ENGINEERING UNITS Make up 5 selections to create unit identifier 0 to 9 AtoZ e For example create unit identifier H2O by selecting an H from A to Z a 2 from 0 to 9 and an from A toZ MNT e For
270. ng prompts GAIN RATE RESET OUT1ALG The OUTPUT ALGORITHM lets you select the type of output you want Not applicable with Control Algorithm prompt 3PSTEP ATTENTION it the recorder has two controllers both enabled OUT1ALG applies for controller 1 and OUT2ALG applies for controller 2 Selections are model dependent For example current output models cannot be configured for Time Proportioning Simplex Output TIME RELAY SIMPLEX type of output using one SPDT relay Its normally open NO or normally closed NC contacts are selected by positioning an internal jumper e Other prompts affected OUT HYST e Controller 1 uses Relay 3 and overrides control of relay by Alarm 3 Controller 2 uses Relay 5 and overrides control of relay by Alarm 5 CURRNT CURRENT SIMPLEX type of output using one 4 to 20 mA signal that can be fed into a positive or negative grounded load of 0 to 1000 ohms The signal can be recalibrated for any desired range from 3 25 mA to 21 mA for 0 96 to 100 96 output 116 DR4500A Truline Circular Chart Recorder With or Without Control Product Manual Release M May 2013 Configuration Parameter Definitions Control Parameters Set Up Group OUT1ALG continued POSITN POSITION PROPORTIONAL SIMPLEX type of output using two SPDT relays and a motor which has a 100 to 1000 ohms feedback slidewire Automatically selected when CONT ALG 3P
271. nitions Table A 2 Options group function prompts continued from Section 3 Table 3 17 Function Prompt Function Name Selections or Range of Setting Factory Lower Display Upper Display Setting STERILIZ Fo Sterilization Time YES NO IN TEMP Input for Product INPUT 1 Temperature INPUT 2 INPUT 3 INPUT 4 STDTEMP Standard Reference 0 1 to 9999 Temperature Z VALUE Thermal Resistance 0 1 to 9999 REM SW Remote Switching NONE TO MAN from AUTO TO LSP from REMOTE TO 2SP from LSP TO DIR from REV TO HOLD from RUN TUNE FO RST REM SW2 Remote Switching digital NONE input 2 FO RST 256 DR4500A Truline Circular Chart Recorder With or Without Control Product Manual Release M May 2013 Model DR45AR Options Configuration Table A 3 Option group definitions continued from Section 4 Table 4 15 Lower Display Upper Display Parameter Definition Prompt Range of Setting or Selection STERILIZ YES activates Fo sterilization Fo STERILIZATION TIME This function computes calculation equivalent sterilization time by accumulating lethality NO rates for a product over each 1 3 or 2 3 second scan interval of the recorder using this equation Tb Ts Ts t 1 dtX10 Where Ts sterilization time in minutes Ts 1 previous sterilization time dt time interval 1 3 or 2 3 second NOTE 1 3 second if less than 3 configured inputs 2 3 second if greater than 2 confi
272. nockout locations ATTENTION The knockouts are really plugs that you just have to push out to remove Side View Bottom View C Or X 21405 Figure 2 4 How to Remove Knockouts Release M May 2013 DR4500A Truline Circular Chart Recorder With or Without Control Product Manual 17 Installation Mounting Methods Mounting flush in panel New panel cutout Refer to Figure 2 5 and follow the procedure in Table 2 3 to make a new cutout in a panel and mount your recorder in the cutout Table 2 3 Mounting Flush in a New Panel Cutout Step Action 1 At the appropriate location make a square cutout in the panel measuring 12 7 0 060 inches by 12 7 0 060 inches 322 58 1 52 by 322 58 1 52 millimeters See Figure 2 3 2 Orient the recorder case properly and slide it into the cutout from the front of the panel Support the recorder as shown in steps 3 and 4 3 Refer to Figure 2 5 From the back of the panel attach a mounting bracket to each side of the recorder case using a 1 4 20 x 1 2 inch hex screw and a lockwasher for each bracket mounting hardware supplied with recorder Leave the screws slightly loose so you can adjust the brackets 4 While holding the recorder firmly against the panel slide each bracket against the back of the panel and tighten the screws Hex screw 1 4 20 x 1 2 inch and washer Figure 2 5 Mounting Flush in a New Panel Cutout 18 DR4500A Truline Circula
273. not extend into the recorder enclosure The shield of the communication cable should be connected to earth ground at the farthest end on the cable Optional communication 2 For non CE Mark applications use shielded twisted pair cables Belden 4271 Twinax or equivalent instruments Maximum 15 Figure 2 21 RS485 Modbus Communications Wiring Place 120 ohm resistor on last device between Tx Rx communications Release M DR4500A Truline Circular Chart Recorder With or Without Control Product Manual May 2013 51 Installation Option Wiring Procedures 4 20 mA auxiliary output wiring You can wire an auxiliary output for 4 20 mA The prerequisites are Model Number Table 3 1XX or 4XX Refer to Figure 2 22 and follow the procedure in Table 2 22 to wire 4 20 mA auxiliary output Table 2 22 4 20 mA Auxiliary Output Wiring Step Action Open the recorder door Loosen the captive screw in the chart plate and swing the plate out Locate connector J2 near the bottom of the auxiliary output printed circuit board refer to Figure 2 22 for location Remove the unwired plug from J2 Run the output wires through the desired knockout For CE Mark conformity install the ferrite filter as shown in Figure 2 11 Strip insulation from the end of each wire Loosen the screws in plug J2 terminals and position the plug as you would to plug it into J2 Observing the polarity insert
274. nstants Likewise it assumes tuning at Local SP 2 will cause a Cooling demand and the cooling parameters will be entered as the second set of PID constants Procedure After ACCUTUNE has been enabled in the tuning set up group as described in Section 4 use the procedure in Table 5 22 to start tuning Note that control group parameter SP SOURC must be set to 2LOCAL to enable the second setpoint To abort tuning in progress press the MAN AUTO key to take the recorder out of Auto mode The message AbRT abort will be displayed as the value of tuning set up group parameter AT ERR The tuning parameters will retain the values they had at the start of the Accutune operation Table 5 22 Procedure for Using Accutune for Duplex Control Step Press Action Result Heating Tuning 1 DISP Until you see Setpoint 1 Lower Display SP nnn 2 A Until the value of Setpoint 1 is at the desired value within the Heat zone Make sure the recorder is Auto mode indicator lit v If not use the MAN AUTO RESET key to put the unit in Auto 3 DISP Until you see Lower Display UseSPn This is the prompt used to select the setpoint If it is not USESP1 use or Wto switch to USESP1 4 DISP Until you see Lower Display TUNExOFF 1 or 2 If TUNExOFF tune off does not appear then Accutune is not enabled or to toggle to Lower Display TUNExON x 1 or 2 Tuning will be
275. nt intend eth t denne nnde den denen Lean 150 Setpoint selection iridication 2 2 ocio i recited ose Ee suse Ere eL Eon Te SR Ed ue ecd ese e dee 151 5 4 Single Setpolnt Ramp eee df ete de Lea et ers 152 Configuring the Setpoint ramp sis h nnns isset ne 152 eet itr tpe ite dedi dhe i i tid ettet ege Mese Su dene o Mee nde 152 Running 8 1 nnnm nennen ennemi nenne internen ern enter enne nnne 153 urere didt oi ea ee e nete gig ve io bagues oe 153 DR4500A Truline Circular Chart Recorder With or Without Control Product Manual Release M May 2013 5 8 Using Two Sets of Tuning Constants PID 155 IATOGUCTION ER 155 I eWieRlls c r 155 SOLSWICHOVEN VAIUC ys EE 155 Set tuning constant values for each set nennen nennen nennen neret nennen nnn ener 156 Switch between two sets via the keyboard without automatic 157 29 Using Accutunelll endete neue 158 WMO lere PEN 158 Starting and Stopping Tuning with Accutune
276. ocouple inputs using the ambient temperature method 209 Error Cannot open file referenced on page 5 292 DR4500A Truline Circular Chart Recorder With or Without Control Product Manual Release M May 2013 Index Release M DR4500A Truline Circular Chart Recorder With or Without Control Product Manual 293 May 2013 Index Sales and Service For application assistance current specifications pricing or name of the nearest Authorized Distributor contact one of the offices below ASIA PACIFIC EMEA NORTH AMERICA SOUTH AMERICA TAC hfs tac Phone 80012026455 or 44 Honeywell Process Solutions Honeywell do Brazil amp Cia support honeywell com 0 1202645583 Phone 1 800 423 9883 Phone 55 11 7266 1900 Australia FAT 0 1344 095594 Or 1 800 343 0228 FAX 55 11 7266 1905 Honeywell Limited Email Sales sc cp apps Email Sales ask Email Sales ask Phone 61 7 3846 1255 salespab2 honeywell com ssc honeywell com or ssc honeywell com or FAX 61 7 3840 6481 9r TAC hfs tac TAC hfs tac Toll Free 1300 36 39 36 TAC hfs tac Toll Free Fax support honeywell com 1300 36 04 70 support honeywell com China PRC Shanghai Honeywell China Inc Phone 86 21 5257 4568 Fax 86 21 6237 2826 Singapore Honeywell Pte Ltd Phone 65 6580 3278 Fax 65 6445 3033 South Korea Honeywell Korea Co Ltd Phone 822 799 6114 Fax 822 792 9015 Honeywell Honeyw
277. oint is LESS than the value set at prompt SW VALUE the recorder will use Gain 2 Rate 2 Reset 2 and Cycle 2 e Other prompts affected SW VALUE SW VALUE 999 0 to 9999 AUTOMATIC SWITCHOVER VALUE this is the value of process variable or setpoint at which the recorder will switch from Tuning Constant Set 2 to Set 1 Only appears when PID SETS selections 2PV SW or 2SP SW are selected SP SOURC SETPOINT SOURCE this selection determines what your setpoint source will be One local or Two local Toggled by the SETPOINT SELECT key 1LOCAL LOCAL SETPOINT the setpoint entered from the keyboard or from the setpoint program REMOTE 2LOCAL REMOTE SETPOINT a signal is brought in through the second input printed circuit board connector J2 and used as the control setpoint f you select REMOTE Input 3 is automatically assigned as your RSP source for CONTROL 1 INPUT 4 is assigned for CONTROL 2 However if the unit has only 2 inputs then RSP will be on input 2 e Ratio and Bias can be applied to the remote setpoint Mutually exclusive with 2 Local setpoints e Other prompts affected RATIO BIAS TWO LOCAL SETPOINTS this selection lets you switch between two local setpoints Mutually exclusive with Remote setpoint OUT2 Only for Loop 1 Setpoint is the output of Control Loop 2 RATIO 110 20 00 to 20 00 RATIO used wh
278. ompt RSETABLE to EXT SWI or EXT SW2 Displaying the totalizer value Follow the procedure in Table 5 27 to display the totalizer value Table 5 27 Procedure for Displaying the Totalizer Value Step Operation Press Action Result 1 Alternating Totalizer LOWR Until you see Display DISP Upper Display VALUE Lower Display total value ATTENTION When two totalizers are configured notice that channels 1 and 2 totalizer values are alternately displayed 2 Display Channel 1 or V Until CHN 1 indicator lights totalizer Upper Display 1TPV VALUE Lower Display total value 3 Display Channel 2 Aor V Until CHN 2 indicator lights totalizer Upper Display 2TPV VALUE Lower Display total value 4 Return to Alternating and V You will see Display simultaneously Upper Display SCAN Lower Display total value After the keys are released the upper display alternately shows 1 2 PV values while lower display shows 1 Z2 totalization values 5 Return to Normal PV LOWR Returns to normal PV display Display DISP Release M DR4500A Truline Circular Chart Recorder With or Without Control Product Manual 165 May 2013 Operation Monitoring the External Event Operation 5 14 Monitoring the External Event Operation Event pen function If Function prompt PEN 1IN under Set up prompt PEN 1 has been configured as DGTL1 or DGTL2 the pen channel operates as an
279. ompts used when SP DISABL PROG is enabled are included in Section 6 Setpoint Ramp Soak Programming and Operation 122 DR4500A Truline Circular Chart Recorder With or Without Control Product Manual Release M May 2013 Configuration Parameter Definitions Timer Set Up Group 4 11 Timer Set Up Group Introduction The Timer gives a countdown or elapsed time after which Relay 1 energizes If Timer is enabled it has exclusive control over Relay 1 that 15 Alarm 1 will not control the relay Timer group prompts Table 4 10 lists all the function prompts in the Timer setup group and their definitions Table 4 10 Timer Group Definitions Lower Display Upper Display Parameter Definition Prompt Range of Setting or Selection TIMER ENABLE Enables or disables the timer option DISABL PERIOD 0 00 to 99 59 Configures the length of the timeout period from 0 to 99 hours 59 minutes START RH KEY Timer starts with the keyboard Run Hold key ALARM 2 Timer starts with Alarm 2 TIME Wake time parameter Starts timer when the value configured for the Wake Time Event is reached See WAKE MIN WAKE HR WAKE DAY WAKE MON in the Time Set Up group The Timer can also be started by a discrete input REM SW or REM SW2 These prompts are found under the Control Set Up Group LDISPLAY Select whether time remaining TREM or elapsed time ET is displayed for the timer option The time is shown on the lower display in hh mm for
280. on for TOTAL 2 Release M May 2013 DR4500A Truline Circular Chart Recorder With or Without Control Product Manual 105 Configuration Parameter Definitions Input Algorithm Set Up Group 4 7 Input Algorithm Set Up Group Introduction The Input Algorithm Set Up Group lets you apply various math algorithms to the inputs Prompts Table 4 6 lists all the function prompts in the Input Algorithm set up group and their functions Table 4 6 Input Algorithm Group Definitions Lower Display Upper Display Parameter Definition Prompt Range of Setting or Selection INP ALG INPUT ALGORITHM has the following selections from which to choose ATTENTION input is disabled the corresponding term is set to 1 except if the Summer A B C is selected in which case the term is set to 0 The calculated PV1 can be the pen 1 4 source as well as the input to totalizer 1 The ratio and bias values are still applied so that the term corresponding to the unused input can be made into any constant value NONE NONE No algorithm configured A B C NOTE 1 SUMMER WITH RATIO AND BIAS The following formula applies PV Input IxRatio A Bias Input 2xRatio B Bias Input 3xRatio C Bias C VA B C NOTE 1 MULTIPLIER DIVIDER WITH SQUARE ROOT The following formula applies PV Kx Error x NA B C NOTE 1 MULTIPLIER WITH SQUARE ROOT The following formula applies
281. on the Truline Recorder the height and width values entered are in inches except if a Metric Flow Rate was selected then the values are in centimeters This provides better accuracy V NOTCH WEIR 30 DEG Q 0 676 H cubic feet per second 60 DEG Q 1 42 H2 440 cubic feet per second 90 DEG Q 2 49 H2 475 cubic feet per second 120 DEG 4 33 cubic feet per second RECTANGULAR WEIR 3 33 W 0 2H H1 5 cubic feet per second ATTENTION Width must be greater than three times the height CIPOLLETTI WEIR Q 3 37W H 5 cubic feet per second PARSHALL FLUME Throat Width Flow ft3 sec 1 inch 0 338 H 55 cubic feet per second 2 inches Q 0 676 H 55 cubic feet per second 3 inches Q 0 993 H 547 cubic feet per second 6 inches Q 2 060 H138 cubic feet per second 9 inches Q 3 068 H 53 cubic feet per second X inchesQ 4 W H 1 522 w0 026 cubic feet per second X is greater than 12 inches EXAMPLE Customer has a 3 inch Parshall Flume and measures height as two feet Flow is calculated as 0 993 2 1 547 2 9 cubic feet per second Continued on next page 272 DR4500A Truline Circular Chart Recorder With or Without Control Product Manual Release M May 2013 Model DR45AW References Reference Continued Flow equations Continued Release M May 2013 PALMER BOWLUS FLUME Type Flow ft sec 4 inches Q 1 73 H 00588 9573 6 inches Q 2 071 H 4 8 inches
282. onfiguration Parameter Definitions Chart Parameters Set Up Group 4 4 Chart Parameters Set Up Group Introduction The functions listed in this group deal with how the chart will be set up It includes time divisions speed name rotation header remote activation and wake time parameters that have to be set for the proper chart function A CAUTION Before making any configuration changes to the Chart Set Up group place the recorder in Chart Hold Press the CHART key to stop the chart rotation Press again after configuration entry is made Chart group prompts Table 4 3 lists all the function prompts in the chart parameters setup group and their definitions Table 4 3 Chart Parameters Group Definitions Lower Display Upper Display Parameter Definition Prompt Range of Setting or Selection CHRTSPD CHART SPEED This is the time it will take to drive the chart one complete revolution 8HR 8 Hour revolution 12HR 12 Hour revolution 24HR 24 Hour revolution 7DAYS 7 Day revolution XHR X hour revolution make Hours per Revolution selection at prompt HOUR REV ATTENTION If the chart speed selection is 8 hr 8 division 12 hr 12 division 24 hr 24 division 7 day 14 division or 7 day 21 division then standard chart has been selected This means that the chart will be printed with the time lines on the hour Limited information will be printed on the chart during the first incomplete segment followin
283. onfiguring the Setpoint Ramp 1 or 2 parameters The procedure for Setpoint Program is in Section 6 Setpoint Ramp Soak Programming and Operation Table 5 15 Procedure for Configuring a Single Setpoint Ramp Step Operation Press Action Result 1 Select SP RAMP 1 or SET Until you see SP RAMP 2 Set Up UP group Upper Display SET UP Lower Display SP RAMP X 10 2 2 Select Setpoint Ramp FUNC Until you see function Upper Display DISABL Lower Display SP RAMP X 3 Enable Setpoint Ramp A Until you see Upper Display ENABLE Lower Display SP RAMP X NOTE You cannot change the current local setpoint if the setpoint ramp function is enabled Make sure SP PROG is disabled 4 Set the Ramp Time FUNC Until you see Upper Display The ramp time in minutes Lower Display TIME MIN V Change the upper display value to the number of minutes in which you want the final setpoint to be reached Setting Range 1 to 255 minutes NOTE Entering 0 implies an immediate step change to the final SP 5 Set the Final Setpoint FUNC Upper Display The final setpoint value value Lower Display FINAL SP Aor V Change the upper display value to the desired final setpoint value Setting Range within the setpoint limits 152 DR4500A Truline Circular Chart Recorder With or Without Control Product Manual Release M May 2013 Operation Single Setpoint Ramp Running the setpoint r
284. onnector J5 on the printed circuit board Remove plug in output 1 printed circuit board for better access to the jumpers Be sure to tag and remove all the plug connections to the printed circuit board before removing it Position the jumpers as shown in Figure 2 17 for desired relay contact action Locate jumper position W6 W7 on the bottom left portion of the board Make sure position W6 is selected for position proportioning then reinstall the printed circuit board 4 Run the feedback slidewire not required for 3 position step and motor drive wires through the desired knockouts 5 For CE Mark conformity e install the ferrite filter as shown in Figure 2 11 e install the shield capacitors as shown in Figure 2 17 6 Strip insulation from the end of each wire 7 Loosen the screws in plug J2 terminals and position the plug as you would to plug it into J2 8 Insert the wires from the motor s feedback slidewire into the appropriate screw clamps as shown refer to Figure 2 17 Tighten the screws to secure the wires 9 Loosen the screws in plug J5 terminals and position the plug as you would to plug it into J5 10 Insert the wires for the motor into the appropriate screw clamps as shown refer to Figure 2 17 Tighten the screws to secure the wires 11 Install the wired plug into J2 and J5 as applicable 12 Repeat steps 2 through 11 for Control Output 2 printed circuit board as applicable Release M May 2013 DR4500A Trulin
285. ons of Heat Cool applications e The selection of Proportional Band or Gain is made in the control parameter group under prompt PBorGAIN RATE MIN 0 08 to 10 00 minutes 0 08 or less OFF RATE action affects the recorder s output whenever the deviation is changing and affects it more when the deviation is changing faster e Used with control algorithm PID A or PID B Defined as HEAT Rate on Duplex models for variations of Heat Cool applications RSET MIN or RSET RPM 0 02 to 50 00 RSET MIN RESET IN MINUTES REPEAT RSET RPM RESET IN REPEATS MINUTE RESET adjusts the recorder s output in accordance with both the size of the deviation SP PV and the time it lasts The amount of the corrective action depends on the value of Gain The Reset adjustment is measured as how many times proportional action is repeated minute e Used with control algorithm PID A or PID B Defined as HEAT Reset on Duplex models for variations of Heat Cool applications e The selection of minutes per repeat or repeats per minute is made in the control parameters group under prompt MINorRPM MAN RSET 100 to 100 in output MANUAL RESET is only applicable if you have control algorithm PD WITH MANUAL RESET Because a proportional recorder will not necessarily line out at setpoint there will be a deviation offset from setpoint This eliminates the offset and lets the PV line out at setpoint PROP BD2 or
286. ontrol Outputs Figure 2 18 Time Proportioning Alarm 1 and 2 Outputs and Digital Inputs Figure 2 19 Alarm Outputs 3 4 5 and 6 Figure 2 20 RS485 Modbus Communications Figure 2 21 Auxiliary Output 1 Figure 2 22 Ferrite filter locations CE Mark Inside of the enclosure install ferrite suppression filters on all wires connected to the recorder Fair Rite Products Corp part number 0443164151 or equivalent shall be installed as shown in Figure 2 11 one filter for each circuit group Cable with an outer jacket diameter larger than 6 7 mm 0 264 in may require the outer jacket to be removed to fit the required one turn in the filter or the selection of a different cable Shield Wiring The shield wires of all cables except the RS485 communications cable should be tied to earth ground at the recorder end and to earth ground through a 0047 uF Capacitor at the other end of the cable An example of shield wiring to an external ground bus bar is shown in Figure 2 11 Release M DR4500A Truline Circular Chart Recorder With or Without Control Product Manual 29 May 2013 Installation Input Wiring Procedures Ferrite Filter Mother PCB Processor Number 1 amp 2 Alarm Digital Control Loop 1 and Loop 2 Output Relays Alarm Relays Washer Hex Nut RS485 422 Modbus Communications Current Output 1 amp 2 Slidewire 1 amp 2 Auxiliary Output Digital Inputs 1
287. operating mode DISP The factory calibration will be restored If the problem is not corrected contact the Honeywell Technical Assistance Center 1 800 423 9883 USA and Canada CAUTION A restored factory calibration overwrites any previous field calibration done for the input Be sure to protect any field calibration from accidental overwrites by configuring the appropriate LOCKOUT selection after calibration See the Section 3 Configuration for specific instructions to set the lockout Release M DR4500A Truline Circular Chart Recorder With or Without Control Product Manual 199 May 2013 Input Calibration Minimum and Maximum Range Values 7 3 Minimum and Maximum Range Values Select the range values You should calibrate the recorder for the minimum 0 and maximum 100 96 range values of your particular sensor f your recorder has two or more inputs calibrate each input separately Select the voltage or resistance equivalent for 0 and 100 range values from Table 7 2 use these values when calibrating your recorder Table 7 2 Voltage and Resistance Equivalents for 0 and 100 Range Values Sensor Type PV Input Range Range Values Thermocouples F C 0 68 F 20 C 100 B 105 to 3300 41 to 1816 0 mV 0 003 mV 13 763 mV E 454 to 1832 270 to 1000 9 835 mV 1 192 mV 76 358 mV E low 200 to 1100
288. oportional Refer to Section 8 Output Calibration output 6 Replace the control output printed Refer to the instructions included with the circuit board replacement part Table 9 13 Procedure 8 Troubleshooting position proportional output failure symptoms Step What to do How to do it or where to find the data 1 Be sure the recorder is configured for Refer to Section 3 Configuration Make sure OUT position proportional output ALG selection POSITN 2 Check the field wiring Refer to Section 2 Installation 3 Check the output Put the recorder into manual mode and adjust the output manually to drive the motor from 0 to 100 96 4 Check whether the motor drives in both Refer to Section 8 Output Calibration for motor directions If it does go to step 5 If the slidewire calibration Refer to the motor motor drives in one direction only check instructions the slidewire If the motor does not drive in either direction check the motor 5 Check the output voltage to the Put the voltmeter across the slidewire terminals at slidewire connector J2 on the control output printed circuit board and check that the slidewire voltage varies with the motor position 6 Be sure that the output relays are Put the recorder into manual mode and adjust the actuating properly If they are not check output manually above and below the present the field wiring then go to step 4 If they value Listen for the
289. option printed circuit board refer to Figure 2 21 for location 3 Remove the unwired plug from J3 4 Run the communications option wires through the desired knockout 5 For CE Mark conformity e Install the ferrite filter as shown in Figure 2 11 e Refer to Figure 2 21 for shield information 6 Strip insulation from the end of each wire 7 Loosen the screws in plug J3 terminals and position the plug as you would to plug it into J3 8 Insert the wires for the communications option into the appropriate screw clamps as shown refer to Figure 2 22 Tighten the screws to secure the wires 9 Install the wired plug J3 into J3 connector on the communications board REFERENCE Refer to documents 51 52 25 66 and 51 52 25 69 for a complete description of RS485 Modbus Communications Option DR4500A Truline Circular Chart Recorder With or Without Control Product Manual Release M May 2013 Installation Option Wiring Procedures Ferrite Filter Fair Rite P N 0443164151 or equivalent Required for CE Mark Conformity Kit supplied Part No 51197612 502 contains two ferrite filters More than one kit may be supplied Install inside of case See Figure 2 11 Communication wire must be Alpha XTRA Guard Cable Alpha P N 5121C Communications master 120 Ohm Resistor and Tx Rx To other Notes 1 The shield of the RS485 Modbus Communications cable is not connected at the recorder end and should
290. or Setpoint 2 is exceeded e The alarm relay is energized when the monitored value goes into the allowed region by more than the hysteresis e There are twelve alarm setpoints two for each alarm e The type and state High or Low is selected during configuration see Section 3 Configuration for details n ATTENTION An active alarm will always provide an indication on the display but may not control the relay that is a higher priority function such as a control loop or timer may have control of the relay Procedure for displaying the alarm setpoints The procedure for displaying and changing the alarm setpoints is listed in Table 5 23 Table 5 23 Procedure for Displaying or Changing the Alarm Setpoints Step Operation Press Action Result 1 Access the Alarm Set Up SET Until you see group UP Upper Display SET UP Lower Display ALARM X 1 2 3 4 5 6 2 Access the Alarm FUNC Successively displays the alarm setpoints and their Setpoint Values values Upper Display The alarm setpoint value Lower Display AXS1 VAL Setpoint 1 value of alarm 1 2 3 4 5 or 6 AXS2 VAL Setpoint 2 value of alarm 1 2 3 4 5 or 6 Aor V Change any alarm setpoint value you select in the upper display 3 Return to normal LOWR Returns to normal operation operation DISP Release M DR4500A Truline Circular Chart Recorder With or Without Control Product Manual 161 May 2013 Operation
291. osition MA for 4 20 mA inputs 3 Install plug in W3 according to your input type 21443 Figure 7 2 Location of Jumper Positions W1 MA and W3 on the Input Boards Release M DR4500A Truline Circular Chart Recorder With or Without Control Product Manual 203 May 2013 Input Calibration Calibration Set Up and Wiring for PV Inputs Thermocouple input calibration methods You can calibrate for a thermocouple input using one of three methods e using an ice bath e using a compensated calibrator or by measuring the ambient temperature at the input terminals and subtracting the voltage contribution of the input terminal junction General set up procedure Table 7 5 lists the general set up procedure for all methods of calibration Do this procedure and then refer to the set up procedure and diagram for your specific input Table 7 5 General Set Up Procedure Step Action Set up and connect the calibrator to the input plug for the applicable input circuit board in your recorder according to the particular input sensor being used Refer to the following figures for corresponding set up diagrams Figure 7 3 Thermocouple inputs using an ice bath Figure 7 4 Thermocouple inputs using a compensated calibrator Figure 7 5 Thermocouple inputs using the ambient temperature method Figure 7 6 RTD Resistance Thermometer Device inputs Figure 7 7 Radiamatic mV and Volts except 0 10 Volts inputs Figure 7 8 0 10 Volts input
292. out Control Product Manual 83 Configuration Event Message Configuration Function Prompt Lower Display Function Name Selections or Range of Setting Upper Display Factory Setting EVENT 3 Event 3 Trigger NONE EXTSW1 EXTSW2 ALARM1 ALARM2 ALARM3 ALARM4 ALARMS ALARM6 NONE MESSAGE3 Message for Event 3 up to six characters 0 to 9 AtoZ blank EVENT3 POSITON3 Chart Position for Message 3 Printing 0 to 100 83 6 EVENT 4 Event 4 Trigger NONE EXTSW1 EXTSW2 ALARM1 ALARM2 ALARM3 ALARM4 ALARMS ALARM6 NONE MESSAGE4 Message for Event 4 up to six characters 0 to 9 AtoZ T blank EVENT4 POSITON4 Chart Position for Message 4 Printing 0 to 100 80 0 EVENT 5 Event 5 Trigger NONE EXTSW1 EXTSW2 ALARM1 ALARM2 ALARM3 ALARM4 ALARMS ALARM6 NONE MESSAGE5 Message for Event 5 up to six characters 0 to 9 AtoZ T blank EVENTS POSITONS Chart Position for Message 5 Printing 0 to 100 78 2 84 DR4500A Truline Circular Chart Recorder With or Without Control Product Manual Release M May 2013 Configuration Event Message Configuration Function Prompt Lower Display Function Name Selections or Range of Setting Upper Display Factory Setting EVENT 6 Event 6 Trigger NONE EXTSW1 EXTSW2 ALARM1 ALARM2 ALARM3 ALARM4 AL
293. out Control Product Manual Release M May 2013 Table 7 8 Set Up Wiring Procedure for Thermocouple Inputs Using the Ambient Temperature Method 207 Table 7 9 Set Up Wiring Procedure for RTD Inputs ener nennen enne 208 Table 7 10 Set Up Wiring Procedure for Radiamatic Millivolts and Volts Inputs except 0 10 Volts 209 Table 7 11 Set Up Wiring Procedure for 0 10 Volt Inputs sss nennen 210 Table 7 12 Set Up Wiring Procedure for 4 20 mA Inputs ssssseeeeseeeeeneenenen nennen nnne 211 Table 7 13 Calibration Procedure 212 Table 8 1 Set Up Wiring Procedure Current Proportional Output Aux Out 2 and 3 sse 218 Table 8 2 Current Proportional Output Aux Output 2 and 3 Calibration 219 Table 8 3 Position Proportional and 3 Position Step Output Calibration Procedure 221 Table 8 4 Set Up Wiring Procedure Auxiliary Output enne enne enne 223 Table 8 5 Auxiliary Output Calibration 224 Table 9 1 Identifying the software version eee enne nnne entren 228 T ble 9 2 Powersup tests x scite teen OIM Ung ub ie 229 Table 9 3 Displaying the test tesults seriinin 230 Table
294. part Call Technical Assistance Center 1 800 423 9883 USA and Canada Table 9 11 Procedure 6 Troubleshooting keyboard and or display failure symptoms Step What to do How to do it or where to find the data 1 Run a Key Test to check the operation of the keys and displays Refer to Section 5 Operation for procedures on running a key test Replace the membrane switch keyboard and or display printed circuit board as required Refer to the instructions included with the replacement part 238 DR4500A Truline Circular Chart Recorder With or Without Control Product Manual Release M May 2013 Troubleshooting Service Troubleshooting Procedures Table 9 12 Procedure 7 Troubleshooting current proportional output failure symptoms Step What to do How to do it or where to find the data 1 Be sure the recorder is configured for Refer to Section 3 Configuration Make sure OUT current output ALG selection CURRENT 2 Check the field wiring Refer to Section 2 Installation 3 Be sure all the recorder and control Refer to Section 3 Configuration related data is correct Check the tuning algorithm and control data 4 Check the output Put the recorder into Manual Mode and raise lower the output manually from 0 96 to 100 96 4 20 mA Use a milliammeter at connection J1 on the control output printed circuit board 5 Recalibrate the current pr
295. play the totalizer value Resetting the totalizer locally Follow the procedure in Table 5 26 to reset the totalizer value Table 5 26 Procedure for Resetting the Totalizer Step Operation Press Action Result 1 Access the Totalizer Set SET Until you see Up group UP Upper Display SET UP Lower Display TOTAL 1 or TOTAL 2 2 Allow Totalizer Reset FUNC You will see once Upper Display Ex XXX Lower Display a value FUNC You will see again Upper Display NO Lower Display RSET TOT or V Change NO to YES in the upper display ATTENTION Function prompt RSETABLE must be set to LOCAL 3 Return to normal LOWR Returns to normal operation operation DISP Resetting the totalizer using the Wake Time feature To reset the totalizer using the Wake Time feature set the Wake Time WAKE MIN WAKE HR WAKE DAY WAKE MON in Subsection 3 9 Time Set Up Group as desired Then set function prompt RSETABLE Subsection 3 10 Totalizer Set Up Group to TIME When the configured Wake Time value is reached the totalizer will reset to 0 164 DR4500A Truline Circular Chart Recorder With or Without Control Product Manual Release M May 2013 Operation Resetting and Displaying Totalizer Value External totalizer reset The totalizer can be reset to 0 from external switch 1 or external switch Z2 Refer to Subsection 3 10 Totalizer Set Up Group and set function pr
296. plies only for factory installed inputs Any input that was field installed must Procedure Table 7 1 lists the procedure for restoring factory calibration Table 7 1 Restoring Factory Calibration Step Operation Press Action Result 1 Enter Input Setup Group SET Until you see UP Upper Display SET UP Lower Display INPUT n n 1 2 3 4 2 Change input type FUNC Until you see Upper Display Note the input type in the upper display Make sure that the selection matches the type of sensor that is connected to the input in your application Write it down if necessary Lower Display INn TYPE 1 2 3 4 Aor V Until you see Upper Display 0 10V Lower Display INn TYPE ATTENTION If you are already using a 0 10V input change to a 0 5V input type FUNC Until the upper display rolls through the input types and returns to Upper Display 0 10V Lower Display INn TYPE 198 DR4500A Truline Circular Chart Recorder With or Without Control Product Manual Release M May 2013 Input Calibration Restoring Factory Calibration Step Operation Press Action Result Aor V Until you change the input selection in the upper display back to the proper selection You will see Upper Display Original input selection that matches your type of sensor Lower Display INn TYPE To commit press FUNC before pressing LOWR DISP 3 Return to normal LOWR To return to Normal operating mode
297. puts Resistor network 30755232 002 must be installed in inputs 1 2 3 and 4 when using this range see set up diagram for details TEC 00385 100 Q IEC 003902 200 Q 200 DR4500A Truline Circular Chart Recorder With or Without Control Product Manual Release M May 2013 Input Calibration Preliminary Information 7 4 Preliminary Information Disconnect the field wiring Depending on which input 1 2 3 or 4 you are going to calibrate tag and disconnect any field wiring connected to the input terminals on the input boards inside the recorder Reference Figure 7 1 and follow the procedure in Table 7 3 Table 7 3 Disconnect the Field Wiring Step Action 1 Remove the operating power from the recorder 2 Open the door on the recorder 3 Loosen the phillips screw on the right side of the chart plate and open the chart plate 4 Depending on the input 1 2 3 or 4 you are going to calibrate remove the wired plug from the input connector J2 on the applicable circuit board See Figure 7 1 for the location of the circuit boards and input connectors 5 Tag and disconnect the field wiring installed in the applicable input connector plug Mother board for options Main board Alarm output digital input board optional J2 on input 1 board J2 on input J2 on input 4 board 3 board 2 board optional optional optional 21442 F
298. r day Metric selections when Flow Units are set to Flow not Height LB MIN Pounds per minute LB HR Pounds per hour KG MIN Kilogram per minute KG HR Kilogram per hour Table 1 is continued on the next page 264 DR4500A Truline Circular Chart Recorder With or Without Control Product Manual Release M May 2013 Model DR45AW Configuration Configuration Continued Configuration for Open Channel Flow Operation Continued Table B 3 Input Group Function Prompts Continued Function Function Selections or Remarks Prompt Name Range of Setting Lower Display Upper Display WEIR 1 Weir Selection NONE V NOTCH ATTENTION This prompt appears RECTNG only if you select NONE as the Flume CIPOLT selection If you Then go to select Function Prompt NONE FLUME 1 V NOTCH ANGLE 1 RECTNG or WIDTH CIPOLT FLUME 1 Flume Type NONE PARSHALL PALMER PARSHALL 1 Parshall Flume Size NONE INCH denotes the width of the flume Selection 1 INCH in inches 2 INCH For example 2 INCH represents a 3 INCH two inch wide flume 6 INCH RENE ATTENTION This prompt appears only if you select NONE as the Weir selection Then go to Function If you select Prompt X INCH WIDTH anything other MAX HT 1 than X INCH PALMER 1 Palmer Bowlus Flume 4 INCH 24 INCH Type 6 INCH 27 INCH 8 INCH 30 INCH 10 INCH 36 INCH 12 INCH 42 INCH 15 INCH 48 INCH 18 INCH 60 INCH 21 INCH 7
299. r Chart Recorder With or Without Control Product Manual Release M May 2013 Installation Mounting Methods Reference data for existing panel cutouts Refer to Table 2 4 to determine whether the existing panel cutout can be used Use the procedure for mounting with the universal filler kit unless otherwise noted Table 2 4 Reference Data for Mounting DR4500A in Existing Panel Cutouts Manufacturer Instrument Dimensions of Existing Need Universal Filler Panel Cutout inches Plate Kit 30755134 001 Blue Color 30755134 002 Gray Color Honeywell Model AR100 DR4200 12 7 x 127 No Honeywell Class 15 15 8 x 172 Yes Honeywell Class 45 13 12 x 17 12 Yes Badger Meter Model Micro Chart 14 25 x 17 88 Yes Bristol Models 4330 500 Classes 1 2A 3B and 5 3 50 x 18 56 Yes Fisher and Porter Model 51 1100 13 75 17 31 Foxboro Model 40 14 38 x 17 06 Yes Kent Model 105M 13 6 x 13 46 No Partlow Model ER 13 5 x 12 69 No Taylor Model 76J 13 78 x 16 5 Yes No adaptation is required use procedure for Flush in Panel New Panel Cutout Use procedure for Cutout made for Kent Model 105M Adapter plate dimensions The dimensions of the adapter plate part number 30755134 are 16 5 x 19 Release M DR4500A Truline Circular Chart Recorder With or Without Control Product Manual 19 May 2013 Installation Mounting Methods Mounting flush in panel using universal filler plate kit
300. r With or Without Control Product Manual Release M May 2013 Setpoint Ramp Soak Programming and Operation Drawing a Ramp Soak Profile 6 3 Drawing a Ramp Soak Profile Ramp soak profile example Before you perform the actual configuration we recommend that you draw your Ramp Soak profiles in the space provided on the blank graphs and fill in the associated information on the worksheet An example of a Ramp Soak Profile using the first twelve segments for Profile 1 is shown in Figure 6 1 Start setpoint in this example is at 200 F Assume each soak segment is desired to trigger an event Assume you are configuring the program to be used by Control Loop SP RAMP1 4444 40898 10 44 EEENEE EEE ENG E LG Ashea LL T seee L1 LLL TE TT INU LLL Time Hours 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 Figure 6 1 Ramp Soak Profile Example Release M DR4500A Truline Circular Chart Recorder With or Without Control Product Manual 177 2013 Setpoint Ramp Soak Programming and Operation Drawing a Ramp Soak Profile Table 6 1 Parameter settings for example 12 step profile Prompt Function Segment Value Prompt Function Segment Value SP RAMP1 Settings for SEG7RAMP Ramp 7 2hrs 30min Control Loop 1 ramp SP PROG Enables SP ENABLE SEG8 SP Soak SP 8 500 prompts RECYCLES Number of 2 SEG8TIME Soak Time 8 Ohr
301. r each positive deviation up to 10 and the 10 below light for each negative deviation down to 10 If the process deviation is greater than 10 the on control bar and the specific small green bars light Figure 5 2 shows how the deviation bargraph works 1 to 10 small green deviation bars Green on control bar 1 to 10 small green deviation bars 21424 Figure 5 2 Deviation Bargraph Release M DR4500A Truline Circular Chart Recorder With or Without Control Product Manual 143 May 2013 Operation Monitoring Your Recorder Viewing the operating parameters The upper display 15 a six character display four of which show the value of the PV during normal operation The lower display is an eight character display During normal operation you can view various operating parameters Press the LOWR DISP key to scroll through the operating parameters listed in Table 5 5 The lower display shows only those parameters and their values that apply to your specific model and the way in which it was configured e You configure the lower display to scroll through the items in Table 5 5 at an interval of 1 2 or 3 seconds Refer to Subsection 3 19 Options Set Up group function prompt SCROLL to make your selection Pressing the LOWR DISP key will freeze the lower display at the presently viewed item pressing it again will advance to the next item and scrolling will r
302. r equivalent Required for CE Mark Conformity Kit Part No 51197612 502 contains two ferrite filters Part No 51197612 508 contains 8 ferrite filters Install inside of case See Figure 2 11 Capacitor Kit 51197755 001 Install capacitors as shown in figure No 5 amp 6 Alarm outputs PCB W r 1W2 i l oi 21466 Power Supply Alarm No 5 F H ee o o W2 contact W3 N C contact Alarm No 6 LLL Alarm 6 o o WA contact Relay Load ah W5 N C contact ee o 0047 pF Ferrite filter L o qe apacitor Figure 2 20 Alarm outputs 3 4 5 and 6 wiring Plug J5 Cable d External Load Cable Shield External Load Power Supply Release M DR4500A Truline Circular Chart Recorder With or Without Control Product Manual May 2013 49 Installation Option Wiring Procedures RS485 Modbus communications wiring 50 RS485 Modbus Communications is an option available on the DR4500A recorder The prerequisites are Model Key Number All models except DRASAH AP AS Model Number Table 3 3XX or 4AXX Refer to Figure 2 21 and follow the procedure in Table 2 21 to wire the RS485 Modbus communications option Table 2 21 RS485 Modbus Communications Wiring Step Action 1 Open the recorder door Loosen the captive screw in the chart plate and swing the plate out 2 Locate connector J3 on the RS485 Modbus communications
303. rameter groups and prompts ciere deese teer Llanes eae nean 93 Lal sr EB I E T ejoa CX 93 4 2 Input Parameters Set Up Group dii oie E b bete uo M Hab Aedes 94 Introduction teose aE 94 INPUT TETTE TTE E E E E 94 4 3 Parameters Set Up dsini a 98 Introduction cH Ec 98 P nri 4 2 3 4 group prombpls eoi idet erect at testi tron d taret daa Laden PE Retrato De inde a eeu noL ded 98 44 Chart Parameters Set Up Group ssssssssssssssssese eene enne enne nnns 100 TRETEN c ELE LEER MEUM 100 Group Prom pls ER 100 4 Time Parameters Set Up Group eren nnne enne nter 103 CUO EET Rr HEEL 103 TIME GrOUP Prompts eve tedden EEO EEEE EEE E E NEEE 103 4 6 Total Parameters Set Up Group ssssssssssssssssseseeeneneener en 104 Introduction EMT in ee eine aa es nei een nee at 104 Totalizer 1 and 2 Group prompts lees shoe teks cadence need iced Doh A E aa a ches Toe 104 4 7 lnputAlgorithi Set Up Group e Ree de tame P eee Hedge cade ah od 106 laniger Ufo
304. rcent of flow range values that inhibits the totalizers accumulatorwhenever the input signal is less than that selected value This featureeliminates the problems incurred because of shifting zero signals andnoise during low flow levels Release M DR4500A Truline Circular Chart Recorder With or Without Control Product Manual 261 May 2013 Model DR45AW Installation B 2 Installation Field wiring Mount and wire the recorder as described in the Product Manual ATTENTION Power wiring input wiring alarm output and digital inputwiring remain the same as specified in Section 2 of the Product Manual Pulse output wiring The Pulse Output Function provides a non control pulse output counteralarm function with a configurable time duration relay output when aselected incremental change in volume has occurred An applicationexample would be a weigh feeder that will add a predetermined amount ofchemical upstream based on every one million gallons of flow through aweir Refer to Figure 1 for the field wiring of the Pulse Output Option Figure B 1 Flow Recorder Field Wiring NOTE Power wiring input wiring alarm output and digital input wiring remain the same as specified in Section 2 of the Product Manual 262 DR4500A Truline Circular Chart Recorder With or Without Control Product Manual Release M May 2013 Model DR45AW Configuration B 3 Configuration General Configuration for Open Channel Flow The DR45
305. rcular Chart Recorder With or Without Control Product Manual 127 Configuration Parameter Definitions Auxiliary Output Set Up Group Lower Display Upper Display Parameter Definition Prompt Range of Setting or Selection PV2 PROCESS VARIABLE 2 Represents the value of the process variable for Loop 2 DEV 2 DEVIATION 2 PROCESS VARIABLE MINUS SETPOINT Represents 100 to 100 of the selected PV span for Loop 2 See Example at DEV 1 OUT 2 OUTPUT 2 Represents the displayed controller output in percent 96 for Loop 2 SP2 SETPOINT 2 Represents the value of the setpoint in units of PV for Loop 2 IN 3 INPUT 3 Represents the value of the configured range of Input 3 IN 4 INPUT 4 Represents the value of the configured range of Input 4 4 mA VAL Low Scale Value AUXILIARY OUTPUT LOW SCALING FACTOR Use within the range of the selected a value in engineering units for all selections above variable to represent 4 mA except Output Use value in percent 96 for Output Output can be between 5 96 and 105 96 20mA VAL High Scale Value AUXILIARY OUTPUT HIGH SCALING FACTOR Use within the range of the selected variable to represent 20 mA a value in engineering units for Input 1 Input 2 Process Variable Deviation and Setpoint Use a value in percent 96 for Output Output can be between 5 and 105 96 When Deviation is selected only one operating parameter
306. re Current Proportional Output Aux Out 2 and 3 Step Action 1 With the power off door open and the chart plate swung out tag and disconnect field wiring from the plug in connector J1 on the appropriate control output PCB see Figure 8 1 2 Observing polarity connect a milliammeter s leads to the plug for connector J1 3 the chart plate apply power and allow the recorder to warm up 15 minutes before you calibrate Control output 1 Control output 2 PCB imc Plug J1 current output 21451 Figure 8 1 Test Equipment Connections for Calibrating Current Proportional Output 218 DR4500A Truline Circular Chart Recorder With or Without Control Product Manual Release M May 2013 Output Calibration Current Proportional Output Aux Out 2 and 3 Calibration Procedure The procedure for calibrating the Current Proportional Output is listed in Table 8 2 Make sure LOCKOUT in the Set Up group is set to NONE See Section 3 Configuration Also CONTROL 1 2 must be enabled and OUT ALG must be set to CURRNT in the Control Set Up group n ATTENTION Follow this procedure when calibrating Auxiliary Output 2 or 3 Make sure LOCKOUT in the Set Up group is set to NONE and AUX OUT must NOT be disabled in the Auxiliary Output group Table 8 2 Current Proportional Output Aux Output 2 and 3 Calibration Procedure Step Operation Press Action Resu
307. re the values for Gain proportional band Rate Reset Time Cycle Time if time proportional is used 2KEYBD TWO SETS KEYBOARD SELECTABLE two sets of tuning parameters can be configured and can be selected at the operator interface e Press LOWR DISP key until you see PID SET1 or PID SET2 to switch between sets Configure the values for Gain Rate Reset Cycle Time Gain 2 Rate 2 Reset 2 Cycle 2 Time 2PV SW TWO SETS PV AUTOMATIC SWITCHOVER when the process variable is GREATER than the value set at prompt SW VALUE Switchover Value the recorder will use Gain Rate Reset and Cycle Time The active PID SET can be read in the lower display When the process variable is LESS than the value set at prompt SW VALUE the recorder will use Gain 2 Rate 2 Reset 2 and Cycle 2 Time The active PID SET can be read in the lower display Other prompts affected SW VALUE Release M May 2013 DR4500A Truline Circular Chart Recorder With or Without Control Product Manual 109 Configuration Parameter Definitions Control Parameters Set Up Group Lower Display Prompt Upper Display Range of Setting or Selection Parameter Definition PID SETS continued 25 SW TWO SETS SP AUTOMATIC SWITCHOVER when the setpoint is GREATER than the value set at prompt SW VALUE Switchover Value the recorder will use Gain Rate Reset and Cycle When the setp
308. recorder flush in a panel or on the surface See Section 2 of a panel or a wall Connect the power and input output wiring See Section 2 4 Follow the simple keystroke sequences and English language prompts to See Sections 3 amp 4 configure the functional characteristics of your recorder Ready for Operation For Model DR45AR also see Appendix A 21402 Figure 1 2 Set up Tasks Release M DR4500A Truline Circular Chart Recorder With or Without Control Product Manual 5 May 2013 Overview Set up Tasks 6 DR4500A Truline Circular Chart Recorder With or Without Control Product Manual Release M May 2013 2 Installation 2 1 Overview Introduction Installation of the DR4500A Recorder consists of mounting and wiring the recorder according to the instructions given in this section Read the preinstallation information check the model number interpretation and become familiar with your model selections then proceed with installation What s in this section This section contains the following information Topic See Page 2 1 Overview 7 2 2 Model Number Interpretation 13 2 3 Mounting Considerations and Overall Dimensions 16 24 Mounting Methods 17 2 5 Wiring Prerequisites 27 2 6 Input Wiring Procedures 29 2 7 Output Wiring Procedures 39 2 8 Option Wiring Procedures 45 2 9 Lockout Switch Configuration 54 Pre installation information If the recorder has not
309. ress Action Table B 4 Step Operation 1 Alternating Totalizer Display LOWR DISP 1 T PV value Lower Display Total Value ATTENTION When two or more totalizers are enabled the upper and lower displays repeatedly cycle the PV and totalization values for the enabled channels The red channel annunciator in the upper display indicates which channel s values being displayed 2 Select and A Until the desired channel indicator lights in Constantly br this example channel 3 Display a Totalization v Upper Display Value Lower Display Total Value 3 Return to A You will see Alternating and Display Upper Display v simul Lower Display taneously xai Value After the keys are released the upper display alternately shows PV values while lower display shows totalization values for all enabled totalizers 4 Return to Normal Returns to normal PV display PV Display LOWR DISP Release M DR4500A Truline Circular Chart Recorder With or Without Control Product Manual 271 May 2013 Model DR45AW References B 5 References Summary Flow equations This information is provided for customers to review what formula the Truline Recorder uses to calculate flow The selection of Weirs is V NOTCH RECTANGULAR or CIPOLLETTI The Flume is a Parshall Flume For the following equations both height and width are measured in feet ATTENTION When you configure the input
310. rope 27 Chart high range value 98 Chart lamp 169 Replacing 169 Chart low range value 98 Chart name 67 69 101 Chart plate assembly parts 247 Chart speed selection 67 69 CHN indicator 148 Circuit breaker 30 Cleaning 169 Communications station address 81 130 Condensed specifications 8 Configuration procedure 62 Configuration prompts 57 Configuration tips 67 Control algorithm 74 114 Control output direction 74 112 Controller dropoff value 74 112 Current proportional output calibration 220 225 Current simplex 116 Current relay duplex 117 Current time duplex range 74 Customer support 229 Cycle time heat 721 Cycle time 2 cool 721 Deadband 74 112 Decimal point location 64 94 Deviation 737 Deviation bargraph 144 Deviation recording action 82 Deviation setpoint value 82 131 Device status 232 Diagnostic error messages 146 Diagnostic tests 138 Digital inputs 45 Dimensions 6 Direct acting control 112 Display test 139 Displaying totalizer value 166 Displays 3 Release M DR4500A Truline Circular Chart Recorder With or Without Control Product Manual 289 May 2013 Index E I Electrical noise 27 Ice bath 204 Emissivity 65 Indicators 3 Engineering units 94 Input 1 actuation type 64 Error message Input actuation type 95 BATT LOW See Input compensation 65 97 BATTERY 255 Input out of range 236 CAL TEST 234 Input terminals 203 CALI ERR 234 Inputs CAL2 ERR
311. roubleshooting Service Troubleshooting Procedures Table 9 9 Procedure 4 Troubleshooting chart rotation failure symptoms N WARNING Do not lubricate the plastic gears on the chart and pen motors Step What to do How to do it or where to find the data Check the sensor and lead wires for continuity Check the connections Replace the sensor lead wires as needed Tighten the connections Check the pen and input configuration data Refer to Section 3 Configuration Replace the servo plate assembly Refer to the instructions included with the replacement part Call Technical Assistance Center 1 800 423 9883 USA and Canada Table 9 10 Procedure 5 Troubleshooting pen failure symptoms Step WARNING Do not lubricate the plastic gears on the chart and pen motors What to do How to do it or where to find the data Check the sensor and lead wires for continuity Check the connections Check the pen arm for secure mechanical attachment to the servo shaft Check the servo cable plug connection J6 on the main printed circuit board Replace the sensor lead wires as needed Verify and tighten the input connections Verify that the flat head screw that attaches the pen arm to the plastic servo gear on the servo shaft is tight Visually examine the plug and reseat it Replace the servo plate Refer to the instructions included with the replacement
312. rsus Table selections DR45AR with one input Figure A 1 identifies the hardware components of the DRASAR with one input VIEW A Key Number DR45AR With one input Mother PCB Number 1 amp 2 Alarm output for control and digital input PCB Main PCB selected options Table Ill 0X1 0X2 or 0X3 common 4 20mA control output 1 PCB Table Il 40 and Number 3 amp 4 Alarm outputs PCB Table Ill 0X2 0X3 Number 5 amp 6 Alarm outputs PCB Table Ill 0X3 1 Input PCB Table 1000 3000 21464 Refer to Model Selection Guide Figure 1 DR45AR with one input Release M DR4500A Truline Circular Chart Recorder With or Without Control Product Manual 253 May 2013 Model DR45AR Hardware Identification DR45AR with two to four inputs Figure 2 identifies the hardware components of the DRASAR with two to four inputs VIEW B Key Number DR45AR With two to four inputs 254 Mother PCB for inputs 3 8744 Number 1 amp 2 Alarm output control and digital input PCB Main PCB selected options Table IIl 0X1 0X2 or 0X3 common 4 20mA control output 1 PCB Table Il 40 and Number 3 amp 4 Alarm outputs PCB Table Ill 0X2 0X3 4 20 mA Control Output 2 and Number 5 amp 6 Alarm outputs PCB Table IIl 0X3 Refer to Model Selection Guide Figure 2 DR45AR with two to four inputs DR4500A Truline Circular Chart Recorder With or Without Control Product
313. rt e Deep ede dde e hieu 165 5 14 Monitoring the External Event Operation esses emen een 166 Event pern function ER 166 Event pen Operation nsss e e e N AE a TAAA RO EE 166 9215 MAXIMIZING PEN LOren cota o rt eta et Feet ui gets 167 Steps for maximizing pen life 2 ciere cose ce ede 167 5 16 Routine ette nee ee Le e LE etas m ee eed ae tede 168 168 Cleaning the pen eS 168 Replacing a burned out chart lamp optional sese eene me enne nennen nnne 168 5 17 Installing Replacing Chart enm emm nnne ennemi ener nnns 169 Installing replacing chart procedure erret ennt tpe 169 5 19 Chart Operation 3 24 tret a pem mig Haut tee tence 170 Normal Operation ics ERR e A REPRE REDE ER Renu FRE RD E ERR ARX ER 170 Remote chart operation 4 2 5 Ad ieee rn Ehe vee die ee i ee vee n eve e n e epe en e 171 Recovery from a power 05S m 171 Release M DR4500A Truline Circular Chart Recorder With or Without Control Product Manual xi May 2013 6 Setpoint Ramp Soak Programming and Operation 172 6 1 1
314. ry fittings if they are in electrical contact with the enclosure conductive coating In either case the shields shall not extend into the recorder enclosure The cable shields shall also be connected to a low impedance earth ground at the farthest end of the cable through a 0 0047 uF capacitor See each of the individual wiring diagrams Release M DR4500A Truline Circular Chart Recorder With or Without Control Product Manual 27 May 2013 Installation Wiring Prerequisites For the RS485 Modbus communications cable Alpha XTRA Guard I cable Alpha P N 5121C is required At the recorder end the communications cable shield must be unconnected and must not extend into the recorder enclosure The shield of the communications cable must be connected to earth ground at the farthest end of the cable See the option wiring procedure for the RS485 Communications Card Inside of the enclosure the user must install ferrite suppression filters and capacitors on all wires connected to the recorder Fair Rite Products Corp part number 0443164151 or equivalent shall be installed as shown in Figure 2 11 to Figure 2 22 one filter for each circuit group Cable with an outer jacket diameter larger than 6 7 mm 0 264 in may require the outer Jacket to be removed to fit the required one turn in the filter or the selection of a different cable Permissible wire bundling Table 2 10 shows which wire functions should be bundled together Table 2 10
315. s 4 20 mA inputs Refer to Figure 7 9 and wire the recorder according to the procedure given in Table 7 12 Table 7 12 Set Up Wiring Procedure for 4 20 mA Inputs Step Action 1 Connect the copper wire to the calibration source see Figure 7 9 2 Connect the other end of the copper wire to the clamp type terminals in the plug for the applicable input connector J2 3 Reinstall the plug into the input connector J2 on the applicable circuit board for input 1 input 2 input 3 or input 4 Calibration source Copper wires Plug J2 21450 aUo 5 4 20 mA Eod icy Be sure W1 MA jumper is in position MA on the input board Be sure W3 jumper is in the this connects 2502 resistor Linear position on the Input board internal on PCB across inputs terminals Figure 7 9 Calibration Set Up Diagram for 4 20 mA Inputs Release M DR4500A Truline Circular Chart Recorder With or Without Control Product Manual 211 May 2013 Input Calibration Calibration Procedure 7 6 Calibration Procedure Introduction Apply power and allow the recorder to warm up for one hour before you calibrate e Please read Set Up Wiring before beginning the procedure e Make sure LOCKOUT is set to NONE see Section 3 Configuration e The calibration procedure for inputs 1 2 3 and 4 are identical The displays indicate the input number CAUTION For milliampere inp
316. s CUR TI or TI CUR 50 PCT CURRENT DUPLEX RANGE SPLIT enables the normal control current output to provide its full range for 50 output change If CUR TI duplex was selected the current output provides cool control 100PCT CURRENT DUPLEX RANGE FULL enables the normal control current output to provide duplex heat control over 0 100 96 output change and the relay output to provide cool control Repeat this procedure for Control 2 configuration Release M May 2013 DR4500A Truline Circular Chart Recorder With or Without Control Product Manual 117 Configuration Parameter Definitions Tuning Parameters Set Up Group 4 9 Tuning Parameters Set Up Group Introduction Tuning consists of establishing the appropriate values for the tuning constants you are using so that your recorder responds correctly to changes in process variable and setpoint You can start with predetermined values but you will have to watch the system to see how to modify them There are two Tuning groups available Tuning group prompts Table 4 8 lists all the function prompts in the Tuning 1 and Tuning 2 setup group and their definitions Table 4 8 Tuning Group Prompt Definitions Lower Display Upper Display Parameter Definition Prompt Range of Setting or Selection FUZZY FUZZY OVERSHOOT SUPPRESSION FEATURE DISABL DISABLE Disables fuzzy overshoot suppression ENABLE ENABLE The recorder will
317. s marked in step three are correct If not make sure that the recorder is aligned vertically and use the brackets as templates to mark the proper locations Remove the recorder from the panel and drill the other two holes Hang the recorder on the screw by the support hook and insert the other two user supplied screws through the brackets into the panel Tighten the two hex screws that attach the brackets to the case Release M May 2013 DR4500A Truline Circular Chart Recorder With or Without Control Product Manual 25 Installation Mounting Methods 26 Hole Pattern Reference NOTE millimeters These screws must be supplied by inches user all other mounting hardware is supplied with recorder 163 32 6 430 Figure 2 10 Mounting Flush on a Surface of Panel or Wall DR4500A Truline Circular Chart Recorder With or Without Control Product Manual Support hook Release M May 2013 Installation Wiring Prerequisites 2 5 Wiring Prerequisites Taking electrical noise precautions Electrical noise is composed of unabated electrical signals which produce undesirable effects in measurements and control circuits Digital equipment is especially sensitive to the effects of electrical noise Your recorder has built in circuits to reduce the effect of electrical noise from various sources If there is a need to further reduce these effects e Separate External Wiring separate connectin
318. sed during the RUN mode the chart will enter the HOLD mode RUN mode can be forced from the READY mode by pressing the CHART key All modes are saved in battery backed RAM and will be maintained over power cycles Recovery from a power loss The chart will operate as listed below when power is restored after a power loss Recorder shuts down with the remainder of the 7200 motor steps stored The processor goes through memory self test when power is restored The recorder prints a new motor time line if not a standard chart If standard chart text information will be lost until the next hour mark The chart counter starts to decrement from the motor step value stored at power loss Normal chart operation resumes A new HEADER is not printed If power is not interrupted again and normal operation is allowed to continue the time and date will be printed behind the new major time line Thisdocuments the time that power was restored n ATTENTION Multiple major time divisions on varying time bases indicate power or operator problems Release M May 2013 DR4500A Truline Circular Chart Recorder With or Without Control Product Manual 171 6 Setpoint Ramp Soak Programming and Operation 6 1 Overview Introduction As an option the recorder can support the programming of a 36 segment setpoint program containing 18 ramp segments and 18 soak segments In a ramp segment the setpoint value is changed as spec
319. serted into the local setpoint Auto Local Setpoint If RSP tracking is not configured the local setpoint will not be altered when the transfer is made Selecting manual or automatic mode 148 DR4500A Truline Circular Chart Recorder With or Without Control Product Manual Release M May 2013 Operation Operating Modes An alternate action switch places the recorder in automatic or manual mode of operation e Switching between manual and automatic will be bumpless except when the PD MR algorithm is selected e Table 5 10 includes procedures for selecting automatic or manual mode and changing the output while in manual Table 5 10 Procedure for Selecting Automatic or Manual Mode Step Operation Press Action Result 1 Selecting automatic MAN Until A indicator is ON mode AUTO The recorder regulates its output to maintain the PV at the desired setpoint Upper Display shows the PV value Lower Display shows SP and the setpoint value The deviation bargraph indicates the PV deviation from the setpoint 2 Selecting manual mode MAN Until MAN indicator is ON AUTO The recorder holds its output at the last value used during automatic operation and stops adjusting the output for changes in setpoint or process variable Upper Display shows the PV value Lower Display shows OUT and the output value in 96 The deviation bargraph indicates the PV deviation from the setpoint 3 Adjust the output in V
320. snsestteescoeeseuaneeseenseensascieentynesegsestteetconeqenineeres 143 Viewing the operating parameters icri este 144 Diagnostic error messages oreet rece eee ced ee e Rice eei ede vi Dee tee ees 145 Alarm and tuning messages 2 ci a patte eben Site dee eve pa canedtvcdnates 146 54 Operator FUNCHONS stat utum eda n dine teu diiit pitt cdit ebat eic 147 Actions an operator can initiate de Xu SLE Se RR 147 CHIN INdICATOF seis UE 147 5 5 Operating Modes nee t Rd 148 Available mode C 148 Mode deflnitlons E RR RM Cie Ig 148 What happens when you change modes sssssssseeeene enne 148 Selecting manual or automatic mode sse ener nennen nne enne nnns 148 Position proportional backup mode sse nennen nnnen nnne nnne enne nre inneren nennen nennen nnne 149 5 6 it etin etn de ds rette da 150 WTO GUCTION p c 150 Selecting the setpolnt SOUFree 2 eret ER eim qo as oec ep THO d 150 Changing the local setpoints sssseseeeeeneneeene enn ennemi enne entren nennen entren nnns 150 Switching between setpoints aani tie reed sn
321. ssion speed in bits per second 300 300 Baud 600 600 Baud 1200 1200 Baud 2400 2400 Baud 4800 4800 Baud 9600 9600 Baud 19200 19200 Baud 38400 38400 Baud XMT DLAY NONE TRANSMIT DELAY This is the approximate time 10MSEC delay between receipt of Modbus request message and 20MSEC start of response message in addition to message 30MSEC processing time 40MSEC 50MSEC DBL BYTE DOUBLE REGISTER BYTE ORDER The transmitted or received order of the 4 bytes comprising an IEEE floating point value The default order is EXP MH MM ML or 0123 for reference FPB 0123 Big Endian FP BB 1032 Big Endian Byte Swapped FPL 3210 Little Endian FPLB 2301 Little Endian Byte Swapped Release M DR4500A Truline Circular Chart Recorder With or Without Control Product Manual 129 May 2013 Configuration Parameter Definitions Options Set Up Group 4 15 Options Set Up Group Introduction The Options Set Up Group lets you enable or disable some of the options that are available on the DR4500 You can select the power frequency select relative humidity as a measurement and a atmospheric pressure compensation select deviation recording action and set the desired deviation setpoint Options group prompts Table 4 15 lists all the function prompts in the Option set up group and their functions Table 4 15 Option Group Definitions Lower Display Upper Display Parameter Definition Prompt Range of Setting or Select
322. switch from one set to another Table 5 20 Procedure for Switching PID Sets from the Keyboard Step Operation Press Action Result 1 Access the PID set LOWR Until you see display DISP Upper Display The PV value Lower Display PIDSETX 1 2 Aor V Change PIDSET1 to PIDSET2 or vice versa Release M DR4500A Truline Circular Chart Recorder With or Without Control Product Manual 157 May 2013 Operation Using Accutune II 5 9 Using Accutune Il Introduction Accutune II provides foolproof trouble free on demand tuning in the recorder No knowledge of the process is required at start up The operator simply enters the desired setpoint and initiates the tuning The recorder immediately starts controlling to the setpoint while it identifies the process calculates the tuning constants and enters them into the tuning set up group and begins PID control with the correct tuning parameters This works with any process including integrating type processes and allows retuning at a fixed setpoint The tuning sequence will cycle the recorder s output two full cycles between 0 and 100 or low and high output limits while allowing only a very small process variable change above and below the setpoint during each cycle e Accutune works for all control algorithms except ON OFF e The recorder must be in Auto mode e Accutune works for integrating processes Enable disable Accutune using the tuning set up
323. t D Alarm No 2 N Alarm 2 w2 W1 contact D W2 N O contact Qo N V C 2 Position when shipped yo 2 N C with power off or 0047 uF Plug J4 Alarm indicator light on Capacitor gn M see Notes Ferrite Filter Fair Rite P N 0443164151 or equivalent Required for CE Mark Conformity Kit Part No 51197612 502 contains two ferrite filters Part No 51197612 508 contains 8 ferrite filters Install inside of case See Figure 2 11 Capacitor Kit 51197755 001 Install capacitors as shown in figure Notes 1 J4 terminals 2 and 4 are the non Switched connections to an SPST relay Selectable for normally open or normally closed as required Cable Shield i oc Ld ip 2 This relay supplies a dry contact closure User must supply appropriate power connections for his external device 3 This relay has a resistive load rating of 1 A 120 Vac 0047 uF Load calculation example C ds apacitor an Supply voltage 5 for example 115 Vac _ must equal a number less Resistance of customer than 1 amps controlled device m uU _ 2 Digital inputs PIN 3 2nd Control Loop Digital 2 PIN 2 1st Control Loop Digital 1 PIN 1 Recorder Supplied Voltage Source for Digital Inputs Plug J3 9 21417 Figure 2 19 Alarm Output or Digital Input Wiring 46 DR4
324. t Next small bar will light if PV is between 1 but less than 2 in deviation e f PV is equal to or greater than 10 deviation the green bar plus all ten small green bars will light Operator Interface Release M May 2013 DR4500A Truline Circular Chart Recorder With or Without Control Product Manual Overview Operator Interface Key functions Table 1 1 shows each key on the operator interface and defines its function Table 1 1 Function of Keys Key Function SET e Places the controller in the Configuration Set Up group select mode Sequentially UP displays Set Up groups and allows the FUNC key to display individual functions in each Set Up group FUNC e Used in conjunction with the SET UP key to select the individual functions of a selected Configuration Set Up group e Used to toggle between SP1 and SP2 e Used during field calibration procedure LOWR e Selects an operating parameter to be shown in the lower display DISP OUT Output Value estimated motor position for 3 Position Step SP Local Setpoint 1 SPN Current setpoint for setpoint rate applications 2SP Local Setpoint 2 RSP Remote Setpoint 1IN Input 1 if Loop 1 is a derived PV 2IN Input 2 3IN Input 3 4IN Input 4 DEV Deviation EU PV Engineering Units RH RH Value PIDSETX Tuning Parameter Set X 1 or 2 RAMP Minutes remaining in Setpoint Ramp RA Minutes remaining in SP Prog Ramp SK
325. t Function Name Selections or Range of Setting Factory Lower Display Upper Display Setting AxS1 VAL Alarm 1 Setpoint 1 Value Value in engineering units 90 AxS2 VAL Alarm 1 Setpoint 2 Value Value in engineering units 95 AxS1TYPE Alarm 1 Setpoint 1 Type NONE IN 1 IN 1 Input 1 IN 2 Input 2 IN 3 Input 3 IN 4 Input 4 RH Relative Humidity PV Process Variable Loop 1 DEV Loop 1 Deviation OUT Loop 1 Output DEV2 Loop 2 Deviation OUT2 Loop 2 Output EVENT SP Programming Segment Event TOTAL 1 Totalizer to Alarm On TOTAL 2 Totalizer to Alarm On TOTAL 3 Model DR45AW only TOTAL 4 Model DR45AW only AxS2TYPE Alarm 1 Setpoint 2 Type Same as A1S1TYPE IN 1 AxS1 HL Alarm 1 Setpoint 1 State LO Low Alarm LO H I High Alarm AxS1SCAL Alarm 1 Setpoint 1 Scaling 1 10000 1 Multiplier for Totalizer 10 100000 Selection 100 1E6 1000 AxS2 HL Alarm 1 Setpoint 2 State LO HI HI AxS2SCAL Alarm 1 Setpoint 2 Scaling 1 1 Multiplier for Totalizer 10 Selection 100 1000 10000 100000 1E6 ALx HYST Alarm Hysteresis 0 0 to 100 0 96 of Input Span as appropriate 0 1 Repeat this procedure for ALARM 2 ALARM 3 ALARM 4 ALARM 5 ALARM 6 Release M DR4500A Truline Circular Chart Recorder With or Without Control Product Manual 79 May 2013 Configuration Auxiliary Output Set Up Group 3 17 Auxiliary Output Set Up Group Introduction The auxiliary output will supply a 4 20mA output scaled to one of four operating parameters Input
326. t Manual Release M May 2013 About This Document Revision Information Document Name Document ID Revision Publication Date DR4500A Truline Circular Chart Recorder With or Without Control Product Manual 44 4929730 M May 2013 References The following list identifies all documents that may be sources of reference for material discussed in this publication Document Title Doc ID How to Apply Digital Instrumentation in Severe Electrical 51 52 05 01 Noise Environments Modbus RTU Serial Communications User Manual 51 52 25 66 Modbus RTU Serial Communications User Manual 51 52 25 69 Configuration Interface for DR4500 Release M DR4500A Truline Circular Chart Recorder With or Without Control Product Manual May 2013 Support and Contact Information For Europe Asia Pacific North and South America contact details refer to the back page of this manual or the appropriate Honeywell Solution Support web site Honeywell Corporate Honeywell Process Solutions Training Classes www honeywellprocess com www honeywellprocess com http www automationccollege com Telephone and Email Contacts Area Organization Phone Number United States and Canada Honeywell Inc 1 800 343 0228 Customer Service 1 800 423 9883 Global Technical Support Global Email Support Honeywell Process Solutions ask ssc honeywell com DR4500A Truline Circu
327. t or remote setpoint is attained through remote switch Control relay 1 or 2 is ON when lit Lower Display eight characters Normal operation Displays selectable operating parameters and values Indicates diagnostic error messages alarm condition for alarms 3 6 Accutune in progress Configuration mode Displays function group and parameters Upper Display six characters Normal operation Displays process variable PV for selected channels Configuration mode Displays selection or parameter value Indicates controller mode MAN Manual A Automatic LOWR MAN FUNC DISP AUTO CHART Keypad Key functions SET SJ AIV Bargraph deviation 410 of span Center green bar indicates PV is within 1 of control setpoint Next small bar will light if PV is between 1 but less than 2 in deviation e f PV is equal to or greater than 10 deviation the green bar plus all ten small green bars will light Figure 5 1 Operator Interface Release M May 2013 DR4500A Truline Circular Chart Recorder With or Without Control Product Manual 141 Operation Monitoring Your Recorder Meaning of indicators 142 During normal operation the indicators will light for the reasons shown in Table 5 4 Table 5 4 Meaning of Indicators Indicator Definition when lit ALM 1 2 Alarm condition exists for alarm 1 or 2 CHN 1234 PV displayed is for channel
328. te 20 watts max CONDIZIONI AMBIENTALI Non far funzionare l apparecchio in presenza di liquidi o gas infiammabili in quanto questo potrebbe essere estremamente pericoloso Temperatura Ambiente da 0 a 55 C Umidit relativa Da 5a 90 UR a 40 C Vibrazioni Da0a200 Hz accelerazione 0 2 g INSTALLAZIONE DELL APPARECCHIO Il apparecchio deve essere montato su un pannello per limitare l accesso ai terminali posteriori Release M DR4500A Truline Circular Chart Recorder With or Without Control Product Manual 283 May 2013 Foreign Language Safety Instructions NO21 6056 SIKKERHETSKRAV D 8 NO21 6056 F lg alle retningslinjene i dette dokumentet slik at du reduserer risikoen for elektrisk stet og mulige personskader Dette symbolet advarer brukeren om tilgjengelige terminaler med farlige spenninger og en potensiell fare for elektrisk stot Jordingsterminal kabelen for jording av systemet skal tilknyttes til denne terminalen e mE e Dersom utstyret benyttes pa en mate annerledes enn spesifisert av produsent kan utstyrets beskyttelsesgrad forringes e Ingen komponenter eller deler skal skiftes ut dersom de ikke er uttrykkelig spesifisert som utskiftbare av din forhandler e Det er p krevet med en hovedstromsbryter i n rheten av utstyret e All kabling ma utfores 1 henhold til gjeldende forskrifter og installeres av autoriser og erfaren installator e Jord ma tilknyttes for all annen kabling og frakobles sist U
329. tema de alimentaci n em e Si el equipo es utilizado de forma no especificada por el fabricante la protecci n suministrada con el mismo podr a resultar da ada e reemplazar ning n componente o parte no explicitamente especificado por el suministrador e Todo el cableado debe realizarse de acuerdo con las normas el ctricas locales y debe ser realizado por personal experimentado e FEl terminal de tierra debe ser conectado antes que cualquier otro cable y desconectado el ultimo e Se recomienda la instalaci n de un interruptor de la alimentaci n principal cerca del equipo DATOS ELECTRICOS DEL EQUIPO Tensi n de 102 a 132 Vac 204 a 264 Vac alimentaci n Frecuencia 50 60 Hz Potencia o 20 watts max corriente CONDICIONES AMBIENTALES No operar con el instrumento en presencia de liquidos o gases inflamables La operaci n de cualquier equipo el ctrico en tal ambiente constituye un riesgo contra la seguridad Temperatura Ambiente 0 a 55 C Humedad 5 a 90 RH a 40 C Vibraci n 0 a 200 Hz acceleraci n 0 2 g INSTALACION DEL EQUIPO Este equipo debe ser montado en un panel para limitar al operador el acceso a los terminales traseros 286 DR4500A Truline Circular Chart Recorder With or Without Control Product Manual Release M May 2013 Foreign Language Safety Instructions SW21 6056 SAKERHETSFORESKRIFTER D 11 SW21 6056 F r att reducera riskerna av elektriska chocker som kan orsaka personsk
330. the door and resume normal operation Replacing a burned out chart lamp optional Follow the procedure in Table 5 30 to replace a burned out chart lamp Table 5 30 Replacing a Chart Lamp Step Action Open the recorder door and remove power Unscrew and remove the hood from the lamp assembly Push the bayonet type lamp in and turn it counterclockwise to remove it from the socket AJOJN Reverse step 3 and install the replacement lamp General Instrument type 1828 or equivalent in the socket Replace the hood on the lamp assembly Close the door and apply the power 168 DR4500A Truline Circular Chart Recorder With or Without Control Product Manual Release M May 2013 Operation Installing Replacing Chart 5 17 Installing Replacing Chart Installing replacing chart procedure Follow the procedure in Table 5 31 to install replace the chart CAUTION Store replacement charts in a dust resistant location Otherwise accumulated dust on the chart may cause excessive pen tip abrasion which can shorten expected pen life In addition you may want to air purge the case if the recorder is mounted in an extremely dusty environment Table 5 31 Installing Replacing the Chart Step Action Open the recorder door Press the CHART key The pen moves to and stops at the outer limit of pen travel near the edge of the chart Also chart rotation stops
331. the procedure in Section 4 Configuration Parameter Definitions Table 4 18 to make slight adjustments in the print contrast n ATTENTION To access Set Up group prompt ADJUST the Set Up group prompt LOCKOUT must be set to NONE If the group prompt LOCKOUT has been configured for CALIB VIEW or MAX selection you will not be able to access the Printing Characteristics Group prompt Refer to Section 3 Configuration for details Release M DR4500A Truline Circular Chart Recorder With or Without Control Product Manual 215 May 2013 Input Calibration Printing Characteristics Adjustments 216 DR4500A Truline Circular Chart Recorder With or Without Control Product Manual Release M May 2013 8 Output Calibration 8 1 Overview j SHOCK HAZARD WARNING Disregard of these instructions may cause injury or death OUTPUT CALIBRATION MAY REQUIRE ACCESS TO HAZARDOUS LIVE CIRCUITS AND SHOULD ONLY BE PERFORMED BY QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL MORE THAN ONE SWITCH MAY BE REQUIRED TO DE ENERGIZE UNIT BEFORE CALIBRATION Introduction This section describes the field calibration procedures for the following types of outputs e Current Output e Position Proportional Output e Auxiliary Output n ATTENTION Calibration for Control Outputs 1 and 2 is identical except for the particular printed circuit board involved What s in this section This section contains the following
332. the wires into the appropriate screw clamps as shown refer to Figure 2 22 Tighten the screws to secure the wires Install the wired plug into J2 eb 53 5 ATTENTION Be sure that the 4 20 mA auxiliary output is aligned Refer to Subsection 8 4 Auxiliary Output Calibration TIP The 4 20 mA output on the control output board can also be set up for an Auxiliary retransmission output if it is not being used for a control output This requires model selection option Table Il 10 40 44 60 66 52 TIP Auxiliary output 2 and Auxiliary output 3 use Control current output 1 and Control current output 2 if Control OUT ALG is not set to CURRENT Refer to Figure 2 16 for Aux Out 2 and 3 wiring DR4500A Truline Circular Chart Recorder With or Without Control Product Manual Release M May 2013 Installation Option Wiring Procedures Auxiliary Output PCB Ferrite Filter Fair Rite P N 0443164151 or equivalent Required for CE Mark Conformity Kit Part No 51197612 502 contains two ferrite filters Part No 51197612 508 contains 8 ferrite filters Install inside of case See Figure 2 11 Capacitor Kit 51197755 001 Install capacitors as shown in figure 4 20 mA auxiliary Controller load 0 1000 ohms 22841G Figure 2 22 4 20 mA Auxiliary Output 1 Wiring n ATTENTION Refer to Figure 2 16 for Auxiliary Output 2 and Auxiliary Output 3 wiring
333. ting hardware supplied with recorder Leave the screws slightly loose so you can adjust the brackets While holding the recorder firmly against the panel slide each bracket against the back of the panel and tighten the screws Cutout for Kent model 105M 7 Drill two 3 1 2 1 4 inch holes 21408 Figure 2 7 Mounting in a Panel using Kent Model 105M Cutout Release M May 2013 DR4500A Truline Circular Chart Recorder With or Without Control Product Manual 21 Installation Mounting Methods Panel mounting recorder with NEMA4X door Refer to Figure 2 8 and follow the procedure in Table 2 7 to panel mount your recorder if it has a NEMA4X door Table 2 7 Procedure for Mounting Recorder with NEMA4X Door Step Action Place the panel gasket onto the rear flange of the recorder case Install five 448 32 x 3 4 screws on each of the four mounting brackets so the ends of the screw threads are flush with the face of the bracket NOTE Screw heads to be flange side of brackets Insert the case with gasket into the panel opening Position the bracket so that the tabs on the end of the bracket slide into the holes in the case Secure the four brackets with 1 4 20 x 5 8 long bolts and lockwashers one to the top bottom and each side of the case Tighten the bolts Start to tighten the 8 32 x 3 4 screws on a bracket Tighten the end screws first then those toward the middle until all
334. tion Manual Operation Automatic with local setpoint Automatic with remote setpoint Transmitter Supply Voltage 22 Vdc to 26 at input terminals 50 mA dc at 24 Vdc 8 DR4500A Truline Circular Chart Recorder With or Without Control Product Manual Release M May 2013 Installation Overview Condition Specifications Controller Output Optional e Output can be field calibrated between 3 1 to 21 0 mA On Off or Time Proportional One SPST electromechanical relay Control action can be set for direct or reverse N O or N C contact selectable On Off Duplex or Time Proportional Duplex Two SPST electromechanical relays Control action can be set for direct or reverse N O or N C contact selectable e Current Proportional 21 mA dc maximum into a negative or positive grounded or non grounded load of 0 to 1000 ohms Output range can be set between 4 and 20 mA and as direct or reverse action Resolution 10 bits Accuracy 0 5 96 full scale FM Approved Output optional e Position Proportional and Three Position Step Two SPST electromechanical relays operate motor having a 100 ohm to 1000 ohm slidewire Current Time Duplex and Time Current Duplex Variation of time proportional duplex for Heat Cool applications Time proportional output heat or cool is a SPST electromechanical relay Current proportional output heat or cool is a 4 20 mA signal that can be fed into a negative or
335. tion Run Monitor the Program Function Press Result Viewing the present LOWR Until you see ramp or soak segment DISP B mber and Upper Display R and the PV value Lower Display For Ramp segments RA XX XX jl Ramp Time Hours Minutes or Ramp Rate Degrees Minute Indicates Ramp segment Segment Number odd only For Soak segments SK XX XX Time remaining in segment in Hrs Minutes including current partially completed minute Indicates Soak segment Segment Number even only Skipping segments LOWR Until you see Upper Display R and the PV value Lower Display XX XX Ramp Segment SK XX XX Soak Segment RUN To hold the SP Program HOLD e An H appears in the upper display indicating that the program is in the HOLD state Aor V To select new segment RUN To begin running at new segment HOLD or SE To retain the old segment Viewing the number of LOWER Until you see les left in th DISP S Upper Display R and the PV value Lower Display RECYC XX Remaining cycles O to 99 This number includes the current partially completed cycle End Program When the final segment is completed the R in the upper display either changes to if configured for HOLD state or disappears if configured for DISABL of setpoint programming e The recorder operates at the last setpoint in the program in automatic or will be in manual mode at the failsa
336. tion at reference 1 2 F Note that factory calibration may vary by as much as 10 microvolts or 0 3 ohms for RTDs which means recalibration may be required to achieve stated accuracy 4 The RH calculation is inoperative when temperature goes below 32 F 0 or above 212 F 100 C However the dry bulb temperature will be monitored to 2103 F 75 C Accuracy stated is for Classic Series Recorder only and does not include remaining system accuracies 5 Only available with Model DR45AR Release M May 2013 12 DR4500A Truline Circular Chart Recorder With or Without Control Product Manual Installation Model Number Interpretation 2 2 Model Number Interpretation Model number The model number interpretation is shown in Figure 2 1 Write the model number into the spaces provided and compare it to the model number interpretation This information will also be useful when you wire your recorder The example on the next page will help you to decode the model T Number Table 1 Table 2 Table 3 Table 4 Table 5 Table 6 Key Number Standard Recorder Relay expansion Recorder Gray door Glass window Flow Recorder HTST Gray door Acrylic window Gray door Glass window and keypad F Gray door Acrylic window and keypad Blue door Glass window Blue door Acrylic window Input Actuation Note 1 Black door Glass window 0 None Black door Acrylic window 1 T C RTD
337. tions Lower Display Upper Display Parameter Definition Prompt Range of Setting or Selection PRx STRT RAMP1 RAMP 35 You can configure up to 6 profiles PR1 PR6 Each profile contains a subset of the 36 ramp and soak segments configured later PRx STRT designates the number of the first segment of the profile It will be a ramp segment odd number PRx END SOAK2 SOAK36 This designates the number of the last segment of the profile It will be a soak segment even number RAMPUNIT TIME Hours Minutes This determines the engineering units for the ramp segments EU MIN Engineering Units Minute EU HR Engineering Units Hour SYNC 1 2 ENABLE Synchronizes the profiles for Control Loops 1 and 2 DISABL This means that a Both SP programs will RUN or HOLD simultaneously b A Guaranteed Soak Hold on one profile will cause the other profile to HOLD for the duration of the Guaranteed Soak Hold 186 DR4500A Truline Circular Chart Recorder With or Without Control Product Manual Release M May 2013 Setpoint Ramp Soak Programming and Operation Setpoint Program Profiles Set Up Group Setpoint program profiles worksheet Use this worksheet to keep a record of your setpoint profile settings Prompt Function Range Your selection PROFILES Settings for profiles PR1 STRT Start Segment for Progam 1 RAMP1 to RAMP35 PR1 END End Segment for
338. tions and Shield Wiring CE Mark essssseseeeeeeeeeenens 30 AC Line Power RR USO RR IEEE ISIN TEE 32 Thermocouple RTD Radiamatic mV or 0 5 Vdc Input Wiring sse 34 420m A Input Witiftlg eite eee rre eem eoe t ERN ue i 36 0s10 Volt dc Input ers tr er ee ee 38 4 20 mA Control Output Wiring or Aux Out 2 and 3 Wiring sse 40 Position Proportional Control Output or Three Position Step Wiring sese 42 Relay Control Output Wurmng ere EISE OE REI ERAN re eeu 44 Alarm Output or Digital Input ener enne 46 Alarm outputs 43 4 5 and 6 Witte seo Res 49 RS485 Modbus Communications Wiring essere enne enne enne nnns 51 4 20 mA Auxiliary Output 1 WIMg eiiie niren nennen nennen nennen trennen enne nennen nnns 53 SI Lockout Switch tet a i tee ea e i be t lu e oe Ed 54 DR4500A Prompt Hierarchy cea pen e RR HE I SH cer eR e 57 Operator Interface sas oat be e eite eire b oi es eee eiu t iens 141 Deviation Bargraplis 5 ote eti e oni etas eh ee e e iet d letus 143 Raimp Soak Profile Ex atuple ote nh e i pi de bene pilosus 177 Location of the Input Connections on the Input Boards essen 201 Location of Jumper Positions WI MA and W3 on the Input Boards sene 203 Calibration Set Up Diagram for Th
339. to 55 C Relative Humidity 5 9o to 90 RH at 40 C 104 F Vibration Frequency 0 to 200 Hz Acceleration 0 2g Mechanical Shock Acceleration 5g Duration 30 ms Power 102 Vac to 132 Vac 50 60 Hz 204 Vac to 264 Vac 50 60 Hz Power Consumption 20 VA maximum Digital Indication Accuracy 1 digit Minimum Input Span Input Impedance Range is fully configurable with span limitation of the operating range selected 4 20 mA dc 250 ohms 0 10 Vdc 200K ohms All others 10 Megohms Source Impedance RTD 100 ohms per lead maximum Sampling Rate Input Filter Each input sampled 3 times a second 1 or 2 inputs 3 times in 2 seconds 3 or 4 inputs Software Single pole low pass section with selectable time constants off to 120 seconds Digital Displays Indicators Deviation Bargraph Vacuum fluorescent alphanumeric A six digit display dedicated to the process variable Alternate information displayed during configuration mode An eight digit display shows key selected operating parameters Also provides guidance during configuration Channel PV display CHN 1 2 3 or 4 Alarm status ALM 1 2 Controller Output OUT 1 2 Remote Setpoint RSP Temperature unit F or C or Engineering Units Controller s mode A or MAN 21 segment color coded deviation bargraph Green large On Control Green small Deviation to 10 of PV Controller Modes of Opera
340. to terminations inside the case Knockouts in the sides and bottom of the case accept conduit connections for convenient wire entry 2 DR4500A Truline Circular Chart Recorder With or Without Control Product Manual Release M May 2013 Overview Operator Interface 1 2 Operator Interface Operator interface Figure 1 1 shows the operator interface and described in Table 1 1 Indicates temperature units of PV PV displayed is for channel 1 2 3 or4 Alarm condition exists for alarm 1 or 2 when lit Remote set point or 2nd set point is active when lit Blinks when 2nd setpoint or remote setpoint is attained through remote switch Control relay 1 or 2 is ON when lit Lower Display eight characters Normal operation Displays selectable operating parameters and values Indicates diagnostic error messages alarm condition for alarms 3 6 Accutune in progress Configuration mode Displays function group and parameters Figure 1 1 defines the displays and indicators The function of the keys 1s Upper Display six characters Normal operation Displays process variable PV for selected channels e Configuration mode Displays selection or parameter value Indicates controller mode MAN Manual A Automatic LOWR MAN FUNC DISP AUTO CHART Keypad Key functions SET xay Bargraph deviation 10 of span Center green bar indicates PV is within 1 of control setpoin
341. tomatic mode will not be bumpless e f you select PD with Manual Reset you can also configure the following variations PD Two Mode control P Single Mode control Set Rate D and or Reset Time 1 to 0 e Other prompts affected MAN RSET Release M May 2013 DR4500A Truline Circular Chart Recorder With or Without Control Product Manual 115 Configuration Parameter Definitions Control Parameters Set Up Group CONT1ALG continued 3PSTEP The THREE POSITION STEP algorithm allows the control of a valve or other actuator with an electric motor driven by two controller relay outputs one to move the motor upscale the other downscale without a feedback slidewire linked to the motor shaft The deadband and hysteresis are adjustable in the same manner as the duplex output algorithm The Three Position Step Control algorithm provides an output display OUT which is an estimated motor position since the motor is not using any feedback Although this output indication is only an approximation it is corrected each time the controller drives the motor to one of its stops 0 or 100 It avoids all the control problems associated with the feedback slidewire wear dirt noise When operating in this algorithm the estimated OUT display is shown to the nearest percent i e no decimal Refer to the Operation section for motor position displays e Other prompts affected DEADBAND and Tuni
342. trol Product Manual Release M May 2013 Setpoint Ramp Soak Programming and Operation Setpoint Program Contents Profile Start and Profile End These selections let you specify the segments that will comprise each of the 6 profiles The first segment must be a ramp odd numbered segment and the last segment must be a soak even numbered Ramp unit The ramp unit selection determines the engineering units for the ramp segments The selections are e TIME Hours Minutes EU H DegreesSHour OR EU M Degrees Minute Ramp time or rate segments A ramp segment is used to change the setpoint to the next soak setpoint value in the program e Ramps are odd numbered segments Segment 1 will be the initial ramp e Ramps are specifed in terms of either TIME Hours Minutes Range 0 99 hrs 59 min Or EU M Degrees Minute Range 0 to 999 EU H Degrees Hour The selection of time or rate is made at prompt RAMP UNIT Set this prompt before entering any Ramp information n ATTENTION Entering 0 will imply an immediate step change in setpoint to the next soak Soak segments A soak segment is a combination of soak setpoint value and a soak duration time e Soaks are even numbered segments e Segment 2 will be the initial soak value and soak time e The soak setpoint range value must be within the setpoint high and low range limits in engineering units Specify the setpoint range with SP HI and SP LO in the control gro
343. u will need the following equipment in order to troubleshoot the symptoms listed in the tables that follow DC Milliammeter mAdc e Calibration sources T C mV Volt etc e Voltmeter Table 9 6 Procedure 1 Troubleshooting recorder failure symptoms Step What to do How to do it or where to find the data 1 Check the fuse on the main printed Replace if defective circuit board 2 Check the supply voltage Measure the line voltage across J10 on the Main printed circuit board 3 Check the connections to J10 on the Refer to Subsection 2 6 Input Wiring main printed circuit board Procedures Figure 2 12 AC Line Power Wiring 4 Check the transformer leadwire Refer to Figure 10 5 in Section 10 Parts List connections to the main printed circuit board 5 Check the system for brown outs heavy Refer to Section 2 Installation load switching etc and conformance to installation instructions 6 Replace the transformer Disconnect the transformer lead wires from the main printed circuit board Replace the transformer and tighten the screws Connect the lead wires to the main printed circuit board 7 Call Technical Assistance Center 1 800 423 9883 USA and Canada 236 DR4500A Truline Circular Chart Recorder With or Without Control Product Manual Release M May 2013 Troubleshooting Service Troubleshooting Procedures Table 9 7 Procedure 2 Troubleshooting pen trace fai
344. up Lower Display Upper Display Parameter Definition Prompt Range of Setting or Selection SCROLL LOWER DISPLAY SCROLL The lower display will automatically change to the next item as if the LOWR DISP key had been pressed at the interval selected NONE NONE Disables the scroll function 1 SEC 1 SEC One second intervals 2 SEC 2 SEC Two second intervals 3 SEC 3 SEC Three second intervals GRANDTOT ENABLE GRAND TOTALIZER When enabled it prints on the DISABL chart the sum of ALL the enabled totalizers as TOTAL XXXXXXXXXXX This is printed in the space for totalizer 4 If grand total is disabled total 4 on the DR45AW model will print normally Release M DR4500A Truline Circular Chart Recorder With or Without Control Product Manual 131 May 2013 Configuration Parameter Definitions Event Message Set Up Group 4 16 Event Message Set Up Group Introduction This Set Up group allows you to specify six event messages to be printed on a designated area of the chart and triggered by a specific selectable actuation The message can be six characters long Press the FUNC key until the specific event prompt appears in the lower display Event Message group prompts Table 4 16 lists all the function prompts in the Event Message set up group and their definitions Table 4 16 Event Message Group Definitions Lower Display Upper Display Parameter
345. up as described in Section 4 e Soak time is the duration of the soak and is determined in TIME Hours Minutes Range 0 99 hrs 59 min Segment Events Each segment can be programmed to trigger an alarm which in turn deenergizes the associated relay The selected alarm must be programmed as an event type for this to occur Selections are ALARM 1 ALARM 6 Segment events will not trigger a relay if that relay is configured with one of these higher priority functions Release M DR4500A Truline Circular Chart Recorder With or Without Control Product Manual 175 May 2013 Setpoint Ramp Soak Programming and Operation Setpoint Program Contents e Control loop output e Interval Timer e alarm type other than Event See During alarm conditions an alarm will deenergize its associated relay unless a higher priority function has been configured for that relay See Table 3 13 If you want the alarm to control the relay do not configure a higher priority function Table 3 13 Digital input remote operation Program can be placed in RUN or HOLD state through a remote dry contact connected to optional digital input terminals The Control Loop parameters REM SW and REM SW2 parameters must be configured as RN HLD to support this function The valid states of the contacts are e RUN contact closure places program in HOLD state HOLD contact open places program in RUN state 176 DR4500A Truline Circular Chart Recorde
346. up group and their definitions Table 6 6 Setpoint Program Event Group Definitions Lower Display Upper Display Parameter Definition Prompt Range of Setting or Selection SEGx EV NONE Configured event will be active during the segment All ALARM1 ALARM2 ALARMS others will be inactive x 1 36 ALARMA ALARM5 ALARM6 Example of how a segment event works For example to have Segment 1 energize Relay 1 e Program SEGI EV as ALARMI e Program AISITYPE or AIS2TYPE as EVENT Do not program the Timer function Relay 1 namely Timer For alarm programming information see Subsection 4 12 Release M May 2013 DR4500A Truline Circular Chart Recorder With or Without Control Product Manual 191 Setpoint Ramp Soak Programming and Operation Setpoint Program Event Set Up Group To ensure control of relay by segment event 192 To make sure a segment event operates the associated relay observe the requirements below Table 6 7 Segment Event relay operation requirements Relay Relay is controlled by in order of priority Requirements for operation of relay by segment event 1 13 Timer function Do not configure Timer 14 Alarm 1 e Configure Alarm 1 type Event 2 Alarm 2 Configure Alarm 2 type Event 3 15 Controller 1 output algorithms Relay Simplex e Do not configure Controller Position Proportional Relay Duplex Current Relay 1 with these output Duplex al
347. urn to original input type e If FAlL field calibrate Control Output 1 Input 1 or Input 2 Refer to Section 7 Input Calibration and Section 8 Ouiput Calibration CAL2 ERR Background Working CAL TEST failure Control 2 Output 36 Field calibrate Control Output 2 e Refer to Section 8 Output Calibration FACT CRC Check Device Status See page 230 Factory set input constants have been changed due to the change in input type 37 Check background test error message being displayed 38 Recalibrate Input or Output e Refer to Section 7 Input Calibration or Section 8 Output Calibration 232 DR4500A Truline Circular Chart Recorder With or Without Control Product Manual Release M May 2013 Troubleshooting Service Self Diagnostics Lower Test Group Reason for Failure How to Correct the Problem Display Indication EE FAIL Background Unable to write to nonvolatile 39 Check the accuracy of the parameter memory Any time you change a and re enter parameter and it is not accepted you will see EE FAIL 40 Try to change something in configuration 41 Call Customer Support 1 800 423 9883 USA and Canada IN1FAIL Background Two consecutive failures of input 1 42 Be sure the range and actuation are IN2FAIL integration for example cannot configured correctly IN3FAIL make analog to digital conversion IN4FAIL 43 Check the input
348. use fuzzy logic to suppress or mimimize any overshoot that may occur as a result of the existing tuning parameters It does NOT change the parameters ACCUTUNE ACCUTUNE II On demand tuning algorithm DISABL DISABLE Disables ACCUTUNE II ENABLE ENABLE TuneOF will be displayed as a status message Use the Increment or Decrement key to toggle status to TuneON New PID parameters will be entered automatically when tuning is complete AT ERR NONE ACCUTUNE ERROR CODES Read Only IDFL ABRT RUN 118 DR4500A Truline Circular Chart Recorder With or Without Control Product Manual Release M May 2013 Configuration Parameter Definitions Tuning Parameters Set Up Group Lower Display Prompt Upper Display Range of Setting or Selection Parameter Definition PROP BD or GAIN 0 1 to 1000 or 0 1 to 1000 PROPORTIONAL BAND is the percent of the range of the measured variable for which a proportional recorder will produce a 100 change in its output GAIN is the ratio of output change 96 over the measured variable change that caused it _ 10096 PB G where PB is the proportional band in e f the PB is 20 then the Gain is 5 Likewise a 3 96 change in the error signal SP PV will result in a 15 96 change in the recorder s output due to proportional action If the gain is 2 then the PB is 50 96 e Used with control algorithm PID A or PID B Defined as HEAT Gain on Duplex models for variati
349. uts be sure the current source is at zero before switching on the calibrator Do not switch the calibrator on off while it is connected to the recorder s input n ATTENTION For linear inputs avoid step changes in input signal Vary calibration source signal smoothly from initial value to final 100 96 value Calibration procedure sequence The calibration procedure sequence for all inputs is listed in Table 7 13 Table 7 13 Calibration Procedure Sequence Step Operation Press Action Result 1 Enter Calibration Mode SET Until you see UP Upper Display CALIB Lower Display INPUT n n 1 2 3 0r4 FUNC You will see Upper Display DISABL Lower Display CAL INn 1 2 3 4 The calibration sequence is enabled and you will see Upper Display BEGIN Lower Display CAL INn 2 Calibrate 0 96 FUNC You will see Upper Display APPLY Lower Display INn ZERO 1 2 3 4 Adjust your calibration device to an output signal equal to the 0 range value for your particular input sensor see Table 7 2 for Voltage or Resistance equivalents e Wait 30 seconds then go to step 3 212 DR4500A Truline Circular Chart Recorder With or Without Control Product Manual Release M May 2013 Input Calibration Calibration Procedure Step Operation Press Action Result Using Ambient g ATTENTION you are using the Ambient Temperature Method Temperature method to calibrate a thermocoup
350. wn in Figure 2 14 Strip insulation from the end of each wire Loosen the screws in plug J2 terminals and position the plug as you would to plug it into J2 10 For transmitters with power Insert the wires into the appropriate screw clamps and tighten the screws to secure the wires ATTENTION The DR4500A Recorder inputs are protected from overvoltage by a protection diode The wake up pulse on the ST3000 may not be recognized by the transmitter due to this clamping action It may be necessary to add 100 ohms of additional loop resistance so the transmitter and SFC can communicate e For transmitters which require power Remove the unwired plug from J11 then wire the transmitter power to J11 and the input to J2 Tighten the screws in the plugs to secure the wires 11 Insert the wired plug into J2 and J11 as applicable 12 Repeat steps 2 through 11 for input 2 3 and 4 printed circuit boards as applicable Release M May 2013 DR4500A Truline Circular Chart Recorder With or Without Control Product Manual 35 Installation Input Wiring Procedures Ferrite Filter die F air Rite P N 0443164151 or equivalent Required for CE Mark Conformity Kit Part No 51197612 502 contains two ferrite filters Part No 51197612 508 contains 8 ferrite filters Install inside of case See Figure 2 11 Capacitor Kit51197 755 001 Install capacitors as shown in figure VIEW A From
351. wo controllers both enabled CONT1ALG applies for controller 1 and CONT2ALG applies for controller 2 ON OFF ON OFF is the simplest control type The output can be either ON 100 96 or OFF 0 96 The Process Variable PV is compared with the setpoint SP to determine the sign of the error ERROR PV SP The ON OFF algorithm operates on the sign of the error signal e n Direct Acting Control when the error signal is positive the output is 100 96 and when the error signal is negative the output is 0 96 If the control action is reverse the opposite is true An adjustable overlap Hysteresis Band is provided between the on and off states e Other prompts affected OUT HYST DUPLEX ON OFF is an extension of this algorithm when the output is configured for Duplex It allows the operation of a second ON OFF output There is a deadband between the operating ranges of the two inputs and an adjustable overlap hysteresis of the on and off states of each output Both Deadband and Hysteresis are separately adjustable With no relay action the controller will read 50 e Other prompts affected OUT HYST and DEADBAND 114 DR4500A Truline Circular Chart Recorder With or Without Control Product Manual Release M May 2013 Configuration Parameter Definitions Control Parameters Set Up Group CONT1ALG continued PIDA NOTE PID A should not be used for Proportional only action

DR4500A Truline Circular Chart Recorder With or Without Control

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents